JP2016026514A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a distribution device 5000 for receiving game balls flowing down a game area, and alternately distributing the received game balls to a first position (first start pocket 63a) and a second position (second start pocket 63b). Ease of ball entry into the first position (first start pocket 63a) can be varied by providing a normal electric generator 64 accompanying the first position (first start pocket 63a), and opening and closing the normal electric generator 64. As a result, a state advantageous to a player can be set by opening the normal electric generator 64, and kinds of game value advantageous to the player can be increased, thus enhancing interest of the player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether or not the game is won is determined based on the winning of the game medium at the entrance, and when the determination result is a big hit, a game value advantageous to the player is given. For the purpose of distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance, there is one in which an introduction channel for introducing the game medium to the entrance is provided.

  For example, in a gaming machine equipped with two types of entrances, it is possible to alternate the winning of game media to the two types of entrances by sorting in the introduction channel. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball from entering one side of the mouth.

JP 2012-231902 A

  However, in the above gaming machines, there is a problem that the game is monotonous because the game balls that have entered the introduction path are regularly and alternately distributed in the two types of entrances. It was. As a result, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the mouth or the second entrance, the lottery means for performing the lottery, and when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, it is advantageous for the player A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game, a passage having an opening through which a game ball can pass, a first flow path through which a game ball that has passed through the passage, and the passage It is possible to alternately distribute the second flow path through which the game balls that have not passed through and the game ball flowing down through the first flow path to the first entrance and the second entrance The distribution means and the first ball which makes it difficult for a game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet And a variable member that is variable to a second position that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first position, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is moved from the first position to the second position. Variable control means for making it variable.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is the first A guide portion that is arranged along with the first entrance and guides a game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first entrance by being changed to the second position by the variable control unit; It is what you have.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the variable member is arranged on both sides of the first entrance, and flows down the second flow path at the first position. The ball is restricted from entering the first entrance, and at the second position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path is received and guided to the first entrance.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass and a second flow path through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down are formed. The game balls flowing down the first flow path are distributed alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance by the assigning means. The game ball flowing down the second flow path is variable between a first position where it is difficult to enter the first entrance or the second entrance and a second position where entry is easier than the first position. It is variable depending on the member. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means.

  As a result, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening can easily enter the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game balls that have not passed through the passage also have a predetermined opportunity. Thus, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, regular entry and sudden entry can be provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the second entrance is arranged in parallel to the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is Since the game ball which is arranged along with the first entrance and is changed to the second position by the variable control means is guided to the first entrance by the guide unit, the game ball flows down the second flow path. There is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter the first entrance, while efficiently arranging the first entrance and the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the second aspect, the variable members are arranged on both sides of the first entrance. At the first position, the variable member restricts the game ball flowing down the second flow path from entering the first ball slot, and at the second position, the game ball receiving the game ball flowing down the second flow path is Since it is guided to the 1 entrance by the variable member, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player by changing the winning rate to the 1st entrance by the variable member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the sorting device schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first start opening, and (b) FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus schematically illustrated to explain the operation of distributing to two start ports. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (a) is the figure which showed the area | region division setting and effective line setting of the display screen typically, (b) is an actual figure. It is the figure which illustrated before and after rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in a display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of a distribution apparatus, (b) is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow VIIb direction view of Fig.7 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow VIIIb direction view of Fig.8 (a), (c) is the arrow VIIIc of Fig.8 (a). It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of the front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the direction of arrow IXb in FIG. 9 (a), and (c) is IXc− in FIG. 9 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front member in an IXc line. (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow Xb direction view of Fig.10 (a). It is sectional drawing of the facing wall member in the XI-XI line of FIG.9 (c). It is the plane expanded view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member in the arrow XII direction view of Fig.10 (a). (A) is a top view of a disk member, (b) is a front view of the disk member in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13 (a), and (c) is a front view of FIG. 13 (b). It is a bottom view of the disk member in the arrow XIIIc direction view. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. It is sectional drawing of the front member in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow XXb direction view of Fig.20 (a). (A) is a side view of a braking member, (b) is a top view of the braking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIb in FIG. 21 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of a distribution device, (a) is the state before the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball, (b) is the state after the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball. , Respectively. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a sorting apparatus, (b) is a side view of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXVb direction view of Fig.25 (a). (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 27 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXVIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a weight member, (b) is a side view of the weight member in the arrow XXVIIIb direction view of Fig.28 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVb direction view of Fig.34 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVc direction view of 34 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVa-XXXVa line | wire of FIG.34 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVb-XXXVb line | wire of Fig.34 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXXIXb direction view of Fig.39 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 40 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XLc direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XLIa-XLIa line | wire of FIG.40 (b), (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 2nd angle position from a 1st angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 2nd angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 1st angle position from a 2nd angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 1st angle position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (c) is a 2nd angle position. It is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 12th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is disposed at the first angular position in the twelfth embodiment and the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) is the view in FIG. 46 (a). It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow XLVIb direction view. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is disposed at the second angular position in the twelfth embodiment, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the open state, and (b) is the FIG. 47 (a). It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow XLVIIb direction view. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter and the big hit and small hit determination values. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a hit between the second hit random number counter and the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the first special symbol, (b) is a jackpot in the first hit type counter and the second special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a classification. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the short time fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter and the fluctuation type in the first special symbol in the short time state. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter and the variation type in the second special symbol in the short-time state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 12th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is arranged at the first angular position in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) is FIG. 73. It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow LXXIIIb direction view of (a). (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the modified support plate member in the twelfth embodiment is disposed at the second angular position, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the open state, and (b) is FIG. 74. It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 13th embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in 13th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 13th Embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of the holding | maintenance symbol and effect symbol in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of normal in 13th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering the distribution unit in 13th Embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of the entrance into the entrance in 13th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the effect at the time of the entrance judgment period in 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the advance winning detection process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 13th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 13th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the advance prize production | presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in the case where a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of the fluctuation | variation in 14th Embodiment (it can replace). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in case the entrance judgment period passes at the time of the fluctuation | variation period (impossible replacement) in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance to the distribution unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance judgment period in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram to show, (c) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect after the entrance judgment period in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous variation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 18, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A sorting apparatus 1000 is provided at the lower center of the game area. In the sorting apparatus 1000, a normal electric accessory 64 is provided at the top. In a normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 stands upward while the facing blades 64a and 64b face each other at a predetermined interval (an interval in which a game ball can enter approximately one ball (the diameter of the game ball is approximately 11 mm)). Arranged in a state. In a normal state (a state in which the blades 64a and 64b stand up), the route through which the game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000 is only a route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. The player first fires the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

  When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, the entered game ball is alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution apparatus 1000 will be described.

  FIG. 4 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically shown for explaining the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the ball game balls to the second start port 63b.

  As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the sorting device 1000 has a disc member 1300 that is rotatably mounted therein, and an outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 includes The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are recessed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), when the left game unit 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 depends on the weight of the game ball (that is, the weight of the game ball is equivalent to the disc). The center of gravity of the member 1300 is decentered to one side (right side in FIG. 4 (a)) with respect to the rotation center), while the disc member 1300 stores the game ball in the left receiving portion 1310L, (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction). When the left receiving portion 1310L reaches downward by the rotation of the disc member 1300, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L and the left guide passage 1110L 1 It is guided to the start port 63a.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the sorting apparatus 1000 receives the game ball that has entered next to the game ball shown in FIG. 4A by the right receiving portion 1310R. That is, in the sorting apparatus 1000, the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed 180 degrees out of phase with the left receiving portion 1310L, and when the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned below, the right receiving portion 1310R is positioned above and It is comprised so that the game ball which carried out the ball can be received alternately.

  In this case, when the right receiving portion 1310R receives the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 uses the weight of the game ball in the same manner as when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball. 1300 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction) while storing the game ball in the right receiving portion 1310R, and the right receiving portion 1310R reaches downward. The game ball stored in the right receiving portion 1310R is guided to the second start port 63b by being discharged into the right guide passage 1110R.

  As described above, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a and the right receiving portion 1310R moves upward. The right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has been placed and then entered. When the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and the left receiving portion 1310L is disposed upward. Next, the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered.

  Therefore, the sorting apparatus 1000 can evenly distribute the game balls to be entered into the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be awarded, and as a result, the first start port 63a is caused by winning. It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second starting port 63b.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is activated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64, which is normally maintained in the upright state, stand up substantially vertically. It moves substantially in a V shape (inverted C shape) and guides the game balls by the blades 64a and 64b, so that the game balls can easily enter the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won at the first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, and the normal symbol starting port 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning at the first start port 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments blinks). After that, the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery), and the determination of the big hit type Do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, for example, “9” for 15R regular jackpot, “7” for 15R probability variation jackpot, “3” for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. After the jackpot, a game with a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability is set. That is. “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, which will be described later, is set. “2R probability variation jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of two rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability is set.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third symbol (the first symbol) in synchronism with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with a winning (starting award) to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8 inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that one of the third symbols is displayed in the left display area Dm1. The three symbol sequences of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol are displayed (see FIG. 5A). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols is also displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of the first lottery game and the second lottery game on hold) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured so as to be divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b is variably displayed.

  In the left display area Dm1, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity, and the variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the main symbol numbers are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the main symbol numbers appear in ascending order. On the other hand, the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

  Further, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three special symbols (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, respectively in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. The

  In the present embodiment, winnings to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b are each suspended up to four times. If a game ball wins at the first start opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) in the lower display area Ds. ) In the display area in which no reserved symbol is displayed, “○”, which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed in the lowest-numbered reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side). .

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as in the case where the first start opening 63a wins, the reserved symbol “●” below the second lottery game is displayed. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. When a game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000, the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b in order (that is, alternately). Whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed when the first start symbol 63a is won in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1, and then stopped. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 63b, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 at the same time. Therefore, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed by distributing the game balls to be alternately awarded to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 1000. it can. In the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed, so that the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. It is possible to increase the number of times and increase the chance that the player can win a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding lottery games are supported. Of course, it is also possible to provide each start port and to simultaneously display each lottery result in a variable manner.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game jackpot in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is set so that after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop pattern is obtained. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the corresponding display area (the left display area Dm1 or the right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display apparatus 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type. For example, if it is a 15R normal jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is winning based on winning in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, An opening / closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have won). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (not shown) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. Counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First jackpot flag 203o, second jackpot flag 203p, first variation stop flag 203q, second variation stop flag 203r, first variation time storage area 203s, second variation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. Having at least a memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 63a up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second start opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are used for counters when a start winning is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 63a during the timer interruption process, the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first reserved ball storage area 203a. Are stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and corresponding to each. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start port 63a or the second detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the start port 63b, the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is counted in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 63b. Is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start process or the second variation start process, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data. At the same time, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). Based on this, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 ( It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. As an initial value, zero is set by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing a normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 from the counter buffer, It is stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is turned on and stored (stored) in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. Yes. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, the data of the reserved balls are stored in order from the reserved area in the order of digestion in the reserved areas in which the data is vacant in the order of passing (start winning prize) to the normal symbol starting port 67. Is done.

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or the first symbol This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is in a variable display. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time reduction count is set, the normal symbol random table for high probability is set in the normal symbol random table 202c until the time reduction count is set to zero. In addition, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the random number table for the normal symbol for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the release time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the big hit (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the big hit game, depending on the big hit type, If it is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the first start port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second start port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a win while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process, the first special symbol variation display is set to OFF when the temporary display is performed.

  The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a win while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process, it is set to OFF when the temporary display process of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts to be varied, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and obtains time measurement data from the RTC at the time of the variation start. The configuration may also be such that timekeeping data is acquired and the fluctuation time is measured at any time thereafter. In addition, it is naturally possible to have a configuration in which the variation time for variation display is stored in advance and the value is subtracted as needed.

  The rearrangement hold storage area 203u is stored in each of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process. This is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on data is stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, slave first variation stop flag 223e, slave second variation stop flag 223f, slave first variation restart flag 223g, slave second variation restart flag 223h, slave first A variable time storage area 223i, a secondary second variable time storage area 223j, a secondary rearranged storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is analyzed by the command determination process. Then, processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  Similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is the second special symbol held by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The sub first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first change restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the change display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the setting is turned off.

  The second change restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the change display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of the actual fluctuation display is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the second variation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the actual change time of the variable display is stored.

  In the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, data similar to the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is received from the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control is performed. This is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output to the device 113.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is read from the backup area, and each corresponding hold area in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is changing. Stored in the data storage area.

  In the start-up process, as in the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process, all winning commands are generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203u from which the backed-up data is read and stored. By outputting to the lamp controller 113, data synchronized with the same rearrangement storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k.

  In addition, in the start-up process, a configuration in which data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is synchronized even when returning from a power failure by transmitting a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores each data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k as backup data in the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Anyway, of course.

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is activated when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, a detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b).

  FIG. 7A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 1000, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 1000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the sorting apparatus 1000 is disposed on the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8) and the front side of the substrate member 1100 (the front side in FIG. 7). A front member 1200 (see FIGS. 9 to 12) and a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 1100 and the front member 1200 (internal space). Then, the game balls that have entered the ball are alternately distributed to two positions (first start port 63a and second start port 63b in the present embodiment) of the first position and the second position (see FIG. 4).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 1100, the front member 1200, and the disk member 1300 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 8A is a front view of the substrate member 1100, FIG. 8B is a side view of the substrate member 1100 in the direction of arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member 1100 in the arrow VIIIc direction view of Fig.8 (a). In FIG. 8A, the front member 1200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 1200 with respect to the substrate member 1100.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the board member 1100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 1100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four positions in the central portion of the substrate member 1100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A), and the front side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A front side of the paper). ) And the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed.

  Two guide paths (a left guide path 1110L and a right guide path 1110R) are disposed below the center of the substrate member 1100. The left guide passage 1110L and the right guide passage 1110R receive the game balls discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the disc member 1300, and receive the received game balls in the first start port. 63a and a passage for guiding to the second starting port 63b (see FIG. 4), and openings (left opening 1111L and right opening 1111R) serving as entrances for game balls are formed to open upward on one end side. The opening serving as the outlet of the game ball is formed in a state where it is communicated with the left communication hole 1120L and the right communication hole 1120R on the other end side.

  The left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 8C) of the board member 1100 with respect to the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R. That is, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are juxtaposed along the front-rear direction of the board member 1100 (the vertical direction in FIG. 8A), whereby the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100. In the state, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are respectively communicated with the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 is inserted into the left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L via the left exit port 1222L of the front member 1200 and the disc member 1300. The game balls discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R are respectively introduced into the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R through the right discharge port 1222R of the front member 1200 (see FIGS. 14 to 18).

  A first start port 63a is connected to the left communication hole 1120L of the board member 1100, and a second start port 63b is connected to the right communication hole 1120R (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the left guide passage 1110L guides the game ball introduced from the left opening 1111L to the left communication hole 1120L and causes the first start port 63a to win. On the other hand, the right guide passage 1110R guides the game ball introduced from the right opening 1111R to the right communication hole 1120R and wins the second start port 63b.

  Next, the entire configuration of the front member 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9A is a front view of the front member 1200, FIG. 9B is a side view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb in FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the front member 1200 in the IXc-IXc line | wire of Fig.9 (a). FIG. 10A is a rear view of the front member 1200, and FIG. 10B is a top view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Xb in FIG. 10A.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the front member 1200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and a cylindrical facing wall member 1220 disposed on the back side (front side in FIG. 10) of the front plate 1210. And a shaft member 1230 disposed concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the facing wall member 1220, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The facing wall member 1220 is a portion in which a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) is rotatably mounted, and the inner diameter dimension thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the disk member 1300. Set to

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed such that the opening on one end side in the axial direction (right side in FIG. 9C) is closed by the front plate member 1210 and the opening on the other end side in the axial direction (left side in FIG. 9C) is opened. Is done. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 1100 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). That is, the assembling of the sorting device 1000 is performed by inserting the disc member 1300 from the open side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 1200 and fastening and fixing the substrate member 1100 to thereby attach the disc member 1300 to the sorting device 1000. The interior can be rotated and cannot be removed. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed with a ball inlet 1221, a left ball outlet 1222 </ b> L and a right ball outlet 1222 </ b> R, a left groove 1223 </ b> L and a right groove 1223 </ b> R, a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225.

  The entrance 1221 is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and is formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the uppermost portion of the facing wall member 1220. In addition, the entrance 1221 is the center of the facing wall member 1220 in the axial direction (FIG. 9C, left and right) (that is, both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the rotating member 1300). A game ball that is disposed at a position where the movement trajectory overlaps and is entered can be received (guided) by either the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R are for introducing the game balls conveyed by the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 into the left guiding passage 1110L and the right guiding passage 1110R of the board member 1100. And is drilled along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the lowermost portion of the facing wall member 1220 (that is, a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance 1221).

  The left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are spaced apart from each other in the axial direction of the facing wall member 1220 (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction), and the left receiving portion 1310L when the disk member 1300 is rotated and They are arranged on the movement trajectory on the exit side (the inclined side surface 1312 side, see FIG. 13) of the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left groove 1223 </ b> L and the right groove 1223 </ b> R are concave grooves having an arcuate cross section that are recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and extend along the circumferential direction of the facing wall member 1220. When the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is conveyed toward the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R as the disc member 1300 rotates, one of the game balls The portion can be received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (see, for example, FIG. 15).

  The curvature radii of the inner peripheral surfaces of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R (the arc shape in the cross section perpendicular to the extending direction) are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the curvature radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the disc member 1300 is rotated in a state where the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R, the game ball rolls or slides on the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R.

  The guide inclined portion 1224 is a concave portion whose upper surface side is opened and the ball entrance 1221 is opened on the bottom surface, and the inner wall of the concave portion is formed as four inclined surfaces inclined downward toward the ball entrance 1221. (See FIG. 10B). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down into the guide inclined portion 1224 can be guided to the entrance port 1221 and surely entered.

  Since the inner wall of the guide inclined portion 1224 is made higher (larger) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can be held inside (in the recess space). In other words, when a game ball cannot be introduced from the entrance hole 1221 to the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion is rotated along with the rotation of the disc member 1300. The game ball can be held inside the guide inclined portion 1224 until the portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221. When the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221 along with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the held game ball is passed through the entrance 1221. It can be promptly introduced into the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The tightened hole 1225 is a screw hole opened on the end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 10) of the facing wall member 1220, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 1100b (see FIG. 8) of the substrate member 1100. In other words, the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100 by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 1100 b from the back side of the board member 1100 into the fastening hole 1225 of the facing wall member 1220.

  A facing side magnet 1226 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. The facing magnet 1226 is a magnet for applying a magnetic force (attracting force) to the game ball conveyed toward the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R, and extends in the extending direction of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R. A plurality (three in the present embodiment) are arranged along the line.

  On the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, a shaft portion 1230 is erected vertically from the back surface of the front plate member 1210. The shaft portion 1230 is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and is used as a shaft that pivotally supports the disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a detailed configuration of the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R, the left groove 1223L, and the right groove 1223R of the front member 1200 will be described.

  11 is a cross-sectional view of the facing wall member 1220 along the line XI-XI in FIG. 9C, and FIG. 12 is a plan view of the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. FIG.

  Since the left outlet 1222L has the same configuration as the right outlet 1222R and the left groove 1223L has the same structure as the right groove 1223R, only the right outlet 1222R and the right groove 1223R will be described here, and the left outlet 1222L. The description of the left groove 1223L is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the right vent hole 1222R is a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 11) to the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 11) of the facing wall member 1220. Formed as. In other words, the right ball outlet 1222R is a hole that extends in an inclined direction toward the rotation direction of the disc member 1300 (the direction away from the right groove 1223R in FIG. 11). It is formed. Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disk member 1300 smoothly enters the right discharge port 1222R of the facing wall member 1220, and without entering the game ball. It can be made to pass to an exit (refer FIG.16 (b)).

  The right discharge port 1222R is an opening edge on the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, and the position of the opening edge on the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R (left side in FIG. 11) is the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R. Rather than the center of the facing wall member 1220 (ie, the side closer to the disk member 1300, the upper side in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball reaches the right drainage port 1222R (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) while accepting (inserting) a part thereof in the right groove 1223R, the outer peripheral surface of the game ball is It can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the right outlet port 1222R (the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R, the left side in FIG. 11) (see FIG. 16B). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped.

  The right groove 1223R has a terminal end (lower end in FIG. 12) connected to the right ball outlet 1222R, and a starting end (upper end in FIG. 12) is not connected to the ball inlet 1221. That is, the start end (upper end in FIG. 12) of the right groove 1223R is located at a position advanced by about 80 degrees from the entrance 1221. In the phase range of about 80 degrees from the entrance hole 1221, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310 R is not substantially in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (FIGS. 14B and 15A). This is because the recess in the right groove 1223R is wasted. Thereby, the strength reduction of the facing wall member 1220 due to unnecessary recesses can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, by making the starting end of the right groove 1223R a little (about 10 degrees) ahead of the position where the phase is advanced 90 degrees from the entrance 1221R, the game ball is surely introduced into the right groove 1223R. In addition, the effect of the right groove 1223R (the rolling resistance or the sliding resistance acting on the game ball) can be maximized.

  In the right groove 1223R, the recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 is increased (deeper) toward the right ball outlet 1222R. In this case, as described above, in the right groove 1223R, the radius of curvature of the inner peripheral surface is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball.

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls or slides in the right groove 1223R with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance that acts on the game ball from the right groove 1223R is transferred to the right ball outlet 1222R. The closer it is, the larger it can be. In addition, the amount that the game ball can be received in the right groove 1223R (the amount that fits in) can be gradually increased as it approaches the right discharge hole 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the inertial force in the direction of entering the right ball outlet 1222R can be increased. Can be held in a game ball.

  On the bottom surface side of the right groove 1223R, facing magnets 1226 are arranged in a line along the extending direction of the right groove 1223R. That is, the facing-side magnet 1226 is disposed at a position corresponding to a movement trajectory in which the game ball moves as the disc member 1300 rotates. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed on the side closer to the right exit port 1222R (lower side in FIG. 12) than the entrance port 1221 of the facing wall member 1220. In the present embodiment, it is disposed within a range in which the phase is retracted by 15 degrees from the opening edge (right side in FIG. 11) of the right discharge port 1222R (the central angle is 15 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the right groove 1223, the magnetic force of the facing-side magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. Can act. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right discharge port 1222R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is used as a target on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 acts, so that it is not necessary to dispose a magnet on the disc member 1300. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced. However, a magnet may be provided on the disc member 1300 in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the facing magnet 1226.

  A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of facing magnets 1226 are disposed, and the more the facing magnets 1226 that are closer to the right discharge port 1222R, the more the game ball (that is, the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R). ) Is separated from the facing wall member 1220 in the radial direction. Therefore, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 can be increased as the game ball approaches the right exit port 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the effect of applying a magnetic force from the facing magnet 1226 to the game ball can be gradually increased, so that the rotational speed of the disk member 1300 can be smoothly reduced.

  Next, the disk member 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a top view of the disk member 1300, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the disk member 1300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. These are the bottom views of the disc member 1300 in the arrow XIIIc direction view of FIG.13 (b). In FIG. 13B, the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are schematically illustrated by broken lines, while the push plate 1320 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the disk member 1300 is a member for transporting a game ball entered from the entrance 1221 of the facing wall member 1220 to the left exit 1222L or the right exit 1222R (FIG. 9). To FIG. 12), and is formed in a circular disk shape having a predetermined thickness (FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 13 (c) vertical dimension) as viewed in the axial direction.

  In the following, the surface on one end side in the axial direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13B, the front side on the paper surface) is referred to as a front surface F, and the surface opposite to the front surface F is referred to as a back surface B. In the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 has a front surface F facing the front plate member 1210 (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200 and a back surface B facing the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8). Thus, it is installed between the board member 1100 and the front member 1200.

  The disc member 1300 includes a left receiving portion 1310L and a right receiving portion 1310R that are recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, a push plate 1320 that is installed in the opening portions of the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, and a front member. And a one-way clutch 1330 serving as a bearing portion supported by a shaft portion 1230 of 1200 (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R receive the game balls that have entered the entrance 1221, store the received game balls, and discharge them to the left exit 1222L and the right exit 1222R, respectively. The concave portions are rectangular in front view, and are arranged 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R include an inclined bottom surface 1311 and an inclined side surface 1312 that continues to the inclined bottom surface 1311. The inclined bottom surface 1311 is a flat surface that forms the bottom surface of the recess, and a game ball is dropped from the entrance 1221 to one end side (the opposite side to the inclined side surface 1312) of the inclined bottom surface 1311.

  The inclined bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward toward the front side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300. That is, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, the recessed depth from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is deeper toward the inclined side surface 1312 side (the distance from the axis of the disk member 1300 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 is It is shortened toward the inclined side surface 1312 side). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the entrance 1221 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 rolls on the inclined bottom surface 1311 toward the inclined side surface 1312 (see FIG. 14). As a result, as will be described later, the position of the center of gravity of the disc member 1300 as a whole is decentered from the axis by the weight of the game ball, and the disc member 1300 is rotated (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

  The inclined side surface 1312 is a flat surface that forms the side surface of the recess, and the game ball stored in the recess is rolled on the inclined side surface 1312 toward the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (FIG. 15A). reference). The inclined side surface 1312 has an angle of 90 degrees or more with the inclined bottom surface 1311 and is erected from the other end side (the front side in the rotational direction of the disk member 1300) that becomes the descending inclined end of the inclined bottom surface 1311. The

  Here, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is the thickness direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13A and FIG. 13 (c) direction) while the left receiving portion 1310L is located in the center, the inclined side surface 1312 is positioned on the front surface F side of the disk member 1300, and the right receiving portion 1310R has the inclined side surface 1312 on the back surface of the disk member 1300. Located on the B side.

  That is, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) enters the ball when the disk member 1300 is rotated in both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R. It is formed so as to be able to pass through a position (facing position) corresponding to the mouth 1221. Therefore, the game ball dropped from the entrance 1221 can be received and stored in the recess.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member 1300 is rotated, the inclined side surface 1312 of the left receiving portion 1310L has a position corresponding to the left groove 1223L and the left outlet port 1222L (facing position), and the inclined side surface of the right receiving portion 1310R. Reference numeral 1312 is formed so as to be able to pass through positions (facing positions) corresponding to the right groove 1223R and the right ball outlet 1222R when the rotating member 1300 is rotated. Therefore, the stored game balls can be discharged to the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R have a recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (a rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312). The dimension is a depth dimension that is at least larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in the initial stage of receiving a game ball from the entrance 1221, the rotation of the disc member 1300 is suppressed by preventing the game ball bounced off the inclined bottom surface 1311 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. Can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the dimension of the recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is a depth dimension smaller than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when two or more game balls are successively entered from the entrance 1221, the second and subsequent game balls are inserted into the entrance 1221 (guide slope) in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotating member 1300. Part 1224).

  The pushing plate 1320 is a plate-like member that pushes the game ball against the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R and pushes it into the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The disk member 1300 is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw. In addition, a storage groove deeper than the thickness dimension of the pressing plate 1320 is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed in the storage groove. Therefore, the push plate 1320 and the head of the fastening screw are not projected from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300.

  Here, since the pushing plate 1320 repeatedly receives a large reaction force when pushing the game ball into the ball outlet, the fastening screw may be broken. In this case, since the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, the reaction force received when the pushing plate 1320 pushes the game ball into the ball outlet is applied to the side surface of the housing groove (the pushing plate on the side surface of the housing groove). 1320 can be supported), and the load applied to the fastening screw can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, breakage of the fastening screw can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed to the disc member 1300 with a fastening screw. However, the fastening with the fastening screw may be omitted. That is, the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, and the opening of the housing groove is closed by the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, so that the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 and the facing wall member 1220 If the gap between the inner peripheral surface is set to be smaller than the thickness of the pushing plate 1320, the pushing plate 1320 can be arranged so that the game ball can be pushed in and cannot fall off. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the assembly process can be simplified by the amount that the fastening screw can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.

  The one-way clutch 1330 is a part for regulating the rotation direction of the disk member 1300, and when viewed from the front (front F view) of the disk member 1300 shown in FIG. While turning in the right direction is allowed, turning in the opposite direction (FIG. 13B counterclockwise (left rotation)) is restricted.

  That is, the disk member 1300 rotates in the direction in which the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving part 1310L and the right receiving part 1310R is inclined downward (that is, in the direction in which the disk member 1300 should rotate depending on the weight of the game ball). Rotation) is allowed, and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  Here, for example, immediately after the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (before the rolling of the game ball falling on the inclined bottom surface 1311 is started, FIG. When a vibration is input to the sorting apparatus 1000 due to a disturbance such as a player hitting the glass unit 16 in a)), the disc member 1300 is opposite to the direction in which the disk member 1300 should originally rotate. There is a risk of turning in the direction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch 1330, even if it is affected by disturbances such as vibrations, it is in a direction opposite to the direction in which it should originally rotate. It is possible to avoid the rotation of the disk member 1300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 18, the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 1000 will be described. 14, FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are schematic partial sectional views of the sorting apparatus 1000 illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the left receiving portion 1310L from the left outlet 1222L. These are the partial cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the distribution apparatus 1000 which illustrate the transition of the operation | movement which drains the game ball received by the right receiving part 1310R from the right discharge port 1222R.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), when a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 1310L, The sphere falls from the entrance 1221 to one end side (left side in FIG. 14A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) is directed downward toward the other end side (inclined side surface 1312 side) by the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 14B). Thus, since the bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward and the game ball rolls along the downward inclination direction, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the entire disc member 1300 including the game ball can be increased accordingly. it can. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly.

  In addition, for example, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may not be started while the game ball is rolling toward the inclined side surface 1312 due to resistance such as biting of a foreign object. In addition, the game ball rolling on the bottom surface 1311 can be made to collide with the inclined side surface 1312, and an impact force can be applied to the disc member 1300 by the collision of the game ball with the inclined side surface 1312. Therefore, it is possible to provide a trigger (for example, removal of foreign matter by impact force) for the disk member 1300 to start the rotation operation. In particular, since the direction in which the impact force acts coincides with the direction in which the disc member 1300 should originally rotate, it is possible to effectively provide a trigger for the disc member 1300 to start the rotation operation.

  Here, the game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221 in an unstable state (for example, a falling state where the falling direction is not constant and the side wall repeatedly collides), and the entrance For example, when the game ball collides with the pushing plate 1320 and then collides with the side surface opposite to the inclined side surface 1312 (the left side surface in FIG. 14A), the impact force at the time of the collision causes the left Depending on the weight of the game ball stored in the receiving portion 1310L, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may start in a direction opposite to the original direction to be rotated (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 1230 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) via the one-way clutch 1330, so that the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L is inclined downward. Only the rotation in the direction (that is, the original direction to be rotated depending on the weight of the game ball) is allowed, and the rotation in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A) can be restricted. it can.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the inclined side surface 1312 has an inclination (ascending inclination) that rises with increasing distance from the bottom surface 1311. When the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started, the disk As the member 1300 rotates, the tilt angle of the rising slope is gradually reduced, and after reaching the horizontal level, the slope is lowered (falling slope) as it moves away from the bottom surface 1311. Therefore, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination toward the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220).

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the game ball reaches the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by rolling on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination. In this case, the left groove 1223L provided in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 extends along the movement locus of the left receiving portion 1310L (inclined side surface 1312), so that the disk member 1300 rotates. In this case, a state where a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 is received in the left groove 1223L can be formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b) and 16 (a), when the rotation of the disk member 1300 is further advanced, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the inclined side surface 1312 is further increased. Thus, the game ball is moved toward the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by its own weight and the centrifugal force that acts in accordance with the rotation of the disk member 1300. As a result, the disc member 1300 is rotated while maintaining a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L.

  Thus, when the disc member 1300 rotates, the disc member 1300 can be connected to the facing wall member 1220 (left groove 1223L) via the game ball. Therefore, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300 using the resistance when the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L. As a result, the disk member 1300 moves in the rotation direction. It can suppress having an excessive inertia force (rotation speed). Therefore, after that, when the game ball is discharged to the left outlet 1222L (see FIG. 16B), the ball can be reliably discharged.

  A push plate 1320 is installed in the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L. The push plate 1320 rotates the disc member 1300 in a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223. In this case, the disc member 1300 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball behind the game ball. Therefore, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball can be transmitted to the disk member 1300 via the pushing plate 1320, and as a result, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300.

  As described above, if a state in which a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, a state protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L) can be formed (the protruding amount) ), The game ball is brought close to the left ball exit 1222L, and can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. Therefore, the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). It can be done reliably.

  Since the recess depth of the left groove 1223L increases (deeply) toward the left outlet 1222L, the resistance of the game ball due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is reduced. As it approaches the left vent hole 1222L (that is, the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds), it can be gradually increased. Therefore, the inertia force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In addition, since the amount of a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L can be gradually increased in the left groove 1223L (that is, the amount by which the game ball protrudes from the left receiving portion 1310L), the disc member 1300 can be increased. With this rotation, the game ball can be moved outward in the radial direction (that is, the direction accepted by the left groove 1223L). Due to this outward movement in the radial direction, the game ball can have an inertial force in the direction of entering the left ball exit 1222L, so that the game ball can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the mouth 1222L (see FIG. 16B).

  Here, the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L after the disc member 1300 is rotated by a predetermined angle (see FIGS. 12 and 15A). As a result, the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the disk member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14) is the circle. Where there is no momentum in the rotation of the plate member 1300, resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is not generated, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started and advanced smoothly and quickly. be able to. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds (the middle stage shown in FIG. 15A and the latter stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B), the inertial force of the disk member 1300 is obtained. As the momentum gradually increases and the momentum increases, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed by utilizing the resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16A, a facing magnet 1226 is disposed near the end of the left groove 1223L. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed along the extending direction of the left groove 1223L (that is, the movement trajectory in which the game ball accommodated in the left receiving portion 1222L moves as the disc member 1300 rotates). When the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L as the disc member 1300 rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. As a result, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can act as a rotational resistance (braking force) on the disc member 1300 via the game ball, and the disc member 1300 can be decelerated. As a result, it is ensured that the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). Can be done.

  Further, by providing the facing magnet 1226 in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L in this way, it is possible to effectively brake the disk member 1300 using magnetic force (apply rotation resistance). That is, as described above, in the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 and the disc member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14), the rotation has momentum. However, at that stage, no magnetic force (a force that attracts the game ball) is generated, and the rotating operation of the disc member 1300 can be started and advanced smoothly and quickly. On the other hand, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 increases to the maximum at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 progresses (particularly, the later stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B). When the momentum increases, the inertial force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be effectively suppressed by using magnetic force (force to attract the game ball).

  In this case, since the plurality of facing-side magnets 1226 are arranged along the left groove 1223L (that is, along the circumferential direction of the disk member 1300), when the disk member 1300 rotates, The rotation resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member 1300 by using the magnetic forces of the plurality of facing magnets 1226, respectively. That is, when a turning resistance is suddenly applied to the disc member 1300, the disc member 1300 is suddenly braked, and the turning operation of the disc member 1300 becomes unstable. The reception by the unit 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the ball discharge of the game ball to the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B) are inhibited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member 1300 as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated and the rotation operation of the disk member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R and to discharge the game ball to the left exit 1222L.

  Further, the closer the plurality of facing magnets 1226 are to the left ball exit port 1222L, the smaller the distance from the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L to the outer side in the radial direction of the disk member 1300, that is, the left ball exit port 1222L. Since the closer to the left, the closer to the game ball that rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 is applied to the left ball exit 1222L. The closer it is, the larger it can be. That is, the rotational resistance applied to the disk member 1300 can be gradually increased, and the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated without sudden braking. Therefore, similarly to the above-described case, the rotation operation of the disc member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R and the left exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the left receiving part 1310L of the disc member 1300 reaches the left ball outlet 1222L of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball stored in the left receiving part 1310L By entering the mouth 1222L and passing through the left ball outlet 1222L, the ball is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the pushing plate 1320 provided on the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L is formed so as to be able to contact the game ball from the rear in the rotational direction of the disc member 1300. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged to the left ball outlet 1222L, the pushing plate 1320 contacts the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disc member 1300, thereby pushing the game ball into the left ball outlet 1222L ( Push in).

  In this case, the position of the opening edge on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is closer to the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 than the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L. Arranged. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L), while the left receiving portion 1310L is left When reaching the ball outlet 1222L, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L (the side facing the terminal end of the left groove 1223L, the left side in FIG. 16B). Thereby, not only can the game ball be reliably discharged to the left discharge port 1222L, but also the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 of the left groove 1223L is the maximum depth dimension at the end communicating with the left outlet 1222L, but in the present embodiment, this maximum depth The depth dimension is approximately ¼ of the diameter of the game ball. The maximum recess depth is preferably ¼ or more of the diameter of the game ball, and more preferably ３ or more. This is because the game ball can be reliably brought into contact with the opening edge of the left outlet 1222L and can be prevented from being bounced back into the left receiving portion 1310L.

  Further, the left vent hole 1222L is formed as a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 16B) of the facing wall member 1220 toward the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 16B). Is done. That is, in the left vent hole 1222L, the inner peripheral surface on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member 1300 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 can smoothly enter the left ball discharge port 1222L, and the exit (see FIG. ).

  Note that the left vent hole 122L is disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the opening of the left receiving portion 1310L) and is disposed at the lowermost portion in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L to the left discharge port 1222L, the ball can be discharged using the centrifugal force associated with the rotation of the disk member 1300, and the game ball is moved downward (gravity to the game ball). In the direction of the action). That is, when a ball is thrown, the game ball's own weight (gravity) acts in a direction that causes the game ball to enter the left ball outlet 1222L, so that it is difficult to bite the game ball and the ball can be discharged reliably. .

  Here, the facing wall member 1220 is disposed at a position where the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the inlet 1221 (see FIGS. 9 to 12), Since the plate member 1300 is disposed at a position where the right receiving portion 1310R is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received. The timing received by one of the portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R can be matched with the timing at which the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R discharges the game ball to the left ball outlet 1222L or the right ball outlet 1222R.

  That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, in a state where the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned in the same phase as the left exit port 1222L, as shown in FIG. 17A, the right receiving portion 1310R is 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is discharged to the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R. The next game ball can be received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R at the time or after the ball is discharged, and the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is left exit port 1222L Alternatively, it is not necessary to receive the next game ball in the middle of carrying toward the right ball outlet 1222R (that is, in a state where the disk member 1300 is rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  As described above, when the game ball is brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped (see FIG. 16B), the disk member 1300 is stopped. The right receiving portion 1310R faces the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) (see FIG. 17A). Therefore, in this case, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221, the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball is received from the entrance 1221 to the right. It is dropped to one end side (left side in FIG. 17A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the portion 1310R.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) faces the other end side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) on the bottom surface 1311 due to the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L and the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R are inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member 1300, the left receiving portion 1310L has received the same inclination direction. A rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and a rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310R. Can be in the same direction. That is, the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the disc member 1300 rotates alternately in one direction and the other direction according to the receiving portion (left receiving portion 1310L or right receiving portion 1310R) that receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is positioned at two positions. The operation of distributing to (the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R) can be stably executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the operation after the game ball rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along its descending inclination and reaches the inner peripheral surface (right groove 1223R) of the facing wall member 1220 ( The action / effect is the same as that when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball (see FIGS. 14 to 16), and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the sorting apparatus 1000, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, since the sorting apparatus 1000 has a structure using a disk member 1300 formed in a disk shape, a planar arrangement is possible. Therefore, the distribution device 1000 is disposed even in a region where the distance between the game board 13 (base plate 60) and the glass unit 16 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is relatively narrow. Can do.

  Next, a distribution device 2000 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped by the game ball being brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R (FIG. 16 ( b), the rotation of the disc member 1300 of the second embodiment is stopped by being braked by the braking member 2240. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, the front member 2200 according to the second embodiment has recesses 2230 that are recessed spaces provided in two locations, and the brake member 2240 can operate in the recessed spaces of the respective storage portions 2230. Respectively. Here, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the detailed structure of the accommodating part 2230 and the braking member 2240 is demonstrated.

  20A is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200, and FIG. 20B is a plan view of the front member 2200 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20A. As shown in FIG. 20, the storage portion 2230 includes an operation recess 2231 and a shaft support recess 2232 connected to the operation recess 2231.

  The operation recess 2231 is a recess for accommodating the protruding piece 2342 and the facing piece 2243 of the braking member 2240 so as to be operable (swingable), and the left groove 1223L and the left groove 1223L sandwiching the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R. Recessed at two locations on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on the opposite side of the right groove 1223R. The operation recess 2231 has one surface side (upper side in FIG. 20 (a)) opened to the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and one end side (right side in FIG. 20 (a)) is the left or right outlet port. It communicates with 1222R.

  The shaft support recess 2232 is a recess for housing (supporting) the shaft portion 2241 of the braking member 2240 so that the shaft portion 2241 can be operated (turned). It is recessed with a recess depth shallower than 2231. The shaft support recess 2232 is opened on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on one side (upper side in FIG. 20A).

  FIG. 21A is a side view of the braking member 2240, and FIG. 21B is a top view of the braking member 2240 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the braking member 2240 includes a columnar shaft portion 2241, a protruding piece 2242 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241, and a direction opposite to the extending direction of the protruding piece 2242. A facing piece 2243 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241 and an elastic member 2244 disposed at the extending tip of the facing piece 2243 are formed integrally from a resin material.

  The shaft portion 2241 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the shaft-supporting concave portion 2232 of the storage portion 2230. The protruding piece 2242 is a portion that protrudes to the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R through the opening on one end side of the operation recess 2231. By the game ball passing through the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R Pushed down.

  The facing piece 2243 is a part whose front end is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and is pushed up toward the disk member 1300 around the shaft portion 2241 when the protruding piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball. It is done. The elastic member 2244 is made of a rubber-like elastic body, and is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 when the facing piece 2243 is pushed up.

  The protruding piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the side. The protruding direction of the projecting piece 2242 is a direction in which the protruding piece 2242 is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft portion 2241 (that is, in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, see FIG. 22A).

  The total length of the facing piece 2243 is larger (longer) than the total length of the protruding piece 2242, and the width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 21B) is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Is done. That is, the facing piece 2243 is heavier than the protruding piece 2242 even if the weight excluding the elastic member 2244 is used. Therefore, the barycentric position of the braking member 2240 is located closer to the facing piece 2243 than the shaft portion 2241.

  The facing piece 2243 is formed to be bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the side, and is easily elastically deformed in the direction of increasing the bending angle. In other words, as described above, the facing piece 2243 is spaced away from or in the direction of approaching the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 even when the width dimension is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Elastic deformation in the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22B) is ensured.

  With reference to FIG. 22, the braking operation of the disk member 1300 by the braking member 2240 will be described. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 2000. FIG. 22A shows a state before the protruding piece 2242 of the braking member 2240 is pushed down by the game ball, and FIG. 22B shows the brake member by the game ball. The state after the projecting piece 2242 of 2240 is pushed down is shown respectively.

  The brake member 2240 disposed on the left ball outlet 1222L side and the storage portion 2230 that stores the brake member 2240, and the brake member 2240 disposed on the right ball outlet 1222R side and the housing that stores the brake member 2240. Since the parts 2230 have the same configuration, only the configuration on the right exit port 1222R side will be described here, and the description on the configuration on the left exit port 1222L side will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the braking member 2240, in the non-operating state (initial state), the protruding piece 2242 protrudes into the right outlet port 1222R, and the facing piece 2243 is the disc member 1300. It is arrange | positioned facing the outer peripheral surface of this.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the game ball drained from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 passes through the right drain port 1310R of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball causes the braking member 2240. The projecting piece 2242 is pushed down in the passing direction, and the braking member 2240 is rotated around the shaft portion 2241 to push up the facing piece 2243. Thereby, the extended tip of the pushed-up facing piece 2243 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 via the elastic member 2244, and the disc member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) can be reliably received by the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 14A).

  As described above, the braking member 2240 is operated using the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, and the operation of bringing the facing piece 2243 into contact with the disk member 1300 can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Power (actuator) and control for operation can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, even when the game ball passes through the right ball outlet 1222R, the state in which the facing piece 2243 (elastic member 2244) of the braking member 2240 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is maintained. Subsequent rotation of the member 1300 is hindered. Therefore, after the game ball has passed, it is necessary to quickly return the braking member 2240 to the non-operating state (initial state). On the other hand, if power is used for the return operation, as described above, the braking operation is mechanically performed, so that control and sensors are unnecessary, and the significance of reducing the product cost is lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gravity center position of the braking member 2240 is located on the facing piece 2243 side (left side in FIG. 22A) with respect to the shaft portion 2241 as described above. Therefore, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down and the facing piece 2243 is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when the braking member 2240 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise) around the shaft portion 2241). ), The braking member 2240 is rotated in the other direction (FIG. 22 (b) counterclockwise) by utilizing its own weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft portion 2241). ) To the non-operating state (initial state) shown in FIG. Therefore, power for the return operation can be made unnecessary.

  Since the projecting piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 toward the extended distal end side (right side in FIG. 22 (a)), the projecting piece 2242 is discharged to the right discharge port 1222R. It is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball from being obstructed by the protruding piece 2242 and to smoothly push down the protruding piece 2242 by the passing game ball.

  The facing piece 2243 is provided with an elastic member 2244 at its extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), so that the frictional force with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is reduced. It is possible to ensure the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member 1300.

  In this manner, the use of the elastic member 2244 can reduce the product cost. That is, for example, a structure in which the disc member 1300 is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece 2243 to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is conceivable. In this embodiment, since it is not necessary to form uneven shapes on the disc member 1300 and the braking member 2240, the shape of the parts can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the facing piece 2243 is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and an elastic member 2244 is disposed at the extending tip thereof, so that the facing piece 2243 is formed. When the extending tip (elastic member 2244) is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 130, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member 1300, the braking member 2240, and the like are caused by elastic deformation of the facing piece 2243 itself and It can be absorbed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244.

  Similarly, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, the variation in the pushed position and the direction in which the game ball passes is determined not only by the elastic deformation of the projecting piece 2242 but also by the facing piece. Since it can also be absorbed by the elastic deformation of 2243, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced back to the protruding piece 2242 and to pass it reliably.

  When the facing piece 2243 is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300, the abutment force between them (ie, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disc member 1300) is used as the protruding piece 2242. In addition to the elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244, the elastic deformation of the facing piece can be used gradually so that the rotational movement of the disk member 1300 can be prevented from changing suddenly.

  The assembling of the sorting apparatus 2000 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that a step of storing the braking member 2240 in the storage portion 2230 of the front member 2200 is added, and the opening side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 2200 The disc member 1300 is inserted and the substrate member 1100 is fastened and fixed.

  In other words, the storage portion 2230 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), and the opening of the concave space of the storage portion 2230 has an opening of the disk member 1300. The outer peripheral surfaces are confronted. Therefore, the opening of the recessed portion space of the storage portion 2230 can be closed by the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the braking member 2240 stored in the storage portion 2230 can be connected to the recessed space of the storage portion 2230 and the outer periphery of the disk member 1300. It can be operatively held between the surfaces. As a result, a member that holds the braking member 2240 (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as the disk member 1300, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for such holding. Can be reduced.

  Next, a distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the distribution device 3000 that distributes the game balls by rotating the disk member 1300 in one direction has been described. However, the distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment alternates in one direction and the other direction. Rotate to distribute game balls. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 3000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 3000 will be described. The distribution device 3000 is provided with a support plate member 3300 therein. The support plate member 3300 is pivotally supported between a first angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 23A or a second angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 23A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23B, the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23 (b), the support plate member 3300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 23 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, and is alternately disposed at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 3300 is provided with a weight member 3400 so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture in which the center plate 3330 faces upward. That is, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When arranged at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the weight member 3400 is arranged on the descending inclination side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A (shown by a broken line in FIG. 23B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When the weight member 3400 is disposed at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the weight member 3400 is disposed on the descending inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23B (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 3000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  24A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 3000, and FIG. 24B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 3000. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the sorting device 3000 is disposed on the substrate member 3100 (see FIG. 25) and the front side of the substrate member 3100 (the front side in FIG. 24). Front plate member 3200 (see FIG. 26), a support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 (internal space), and the support plate member A weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) to be attached to 3300, and the entered game ball is in two positions, a first position and a second position (in this embodiment, a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b). ) Alternately (see FIG. 23).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100, the front member 3200, the support plate member 3300, and the weight member 3400 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a front view of the substrate member 3100, and FIG. 25B is a side view of the substrate member 3100 as seen in the direction of the arrow XXVb in FIG. In FIG. 25A, the front member 3200 is schematically shown using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 3100.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the board member 3100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 3100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through these insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four central portions of the substrate member 3100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 3100 (FIG. 25A, the back side of the paper), and the fastening screw causes the front side of the board member 3100 (the front side of the paper side of FIG. 25A). ) And the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed.

  A shaft hole 3130 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the board member 3100, and an opening serving as an outlet for a game ball is provided below the center of the board member 3100. A left communication hole 3120L and a right communication hole 3120R are formed. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted through the shaft hole 3130.

  The left communication hole 3120L and the right communication hole 3120R are openings for allowing the game balls discharged from the support plate member 3300 to win the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b (see FIG. 23). In the assembled state in which the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed to the front member 3200, the front member 3200 is disposed at the downstream end of the guide passage (see FIG. 26) formed by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200.

  Next, the overall configuration of the front member 3200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26A is a rear view of the front member 3200, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the front member 3200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the front member 3200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c that are erected on the back side of the front plate 1210 (the front side of FIG. 26 (a)). These are integrally formed from a resin material.

  A shaft hole 3230 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the front plate member 1210. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted into the shaft hole 3230. The wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c are members that surround the periphery of the support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) and form a guide path for game balls distributed by the support plate member 3300.

  In the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c, the opening on the front side (FIG. 26 (a), the back side of the paper) of the internal space surrounded by them is sealed by the front plate member 1210, and the back side (FIG. 26 (a) the front side of the paper). Side) opening is formed. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 3100 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  That is, the assembling of the sorting device 3000 is performed by installing the support plate member 3300 from the opening on the back side of the internal space surrounded by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200, and setting the rotation shaft 3320 of the support plate member 3300. The substrate member 3100 is fastened and fixed while being inserted through the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, respectively. As a result, the support plate member 3300 can be installed inside the sorting device 3000 so as to be rotatable and not dropout. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The wall member 3220a is formed in an inverted U shape in a rear view, and the wall member 3220b is formed in a straight line in a rear view extending vertically on the inner side of the wall member 3220a. That is, the wall member 3220b is opposed to a linear part in back view extending in the vertical direction (FIG. 26 (a) vertical direction) of the wall member 3220a with a space through which one game ball can pass. Arranged.

  The upper ends of the straight portions of the wall member 3220b as viewed from the back are bent inwardly (in directions close to each other). The linear portion that is bent and extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 26A, left-right direction) abuts on the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R of the support plate member 3300, and rotates the support plate member 3300. It functions as a part that regulates the moving angle.

  The wall member 3220c is formed by connecting the lower ends of linear portions in back view extending in the vertical direction of the wall members 3220a and 3220b. As a result, the guide passage through which the game ball passes is defined, and the end of the guide passage is formed.

  In the wall member 3220a, a ball entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225 are formed. Since these are the same structures as each site | part 1221,1224,1225 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 3300, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 3300 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 28 is a bottom view of the support plate member 3300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C, the support plate member 3300 includes a cylindrical central cylindrical portion 3310 and an axial rotation shaft 3320 protruding from both end surfaces of the central cylindrical portion 3310. A central plate 3330 extending upward from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (upper side in FIG. 27A), and left and right from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (left and right sides in FIG. 27A). Left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R extending toward the bottom, and guide portion 3350 disposed on the bottom surface side (the lower side in FIG. 27A) of left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R. These are integrally formed from a resin material. However, the rotation shaft 3320 is made of a metal material and is fitted into the central cylindrical portion 3310.

  The outer cylindrical dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 is made larger than the inner diameters of the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, and the length dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 27B) is determined by the distribution device 3000. The dimension is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the substrate member 3100 and the back surface of the front plate member 1220 of the front member 3200 in the assembled state. Therefore, in the assembled state of the sorting device 3000 in which the rotation shaft 3320 is inserted into the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, the support plate member 3300 cannot be removed and can be rotated between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 facing each other. Decorated.

  The central plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R are portions formed in a flat plate shape, and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R extend vertically with respect to the central plate 3330. A space between the central plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340 or a space between the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340 is a part that receives the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000.

  The guide portion 3350 is a portion for guiding the weight member 3400 according to the inclined state of the support plate member 3300, and is formed in a bar shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, a linear portion extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 27 (a) left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and both ends of the linear portions are connected. And a portion connected to the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. The weight member 3400 is moved to the downward inclined side of the support plate member 3300 by sliding on a linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 (see FIG. 29).

  The linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. Therefore, the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced, and sliding resistance can be suppressed. Therefore, the weight member 3400 can be reliably moved along the descending slope of the guide portion 3350 without stopping the weight member 3340 in the middle, and the weight member 3400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400 (FIG. 29). (See (a) or FIG. 29 (d)).

  Next, the overall configuration of the weight member 3400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a front view of the weight member 3400, and FIG. 28B is a side view of the weight member 3400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the weight member 3400 is a member that is attached to the guide portion 3350 of the support plate member 3300 and functions as a weight, and is an end material (made of a metal material). For example, it is formed in an annular shape by winding a piano wire. Therefore, since the opening can be formed in a part of the weight member 3400 by elastic deformation, the guide member 3350 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the weight member 3400 through the opening. Therefore, the mounting work can be facilitated and the number of assembly steps can be reduced.

  In addition, when the weight member 3400 is formed by winding a material with ends, the end portions are overlapped in a front view. That is, the end material has a length of 180 degrees or more along the circumferential direction. As described above, the weight member 3400 is formed by overlapping the end portions thereof, so that even if the weight of the weight member 3400 is increased, the weight member 3400 is separated from the guide portion 3350. It can suppress falling off.

  Further, the material of the weight member 3400 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the material. Therefore, since the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, the weight member 3400 can be reliably and rapidly moved as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the operation of distributing the game balls and the operation of the weight member 3400 by the distribution device 3000 will be described. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are front views of the support plate member 3300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 3300 that receives an incoming game ball and discharges the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the support plate member 3300 is positioned such that the left receiving plate 3340L side is positioned downward and receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. At the first angle position, the left receiving plate 3340L is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise when the rotation shaft 3320 is the rotation center (FIG. 29). (B) Counterclockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  As shown in FIG. 29B and FIG. 29C, when the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, the weight of the game ball The support plate member 3300 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction) about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the game balls received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R are moved to the second start port 63b (FIG. 23 ( b), the support plate member 3300 is in a posture to receive the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. At the second angle position, the right receiving plate 3340R is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 with the rotation shaft 3320 as the center of rotation is viewed clockwise (FIG. 29 ( d) The clockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  When the next game ball is entered in the state where the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29D, the door receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In both cases, the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the opposite side to that described above, whereby the game ball is discharged to the second starting port 63a (see FIG. 23A).

  Thus, for example, when the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIGS. 29A and 29B), By turning the game ball from the first angle position to the second angle position using the weight of the game ball (FIGS. 29C and 29D), the game ball is moved to the second start port 63b. To throw a ball. At the same time, the support plate member 3300 is arranged in a posture (second angular position) where the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. Accordingly, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in the present embodiment, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  However, the center plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R receive the game balls, the direction in which the game balls drop, or the direction in which the game balls are discharged from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, etc. Depending on the state of the variation and the timing at which disturbances such as vibrations input from the outside to the sorting device 3000 are transmitted to the support plate member 3300, there are variations, for example, as shown in FIG. After the game ball is received at one angular position and the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d) and the game ball is discharged, it is maintained at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d). The support plate member 3300 to be returned may return to the first angular position shown in FIG. In this case, the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R in the same manner as the previous game ball, and the operations from FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d) are repeated. The game balls are continuously discharged to the second start port 63b. For this reason, the game balls cannot be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in this embodiment, the second start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  On the other hand, the distribution device 3000 includes a guide unit 3350 and a weight member 3400 that is guided and moved by the guide unit 3350. For example, in the second angular position shown in FIG. Since the member 3400 is moved to the downward inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), the posture of the support plate member 3300 is supposed to be originally (FIG. 29 (d) using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400. ) Second angular position).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 3400 is positioned at the descending inclined end (the left receiving plate 3340L side) of the guide portion 3350, so that the left receiving plate The 3340L side is made heavy, and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C, the support plate member 3300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 rotates by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction), the guide portion 3350 is also rotated in the same direction, and the guide portion 3350 is lowered toward the right receiving plate 3340R. By being inclined, the weight member 3400 is moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion 3350.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 3400 reaches the descending inclined end of the guide portion 3350. As a result, the center of gravity position as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 3400 (the lower right receiving plate 3340R side is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d), the support plate member 3300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 29 (d)), and the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (a). Since it can suppress returning to 1 angular position, this support plate member 3300 can be maintained at a 2nd angular position.

  In the present embodiment, since the support plate member 3300 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 3400 is made of a metal material, a change in the center of gravity position due to the movement of the weight member 3400 can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to reliably exhibit the effect of maintaining the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, a support plate member 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the portion for guiding the weight member 3400 of the guide portion 3350 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in a circular arc when viewed from the front. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 30B is a front view of the support plate member 4300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 30B, for the purpose of comparison, the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment is illustrated using a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed to be curved in a front view arc shape concentric with the rotation shaft 3320, and the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. It is arranged. In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 4350 is circular in cross section similarly to the guide part 3350 in 3rd Embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b), according to the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, when the support plate member 4300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 320, the gradient on the ascending inclination side is increased. Can be great. That is, in the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment, the weight member 3400 that is slidably moved by the guide direction (that is, gravity (self-weight) of the weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) at the position P1 on the ascending inclination side is the guide part 3350. Is the extending direction of the linear portion of the guide portion 3350.

  On the other hand, in the guide part 4350 in the fourth embodiment, the guide direction of the weight member 3400 at the position P2 on the ascending slope side is the tangential direction of the guide part 4350, and therefore the angle of the descending slope is made larger (more) Can be directed downward). Therefore, the movement of the weight member 3400, which is positioned on the rising inclination side (position P2) of the guide portion 4350 with the rotation of the support plate member 4300, is compared with the guide portion 3350 of the third embodiment. , It can be performed more reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the annular weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) slides on the rod-shaped guide portions 3350 and 4350, the friction resistance is large, and thus the weight that is positioned on the ascending slope side (positions P1 and P2) There is a possibility that the movement of the member 3400 may not start (that is, the static friction coefficient is larger than the dynamic friction coefficient), and the configuration in which the guide portion 4350 is curved in a circular arc when viewed from the front is particularly effective for such a configuration.

  Next, a support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 3rd Embodiment, although the part which guides the weight member 3400 of the guide part 3350 was formed in linear form from the start end to the terminal end, the weight member 3400 was added to the guide part 5350 of 5th Embodiment. A depression (depression 5350a) is formed in a part of the guided portion. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a front view of the support plate member 5300 arranged at the second angular position. FIG. 31B shows the support plate member 5300 in a state where the weight member 3400 is attached to the guide portion 5350.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 31A left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 31 (a)) of the linear portion to be provided, recessed portions 5350a that are recessed downward are formed.

  The hollow portion 5350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 5350 is set to the same cross-sectional shape as a whole including the hollow part 5350a, and is circular in cross section like the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), since the recessed portions 5350a are formed at both ends of the guide portion 5350, the guide plate 5300 is rotated with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. When the weight member 3400 moves toward one end side (the right side in FIG. 31 (b)) along the downward inclination of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is moved to the recess portion 5350a. Can be fitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from bouncing back to the rising slope side (left side in FIG. 31B).

  That is, like the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), when the entire portion that guides the weight member 3400 is formed in a straight line from the start end to the end, it follows the descending slope of the guide portion 3350. When the weight member 3400 is slid vigorously to the end and is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end (right end in FIG. 29 (d)), there is nothing that hinders the movement of the bounced weight member 3400. The member 3400 may be bounced back to the start end (left end in FIG. 29 (d)). In that case, with the movement of the weight member 3400, the support plate member 3300 is rotated in the opposite direction, and cannot be maintained in a desired posture (first angular position or second angular position). .

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment, since the recessed portion 5350a is formed at the terminal end (right end in FIG. 31B) of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is formed along the descending inclination of the guide portion 5350. Even if it is slid swiftly to the end, the weight member 3400 is fitted into the recess 5350a and collides with the end (the right end in FIG. 31 (b)), so it is rebounded in the reverse direction at the end. However, the movement of the weight member 3400 in the rebound direction can be inhibited by the upward inclination of the recess 5350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 31 (b)), and the support plate member 5300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment will be described. In 3rd Embodiment, although the case where the weight member 3400 was formed from the raw material of a cross-section circular strip | line body was demonstrated, the weight members 6400 and 7400 of 6th Embodiment and 7th Embodiment are from plate-shaped material. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment is made of a metal material, and a circular plate shape in which a slit extending in the radial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is a member. According to this weight member 6400, since the material has a thickness in the axial direction, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are shifted in the axial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  FIG. 33A is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 33A, the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment is made of a metal material, and a cylindrical member in which a slit extending in the axial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is. According to this weight member 7400, since the material has a thickness in the radial direction, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are displaced in the radial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  According to the weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, for example, the weight member 6400 can be formed in one step by punching a shape including a slit by pressing from a flat plate material, A plurality of weight members 7400 can be formed by rolling a flat material by roll processing, creating a relatively long roll-shaped body, and cutting the roll-shaped body at predetermined lengths. Therefore, these weight members 7400 Manufacturing efficiency can be increased, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Thus, while the weight members 6400 and 7400 are easy to manufacture, the weight members 6400 and 7400 are made of a plate-shaped material, so that it is easy to secure the weight as the weight. Thus, by applying the weight to the support plate member 3300 or the like as a weight, the holding plate member 3300 or the like can be reliably maintained in a posture (first angle position or second angle position) that should be originally.

  Next, a support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In 3rd Embodiment, although the guide part 3350 was penetrated to the cyclic | annular weight member 3400 and the weight member 3400 was slid along the guide part 3350, the weight member 8400 of 8th Embodiment is as follows. Rolled along the guide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 8300 in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 (c) is a bottom view of the support plate member 8300 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVc in FIG. 34 (a). 35A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 8300 along the line XXXVa-XXXVa in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 35B is a support plate along the line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of member 8300.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes a box body 8350 for housing a weight member 8400 on the bottom side of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the box 8350. A lid body 8360 attached to the opening is disposed, and the weight member 8400 rolls along a path formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 (see FIG. 36).

  The box 8350 is a box-shaped body that is open on one side (the front side in FIG. 34 (a)), the ceiling surface is formed by the central cylindrical portion 3310, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R. The bottom surface is formed in parallel with the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (the left-right direction in FIG. 35A). The side walls (left and right side walls in FIG. 35 (a)) facing each other of the box 8350 are bulged outward in a semicircular cross section, and the bulged portion (meat) Fastened holes 8351 are respectively formed in the thick portions).

  The lid body 8360 is a plate-like body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an insertion hole for inserting the fastening screw 8370 is provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 34 (a) left-right direction). The fastening screw 8370 inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the fastening hole 8351 of the box body 8350, whereby the lid body 8360 is fastened and fixed to the box body 8350, and one side of the box body 8350 (FIG. 34 (a The opening on the front side) is closed by the lid 8360.

  The weight member 8400 is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material, and is housed in a passage formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the rotation shaft 3320. The length of the weight member 8400 in the axial direction is slightly smaller than the facing distance between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360 (the distance in the left-right direction in FIG. 35B). Accordingly, the weight of the weight member 8400 can be secured, and the posture of the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being disturbed in the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being bitten between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360.

  Next, the operation of the weight member 8400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (d) are front views of the support plate member 8300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 8300 that receives a game ball that has been entered and discharges the game ball. Note that the game ball distribution operation is the same as that in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 8400 has a descending inclined end (left receiving plate 3340L) of a passage (hereinafter referred to as “passage”) formed by the box 8350 and the lid 8360. The left support plate 3340L side is made heavy and the support plate member 8300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36C, the support plate member 8300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 2369 (b)), the passage is also rotated in the same direction, and the passage is inclined downward toward the right receiving plate 3340R. Thus, the weight member 8400 is rolled along the downward slope of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 36D, when the support plate member 8300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 8400 reaches the descending inclined end (one of the opposing side walls) of the passage. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 8400 (the right receiving plate 3340R side positioned below is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angle position shown in FIG. 36 (d), the support plate member 8300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 (d)), and the second angle position shown in FIG. Since it can suppress returning to 1 angle position, this support plate member 8300 can be maintained in a 2nd angle position.

  In the present embodiment, a passage parallel to the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R is formed, and the weight member 8400 is formed as a columnar body that can roll on the passage, so that the support plate member 8300 rotates. Accordingly, when the passage is inclined downward, the weight member 8400 can be reliably and rapidly moved along the downward inclination of the passage.

  For example, in the structure in which the annular weight member 3400 moves by sliding the guide portion 3350 as in the case of the third embodiment, since the sliding resistance is large, the movement of the weight member 3400 is not started, or the guide portion The weight member 3400 that moves along the descending slope of 3350 may stop halfway, and the movement speed of the weight member 3400 may not be in time because the movement speed is slow.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body and is configured to roll the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end of the passage, The weight member 8400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 8300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 8400.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the box body 8350 is made of a resin material, the entire support plate member 8300 can be integrally formed, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, its weight can be secured, so that the change in the center of gravity position due to rolling can be increased.

  On the other hand, during the game ball sorting operation by the support plate member 8300 (see FIG. 36), the opposite side walls of the box 8350 (that is, one end side and the other end side of the passage where the weight member 8400 rolls, FIG. a) Since the weight member 8400 repeatedly collides with the left side and the right side, as described above, the box 8350 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, the box The side walls of the 8350 facing each other are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a fastening hole 8351 for fastening the fastening screw 8351 is formed on the side walls of the box 8350 facing each other, and a part of the side wall is partially formed along with the formation of the fastening hole 8351. It bulges outward (thickness). Therefore, a state in which the fastening screw 8370 made of a metal material is embedded in the opposite side walls of the box 8350 can be formed, and a part of the side wall can be partially thickened. The portion where 84000 collides can be reinforced to prevent the side wall from being damaged. In addition, the structure for fastening and fixing the box 8350 and the lid 8360 can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the weight member 84000 collides (the side wall of the box 8350). Since it is not necessary to provide the product, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a support plate member 9300 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the bottom surface of the passage in which the weight member 8400 rolls is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front end to the end, but the weight member 8400 is formed on the bottom surface of the passage in the ninth embodiment. A depression (depression 9350a) is formed in a part of the portion that guides the movement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 37A, the weight member 8400 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the bottom surface of the box 9350 in the ninth embodiment has a horizontal direction parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIG. 37 (a) horizontal direction). At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 37 (a)) of the linear portion extending to the bottom, recessed portions 9350a that are recessed downward are formed. The hollow portion 9350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 37 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), since the recessed portions 9350a are formed at both ends of the box body 9350, the support plate member 9300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as a rotation center. Even if the weight member 8400 rolls vigorously to the end along the descending inclination, the weight member 8400 is fitted into the recess 9350a while the end (see FIG. 37 (b) right end), even if it is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end, it is possible to inhibit the movement of the weight member 8400 in the bounce direction due to the rising inclination of the recess 9350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 8400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 37 (b)), and the support plate member 9300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, a sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position is changed by sliding the weight member 3400 along the guide portion 3350 has been described. In the tenth embodiment, either the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R is used. The position of the center of gravity is changed by hanging one side downward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 38 (a) shows the operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 10000 will be described. The sorting device 10000 has a support plate member 10300 disposed therein. The support plate member 10300 is pivotally supported between a first angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 38A or a second angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 38A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B, the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38 (b), the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball and is alternately arranged at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 10300 is provided with a left weight member 10360L and a right weight member 10360R so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture facing right above. That is, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When placed at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the left weight member 10360L hangs down on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and maintains the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When arranged at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the right weight member 10360R is suspended downward (to the right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 10300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 10300 receives the next game ball to be entered at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38B (broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 10000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100 and the support plate member 10300 will be described in order. FIG. 39A is a front view of the substrate member 10100, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the substrate member 10100 in the direction of the arrow XXXIXb in FIG. In FIG. 39A, the front member 3200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 10100.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, the board member 10100 differs from the board member 3100 in the third embodiment only in that an upper protrusion 10141 and a lower protrusion 10142 are added. The configuration is the same. Therefore, only different configurations will be described.

  A pair of upper protrusions 10141 and a pair of lower protrusions 10142 protrude from the periphery of the shaft hole 3130 of the substrate member 10100. The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 are columnar protrusions used when the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and are released from the magnetic attachment (FIGS. 42 and 43). The pair of upper protrusions 10141 are equally disposed on the left and right sides at positions above the shaft hole 3130, and the pair of lower protrusions 10142 are equally disposed on the left and right positions at positions below the shaft hole 3130. The

  The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 39A) of the shaft hole 3130 are left-locked when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. The upper projection 10141 and the lower projection 10142 that are provided on the movement trajectory of the piece 10370L and are located to the right of the shaft hole 3130 (right side in FIG. 39A) have the support plate member 10300 that rotates the rotation shaft 3320. It protrudes on the movement trajectory of the left locking piece 10370L when rotated as the center. Therefore, when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320, the left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are locked to the upper protrusion 10141 or the lower protrusion 10142 (FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 10300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 10300, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 10300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 42 is a bottom view of the support plate member 10300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 10300 along the XLIa-XLIa line of FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B is a view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the first angular position. It is a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports a rotating shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the left receiving plate 3340L, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 10350. A left weight member 10360L and a left locking piece 10370L are fixed to the rotation shaft 10351. Similarly, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the right receiving plate 3340R, and the rotation shaft 10351 pivotally supported by the bearing 10350 includes The right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed.

  The left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are plate-like bodies made of a metal material (magnetic material) and are formed in the same shape. The left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are portions that are locked to the upper protrusion 1141 or the lower protrusion 1142 when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 2210. For example, as shown to Fig.41 (a), it arrange | positions by plane symmetry with the center board 3330 as a symmetry plane.

  Note that the left weight member 10360L and the left locking piece 10370L, and the right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed to the same rotation shaft 10351, respectively, and thus rotate in the same phase together with the rotation shafts 10351. Is moved (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Magnets 10380 are disposed on the bottom surface of left receiving plate 3340L and the bottom surface of right receiving plate 3340R, respectively. Each of these magnets 10380 magnetizes the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R, thereby maintaining the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R ( 42 and 43).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the left receiving plate 3340L is disposed at the first angular position below the right receiving plate 3340R, the support plate member 10300 is on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side). The left weight member 10360L located in the vertical direction is suspended vertically, while the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 can be rotated clockwise in FIG. 41 (b) with the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 being eccentric to the left receiving plate 3340L side with respect to the rotation shaft 3320 and the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Since it is suppressed, the first angular position shown in FIG. 41 (b) is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 41B (first angular position), when the next game ball is inserted, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. . As a result, the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 41B around the rotation shaft 3320 by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position (FIG. 38). (Refer to the state of the solid line in (b)).

  At this second angular position, the support plate member 10300 is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 with the left weight member 10360L suspended vertically at the first angular position, while being magnetized to the magnet 10380 at the first angular position. The right weight member 10360R is released from the magnetic attachment and is suspended vertically. Therefore, the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 is decentered toward the right receiving plate 3340R with respect to the rotation shaft 3320, and the rotation of the support plate member 10300 about the rotation shaft 3320 in the counterclockwise direction is suppressed. Therefore, the second angular position is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  In the present embodiment, the magnet 10380 is used to maintain the state in which the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3344R. Compared to the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, the structure can be simplified, and the close state can be maintained and the releasing operation can be performed reliably. Can be improved.

  Further, since the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material), the magnet 10380 may be only the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R. It is necessary to arrange a magnet in Therefore, the number of magnets can be reduced by half compared to the case where the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R are provided with magnets, respectively. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

  Furthermore, the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material, so that not only the number of magnets can be reduced, but also the weight as a weight can be increased. In addition, the amount of movement of the center of gravity associated with the rotation of the right weight member 10360R can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 10300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  42 and 43, when the support plate member 10300 is disposed from the first angle position to the second angle position (or vice versa) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, the left weight member The principle that the states of the 10360L and the right weight member 10360R (the suspended state and the magnetically attached state) are alternately switched will be described.

  FIG. 42A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position. FIGS. 42B and 42C are directed from the first angular position to the second angular position. FIG. 42D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the second angular position.

  On the other hand, FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position, and FIGS. 43B and 43C illustrate the first angular position from the second angular position. FIG. 43D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position.

  The principle that the state of the left weight member 10360L is alternately switched in the transition from the first angular position to the second angular position and the transition from the second angular position to the first angular position is that the right weight member 10360R Since the state is alternately switched and is the same as the principle, only the right weight member 10360R will be described, and the description of the left weight member 10360L will be omitted. 42 (b) to 42 (d), the upper protrusion 10141 is not shown, and in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (d), the lower protrusion 10142 is not shown.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 42A to 42D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the first angular position (FIG. 42A) to the second angular position (FIG. 42D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising inclination side, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R. Maintained. In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap between both the upper protrusion 1141 and the lower protrusion 1142.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 3320, the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ2. The right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the lower protrusion 10142. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the lower protrusion 10142, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right locking piece 10370R is pushed upward relatively by the lower protrusion 10142 (in the direction close to the right receiving plate 3340R, the upper side of FIG. 42B), as shown in FIG. 42C. The weight member 10360R is rotated in the direction away from the right receiving plate 3340R (the lower side in FIG. 42B), and the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released as shown in FIG.

  Since the right weight member 10360R is heavier than the right locking piece 10370R, when the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released, the right weight member 10360R hangs vertically around the rotation shaft 10351 as the rotation center. When the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (c) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, and the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ4, the right receiving plate 3340R is disposed at the second angular position. .

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the descending slope side. In this case, the right locking piece 10370 </ b> R is disposed at a position having a gap with the lower protrusion 1142. Therefore, the weight of the right weight member 10360R can be efficiently applied to the right receiving plate 3340R.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 43A to 43D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the second angular position (FIG. 43A) to the first angular position (FIG. 43D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the downward slope side. From this state, the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclined direction (FIG. 43 (a) counterclockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center while the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically. The

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclination direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) about the rotation shaft 3320, and the upward inclination angle reaches an angle θ5. Then, the right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the upper protrusion 10141. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the upper protrusion 10141, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the upward tilt direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right engagement piece 10370R is pushed relatively downward (lower side in FIG. 43 (b)) by the upper protrusion 10141, so that the right weight member 10360R is moved to the right receiving plate as shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is rotated in the direction approaching 3340R (the upper side in FIG. 43 (c)) and is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  In the present embodiment, the right weight member 10360R can be brought close to the magnet 10380 by the right locking piece 10370R coming into contact with the upper protrusion 10141, so that the magnet 10380 can be securely attached to the magnet. Can be done. Therefore, since it is not necessary to increase the magnetic force of the magnet 10380 unnecessarily, the release of the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380 described above (see FIGS. 42B and 42C) can be ensured.

  In the right receiving plate 3340R, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is in close proximity to the right receiving plate 3340R with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center (FIG. 43 (c) counterclockwise). When the rising inclination angle reaches the angle θ1, it is arranged at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (d), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising slope side, the right weight member 10360R is maintained in the state of being close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380. . In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap with the upper protrusion 1141. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right locking piece 10370R from coming into contact with the upper protrusion 1141 due to the influence of disturbance or the like and inadvertently releasing the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R by the magnet 10380.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the support plate member 10300 includes the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 1036OR that are pivotably suspended by the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the left weight member 10360L. The left inclined piece 10370L and the right inclined piece 10370R connected to the right weight member 1036OR are provided, and when the support plate member 10300 is arranged up to the first angular position or the second angular position, it is arranged on the upward inclined side. The left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R, while the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR arranged on the descending slope side is a magnet. The magnetic attachment by 10380 is released, and the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3 It can be suspended vertically from the 40R. Thereby, the gravity center position of the support plate member 10300 can be moved, and the support plate member 10300 can be maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  For example, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380. At the same time, the left weight member 10360L located on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side) is suspended vertically, so that the position of the center of gravity as a whole is changed to the left receiving plate 3340L side (that is, located on the descending slope side). The left support plate 3340L side can be made heavier). As a result, it is possible to suppress the support plate member 10300 from rotating back in the reverse direction and back to the second angular position, and maintain the first angular position. The same applies to the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position.

  Next, the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the left weight member 10360L and the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the right weight member 10360R are individually provided. In the eleventh embodiment, 1 The magnet 10380 is configured to be used for both the magnetic attachment of the left weight member 10360L and the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  44 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 arranged at the first angular position, and FIG. c) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 disposed at the second angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with one magnet 10380 on the bottom surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310. Further, the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R are made larger in length than the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R in the tenth embodiment.

  That is, in the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R, the length dimension from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip (lower end in FIG. 44 (a)) is made larger than the linear distance from the rotation shaft 10351 to the magnet 10380. . Therefore, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the right weight member 11360R can be magnetized to the magnet 10380, while at the second angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The left weight member 11360L can be magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, one magnet 1038 is also used as a magnet for magnetizing the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R and maintaining them in a state in proximity to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R. To do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, by increasing the lengths of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R in this way, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position accompanying the displacement of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R can be further increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 11300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  A pachinko machine may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments. For example, it is exemplified that the pachinko machine is configured by combining the sorting apparatus 1000 in the first embodiment and the sorting apparatus 3000 in the third embodiment (that is, both are arranged on the game board 13). .

  In each said embodiment, the case where the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b are arrange | positioned in the distribution destination (1st position and 2nd position) of the game ball by each distribution apparatus 1000-10000 as an example. Although described, what is disposed at the first position and the second position is not limited to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, and may have any other configuration. That is, there is no limitation on the type of winning prize. Further, the components disposed at the first position and the second position do not need to have a structure in which a game ball such as a prize opening enters. For example, a nail or a windmill may be used. Also, nothing may be provided. In other words, the first position and the second position specify the position in the game area, and the configuration existing at the position is not limited.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the object on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 disposed on the facing wall member 1220 is applied is a game ball, but instead or in addition to this, Then, a magnet may be disposed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 may be applied to this magnet. The magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can be applied with higher accuracy according to the phase (rotation position) of the disk member.

  In the third to ninth embodiments, the case where the number of weight members 3400 to 8400 attached to the guide portions 3350 to 5350 or accommodated in the passages of the box bodies 8350 and 9350 is one has been described. The weight members 3400 to 8400 may be mounted or stored at the same time. By effectively using the space in the extending direction (sliding or rolling direction) of the guide portions 3350 to 5350 and the passage (that is, mounting or storing two or more in parallel along the extending direction) By doing so, it is possible to further secure the weight while reducing the size of the sorting apparatus.

  Although the case where the weight members 3400 to 7400 are configured as an open system has been described in the third to seventh embodiments, the weight members 3400 to 7400 may be configured as a closed system. In that case, the guide portions 3350 to 5350 may be separated from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the case has been described in which the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material). However, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L are made of a nonmagnetic material such as a resin material. Also good. In this case, magnets may be disposed on the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R in the direction of the magnetic poles that can be magnetically attached to the magnet 1380.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are shaped so that the center of gravity is located in the center in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. The case where the shape is a flat plate shape having a constant thickness dimension) has been described, but it is preferable that the center of gravity is decentered toward the tip side from the center in the length direction from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip. This is because the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the support plate members 10300 and 11300 accompanying the displacement of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R can be increased.

  As a method of decentering the center of gravity toward the distal end side, a method of increasing the thickness or / and width dimension of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R toward the distal end side, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L, and Examples thereof include a method of attaching an aluminum sheet or a lead sheet to the front end side of the right weight members 10360R and 11360R or fastening a metal screw.

<About the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 71. In the third embodiment described above, the first starting port 63a disposed at the left and right positions in the sorting device 3000 by the support plate member 3300 that can turn the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000 left and right. And the second start port 63b.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, a game ball that has entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 is moved back and forth in the sorting device 4000 by the support plate member 4300 that tilts back and forth (one is the base). The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged on the front surface of the plate 60 and the other is disposed on the back surface of the base plate 60). Further, an ordinary electric accessory 64 is provided in association with the first starting port 63a disposed on the surface of the base plate 60. When the ordinary electric accessory 64 moves, the base plate does not enter the entrance 63. The game balls flowing down the surface of 60 can easily enter the first starting port 63a. Furthermore, when the ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable and a game ball that has not entered the entrance 63 can easily enter the first start port 63a, the variation based on the entrance to the first start port 63a. The variation time of the production is shortened.

  Thereby, in 3rd Embodiment, the game ball which did not enter into the entrance of the distribution apparatus 3000 was not able to enter into each starting port, but in 12th Embodiment, it is normal electric A game ball that has not entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 can be entered into the first start port 63a by the accessory 64. As a result, a state in which the game ball can easily enter the first start port 63a, that is, a state advantageous to the player can be achieved, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable, and a gaming ball can easily enter the first starting port 63a. As a result, an overflow in which more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the starting port is likely to occur. In the twelfth embodiment, when the game ball can easily enter the first start port 63a, the variation time of the variation effect based on the ball entering the first start port 63a is shortened, so that an overflow occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the variation effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 63a and the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 63b can be executed simultaneously. In the twelfth embodiment, in order to obtain a more general configuration, the variation effect is configured such that one variation effect is executed in the order of entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Moreover, the jackpot type selected based on each start port is also partially changed.

  As described above, the structural difference between the twelfth embodiment and the third embodiment described above is that the sorting device 4000 is used instead of the sorting device 3000, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The structural difference between the distribution device 4000 in the twelfth embodiment and the distribution device 3000 in the third embodiment described above is that the positional relationship between the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b is from the left and right. That is, it is that the support plate member is distributed back and forth from the left and right, and that the ordinary electric accessory 64 is provided along with the first start port 63a. Details of these structures will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG.

  Further, the difference in electrical configuration is that the contents of the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the jackpot type table based on each start port, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. The various areas stored in the RAM 223 are different, and the difference in the control processing is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Is different. Details of the electrical configuration and control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 71. FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 45, the game board 13 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 45 is a diagram of the game board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, a sorting device 4000 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. The distribution device 4000 is attached to the opening provided in the game board 13 from the back side.

  The sorting apparatus 4000 has a back cover member disposed on the back side, and a front cover member 4100 is attached to the front side of the back cover member. When the distribution member 4000 can be attached to the game board 13, the front cover member 4100 is inserted into the opening of the game board 13 and is fixed to the back side of the game board 13 with screws or the like by the back cover member 4200. .

  In the state in which the sorting device 4000 is attached to the game board 13, the entrance 63 that allows a game ball formed on the upper part of the front cover member 4100 to enter is configured to protrude to the front side of the game board 13. ing. The front cover member 4100 is made of a resin (polycarbonate or the like) that is permeable to the inside, and has a box shape having a flow path through which a game ball can flow down. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that distributes the rolling direction of the game balls that have passed through the entrance 63 and flowed into the interior. A first start port 63a and a second start port 63b are disposed below the rotation distribution member 4300.

  As will be described in detail later, the game balls that have entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 are alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the rotary sorting member 4300. It is configured as follows. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 63a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is executed, and a game ball enters the second start port 63b. Thus, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is executed.

  With respect to the balls entering the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, each ball is stored as a holding ball with an upper limit of 4 balls. Therefore, since the game device is configured to alternately enter the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b by the distribution device 4000, the entering ball is biased to one of the starting ports, and the upper limit of the holding ball is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that exceeds.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is provided with a variable member 64 that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the first start port 63a. Although details of the variable member 64 will be described later, when the second pattern is hit, the movable portion 64 is moved for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the openings formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 are formed. By opening, it is configured such that a game ball enters the front cover member 4100 through the opening and easily enters the first start port 63a.

  Next, the details of the sorting apparatus 4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a case where a game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a by the rotary distribution member 4300 when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63 of the distribution device 4000.

  The sorting device 4000 has a U-shaped front cover member 4100 on which a game ball can flow down, and a back cover member 4200 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 4100 using screws or the like. It is fixed and configured. The front cover member 4100 is formed in a substantially vertically long box shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an open rear side. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that is rotatably fixed, a first start port 63a, a second start port 63b, and a variable member 64.

  A first start port 63 a is formed at the front lower portion of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100. The first starting port 63a is formed with an opening at the top where a game ball can enter, and a first flow path 4121a through which the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path 4121a is a flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the first start port 63a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and protrudes to the back side of the front cover member 4100 so as to be vertically downward. It is composed of a bowl shape that allows game balls to flow down. Note that the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 4121a is the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the game board 13 (island facilities, etc.) Then, it flows down to the collecting bowl, which is a flow path member for being discharged, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100a and a right opening 4100b through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the first starting port 63a.

  A variable member 64 configured to be rotatable by a solenoid (not shown) is attached to the front cover member 4100. The variable member 64 includes a left variable member 64a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100a can be closed, and a right variable member 64b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100b can be closed. . The left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are formed in a symmetrical shape, are configured in a blade shape, and are fixed to the front cover member 4100 so that the lower end portion can be rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are closed positions in which the variable member 64 is disposed vertically upright so as to close the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. In addition, the variable member 64 is variably controlled to an open position where the variable member 64 is disposed at the position of the inverted C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. The drive structure that can be changed between the closed position and the open position is already known. In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are excited by exciting the solenoid in the same manner as the known structure. Are configured to rotate in conjunction with each other, and in a non-excited state, the rotation is fixed at the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are configured to rotate in conjunction with one solenoid. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are connected to each other. Each solenoid may be connected, and each variable member 64 may be configured to be operable independently. Thereby, the variation of the operation | movement of the variable member 64 can be increased and the interest improvement of a player can be aimed at.

  The second start port 63b is formed to protrude from the front cover member 6100 at a position on the back side of the first start port 63a. Similar to the first start port 63a, the second start port 63b has a pocket structure having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a discharge port through which the game ball is discharged is formed on the back side. Has been. The outlet is configured to engage with an opening communicating with the second flow path 4122a formed in the back cover body 4200 fixed to the back side of the front cover member 4100. Like the first start port 63a, a detection switch (magnetic sensor) that can detect that a game ball has entered is disposed inside the second start port 63b. In addition, the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path 4122a from the discharge port flow down to the above-described collective cage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the upper surface of the front cover member 4100, there is formed a ball entrance 63 having an opening surface into which the above-described game ball can be inserted, and is configured in a vertically long bowl shape. Inside the entrance 63, a guide wall is formed by a protruding wall portion that gradually protrudes from the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10) to the back side to guide the game ball toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Yes.

  A rotation distribution member 4300 is fixed to the lower portion of the ball entrance 63 so as to be rotatable toward the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. The rotation distribution member 4300 has a shaft portion 4300z that is rotatably fixed to the front cover body 4100, and a vertical wall portion 4300s is formed vertically upward from the shaft portion. Further, a first wall portion 4300t and a second wall portion 4300u of about 90 degrees are formed from the shaft portion 4300z with respect to the vertical wall portion 4300s, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), a first accommodating portion 4300a capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the vertical wall portion 4300s and the first wall portion 4300u of the rotary sorting member 4300, and is vertical. A second housing 4300c capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the wall 4300s and the second wall 4300u. Note that the width of the shaft portion 4300z is slightly larger than that of one game ball, and the vertical wall portion 4300s, the first wall portion 4300t, and the second wall portion 4300u are also configured to have the same width as the shaft portion 4300z. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the state where the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction (the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the first position), the first housing The part 4300a is arranged at a position facing the entrance 63. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance 63 is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 4300a, and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates leftward (toward the pachinko machine 10) by its own weight. It is moved and flows down toward the opening of the first start port 64a. Thereafter, the rotation distribution member 4300 is held in a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the second position) (see FIG. 47B).

  A magnet 4300b is provided at the tip of the vertical wall portion 4300s of the rotational distribution member 4300. Base-side magnets 4301 are also disposed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4300. The base-side magnet 4301 is disposed at a position facing the position of the magnet 4300b when the vertical wall portion 4300b is positioned in the vertical direction. The magnet 4300b and the base-side magnet 4301 of the rotational distribution member 4300 are configured to have opposite polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 4301 is composed of a magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip.

  The magnet 4300b is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the vertical wall portion 4300s so that the tip portions thereof face the base-side magnet 4301 side. At the position where the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates and the vertical wall portion 4300s is vertical, the base side magnet 4301 and the magnet 4300b are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they are attached so as to repel each other.

  Accordingly, when the vertical wall portion 4300 s approaches the base-side magnet 4301, a magnetic force acts so as to prevent the approach, and a rotational force opposite to the direction in which the rotational distribution member 4300 rotates acts. Therefore, after a game ball enters the entrance 63 and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates in the direction of the first position or the second position by the game ball that has entered, the rotation distribution member 4300 reacts in a reaction. When returning to the original position again, when the base side magnet 4301 is approached, a force opposite to the rotational direction to be returned by the magnetic force is applied, and the problem of returning to the original position can be suppressed. Therefore, after the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated by the game ball, it can be stopped at the rotated position. As a result, when the game ball enters the entrance 63, the rotation distribution member 6300 can be alternately changed between the first position and the second position, and the first start port 63a and the second start port The game balls can be distributed alternately to 63b.

  In addition, it is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game resulting from winning at the first entrance 63a and a lottery game resulting from winning at the second entrance 63b. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by suppressing the occurrence of winning (so-called overflow) even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a case will be described in which the sorting rotation member 4300 guides (distributes) a game ball to the second start port 63b. As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when a game ball enters the entrance 63 with the rotation distribution member 4300 disposed at the first position, the game is rotated to the second position. When the sphere is guided to the first starting port 63a, the rotation distribution member 4300 is disposed at the second position as shown in FIG. 47 (b). In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63, the game ball flows down into the second housing portion 4300c, and the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the first position by the weight of the game ball, and the second A game ball is guided to the entrance 64b.

  As described above, the sorting device 4000 according to the present embodiment alternately guides the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b when the game balls enter the entrance port 63. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball is biased toward one start opening, and can suppress the problem that only the reserved ball for one start opening exceeds the upper limit.

  Furthermore, as will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently obtained without bias by configuring the average of the variation times selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be the same. It can be varied to further suppress overflow. Moreover, overflow can be suppressed more by setting the deviation variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be short (a value based on a design value that enters the entrance 63).

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable member 64 (electrical accessory) is attached to the first starting port 63a, the number of balls entering the first starting port 63a is reduced when a short-time game or a probable variable game state described later is entered. More than the second start port 63b. Although details will be described later, in this case, since the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol in this embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol overflows. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is formed with a spiral pattern on the front side so that the state of the rotation distribution member 4300 is difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the rotation distribution member 4300 is in the first position or the second position, and it is difficult to determine and divide the entrance for the player to enter. . Even if a spiral shape is formed, the front cover member is made of a resin that can penetrate the inside, so it can be determined whether or not a game ball is flowing down, and problems such as ball clogging can be determined early. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game board 13 is made of wood, but it may be made of acrylic resin or the like and a nail for changing the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged on the acrylic resin. Good. In this way, the flow path for discharging the game balls formed on the back side of the sorting device 4000 is made of a transparent resin or the like, so that the game balls enter the sorting device 4000 and are discharged. Until the player can visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the manner in which game balls flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the detection switches for detecting the game balls that have entered the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged inside the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, respectively. You may comprise so that it may each arrange | position in the 1st flow path 4121a and the 2nd flow path 4122a. By comprising in this way, the fraud that a detection switch is turned on by the piano wire etc. from the outside can be suppressed. In addition, a flow path that flows down to the detection switch and a flow path that is discharged to the outside are formed in front of the detection switch so that game balls can be randomly distributed. A game can be played in the hope that it will be detected by the switch, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As in the conventional configuration, when the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged on the left and right, and the rotational distribution member 4300 is arranged at the upper middle portion, the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. The blade member such as the electric accessory can be provided only on one side (specifically, on the opposite side of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b), but can be disposed on both sides of each start port. could not. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the electric member of the blade member can be provided on both sides of the first start port 63a, the winning rate to the first start port 63a can be greatly varied, and the interest of the game Can be improved. In the present embodiment, the first start port 63a is disposed on the front side of the second start port 63b. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second start port 63b may be disposed on the front side. In addition, for example, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b may be controlled to be switched by a change in the gaming state (time reduction, probability change game, etc.). In this case, it may be configured to controlly determine that a game ball won in the first start port 63a has won in the second start port 63b.

  In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b of the electric accessory 64 are configured to open and close in synchronization, but may be configured to open and close independently. In this case, the variable member to be opened / closed may be determined according to the hit type of the second symbol, or a lottery for determining opening / closing from only the left side, only the right side, and both types may be executed. .

<Electrical Configuration in 12th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 are different from those of the above embodiments, and the other parts are the same. Are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 49, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 66). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Is done. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 66).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 63a. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 63b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a includes a special symbol for a low probability (a period during which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that the special symbol is a big hit from the low probability ( Two types of determination values are included for the period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in the table in each state is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 63a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 63b.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 51B). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 51 (b) ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 52A to 52B). As shown in FIG. 52A, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the case of a big hit of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 63a. It is stored in the area 203a and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 63b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79, which is a narrow probability range, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first start port 63a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, a lot of reach display with a long production time can be performed, so that it is possible to secure a time for entering the ball into the first start port 63a, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously performed. It becomes easy to break. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 66) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. It should be noted that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value), or time variation The pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51A). In the present embodiment, this variation pattern selection table is selectively used depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time. In the short time variation pattern selection table 202e used in the short time, the variation pattern selection table 202d used in a normal time is used. Compared to the above, a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected. This is to change the variation time depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is running short. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is running short of time, it becomes easier to win a prize at the starting hole, and the winning ball becomes invalid because the number of held balls is the upper limit despite the winning at the starting hole. It is conceivable that the number of times (so-called overflow) increases. However, by shortening the fluctuation time in the short time, digestion of the number of reserved balls can be accelerated and the frequency at which the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit can be reduced. The number of overflows can be reduced.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D), for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “disconnect (for a long time)”, “disconnect (for a short time)”, “disconnect normal reach”. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the lottery result and the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The short time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C) includes a special diagram 1 short time variation pattern table 202e1 used based on the ball entering the first start port and the second start port. A special figure 2 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used based on a sphere is provided, and the special figure 1 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e1 has a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (out of the short time A or A per short time). In the special figure 2 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e2, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 2.0 seconds (out of the short time B or B per short time) is specified. Then, when the game state is short, the variation pattern is selected using the short-time variation pattern selection table 202e, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, even when the gaming state becomes shorter and easier to enter the first starting port 63a (that is, a state in which the number of changes in the first special symbol increases), the variation time of the first special symbol becomes the first. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the fluctuation time that is longer than the fluctuation time of the two special symbols. Therefore, the ball entering the first start port 63a without impairing the above-described effect of reducing the deviation of the variation time by causing the distribution device 4000 to enter the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b alternately. It is possible to provide a player with a short game that makes it easier to play.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (FIG. 51 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value matches the random number value set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first start port 63a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first start port 63a is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first start port 63a is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the first start port 63a is further reduced. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the first start port 63a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first start port 63a is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 66).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. 49, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 49, the stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 66), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 65) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 64) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability changing counter 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, fluctuation execution flag 203j, and fluctuation order storage area 203k Other memory areas 203z are also provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first start port 63a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first starting opening 63a (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, a winning information command including those values is received. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), and the first starting port 63a (first The only difference is that the special symbol) is changed to the second start port 63b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the order of winning. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first starting port 63a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first start port 63a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S604 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the first special symbol is executed (see S206 in FIG. 57).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the second special symbol) is Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command (see S209 and S214 in FIG. 57 and S605 and S612 in FIG. 61). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 62).

  When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 63). S803: No).

  The probability changing counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and if the value of the counter 203g during probability change is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability changing counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S221 in FIG. 57).

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, it is based on the determination value for the high probability in the first random number table 202a. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability determination value in the first random number table 202a.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type at the timing of closing the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot Is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is ended until the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 57).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 62).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of held data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this variation order storage area 203k, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data described above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 51A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the ROM 202 has a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a short-time variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent a small hit that is not advantageous to the player from being realized at a low probability that is not advantageous to the player as compared to a high probability that is advantageous to the player. Dissatisfaction can be reduced, and at the time of a high probability that is advantageous to the player, a small hit that is not advantageous to the player is established, thereby preventing an excessively advantageous state for the player.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 51C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. . As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 52 (a)) dedicated to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 52B).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, respectively, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the big hit A determination value. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 51 (d)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 51D, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 53A) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 53 (b)) in the case where the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. When the result is out of play and in the normal gaming state, the dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53 (c)), and when the result of the determination is out of place and in the probable gaming state, the dedicated out Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 53 (d)).

  The short time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 54A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern in the short time gaming state, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. At this time, the short variation pattern selection table 202e defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d described above. Specifically, a pattern selection table similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d is defined, and the contents of each selection table are defined to have a variation time shorter than that of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is running short of time, it becomes easier to win a prize at the starting hole, and the winning ball becomes invalid because the number of held balls is the upper limit despite the winning at the starting hole. It is conceivable that the number of times (so-called overflow) increases. However, by shortening the fluctuation time in the short time, digestion of the number of reserved balls can be accelerated and the frequency at which the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit can be reduced. The number of overflows can be reduced.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 55, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d. And a stop type selection flag 223e and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, each of the counters C1 to C3 which are winning information is provided. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variable display is added by entering the first start port 63a, or in main controller 110, variable display in the first special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 70). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), and is different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since only 63a (first special symbol) is changed to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 70), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 71). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 70), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 71). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 70) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in 12th Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56 to 71. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 63a (start winning) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passage of a ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is executed in which it is determined which of the reserved balls of the first special symbol or the reserved balls of the second special symbol is to be executed, and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205: No), the variable execution flag 203j. Is determined to be variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210), and if it is not variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is obtained. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the one held ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 66) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210), and the variable execution flag If 203j is variation execution in special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the first special symbol described above is performed for the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 59 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the big hit of the second special symbol If it is, it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C will be set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203h is determined. 1 is subtracted (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S224).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S304).

  If it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S305), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (S304: No), it is determined whether the execution area data is the special figure 2 (S306). If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S307), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is not special figure 2 (S306: No), there is no suspended ball to be executed in a variable manner, and thus this process is terminated with the variable execution flag 203j remaining in the initial state. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the first special random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the stop type selection of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in S402 that the probability change is in progress (S402: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S403). ), The process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 51B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined that it is a small hit, and “40 to 399” If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 51B).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a. (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 51B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S404). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 51B). ).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 A display mode is set more (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 Of the special jackpots of special symbols (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 99”, the jackpot B (15R probability variation big hit) is determined (see FIG. 52A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S408). Specifically, when the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is in the middle of time. If it is determined that the hour / counter counter is 0 and the hour / short counter is not shorter (S408: No), the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S409). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S409, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S408, if the hour / minute counter is greater than 0 and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is running (S408: Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 hour / short fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (S410). ). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S410, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 as in the process of S409. The variation time of the third symbol until it stops at is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern is A (0.5 seconds) per hour (see FIG. 54B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of out is set (S411). In the process of S411, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S412). Specifically, when the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is in the middle of time. When it is determined that the time / counter counter is 0 and it is not time / short (S412: No), the deviation pattern is used as the deviation (normal) selection table 202d2 or the deviation (probability) selection table of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. It is determined based on 202d3 (S413). It is determined based on the out (normal) selection table 202d2 at the normal time (when the probability changing counter 203g is 0) and based on the out (probability) selection table 202d3 at the probability change (when the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0). It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S409 and S410, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of “150 to 197”, it is super reach (60). If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  On the other hand, in the process of S412, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter is greater than 0 and the hour / hour counter is shorter (S412: Yes), a deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 hour / short fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (S414). ). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S414, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the out symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set as in the processing of S410. The variation time of the third symbol until it stops at is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the values of the entire range), the fluctuation pattern of the time deviation A (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54B).

  When the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is set (S415). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is set (S416). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 66). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S416 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the first per-random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the first per-random number table 202a per the first per-random number table 202a are obtained by the process of S501. The lottery result based on the determination value of the random number table 202a is acquired. Except for the processing of S510 and S514, the same processing as the processing of S209 is performed on the data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the second special symbol, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S510 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S506: Yes), and the game state is short (S508: Yes). In the processing of S510, the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S510). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S510, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the range of values), the fluctuation pattern is B (0.5 seconds) per short time (see FIG. 54C).

  In addition, the process of S514 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is out (S506: No), and the game state is short (S512: Yes). In the processing of S514, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S514). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S514, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern of the time deviation B (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54C).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 56), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first start port 63a. This is a process for holding the value indicated by the random number counter.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start port 63a (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first start port 63a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 63a (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning at the first starting port 63a (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 retained ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 66) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols. 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a (S606), the special figure 1 is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203k in the fluctuation execution determination process (S204) described above, the start opening fluctuates the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even when there are two types of fluctuations that change the symbol, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the starting slot.

  In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second starting port 63b (S608). If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 63b (S608: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when the first starting port 63a was won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S613), and to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. Special figure 2 is set (S614), and this process ends. Note that the determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S607.

  If there is no winning at the second starting port 63b (S608: No), or even if there is a winning at the second starting port 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4. (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the first start port 63a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first starting port 63a is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits a ball to win the special prize opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first start opening 63a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first start opening 63a as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first starting opening 63a, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first starting opening 63a during the special symbol jackpot, A lot of balls enter 63a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 63a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 51 (d)).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 51 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes) It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first starting port 63a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so the first start port 63a. Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first start port 63a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first start port 63a.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 66) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 66) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S801: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 even though the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 66, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 56) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the number-of-holding balls command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) and the start winning process (see FIG. 61), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 59), and the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 60). ) Is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 67) and the sound lamp control device 113 are transmitted. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the first start port 63a is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 62), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60) is ended, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 62) or the process of S721, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 62), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 62). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 64 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 66). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1201). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a of this time is the last round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1207).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1416 (see FIG. 69) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 69, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1413 in FIG. 69), it executes a power-off process in S1416. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1416 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process in S1416 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1416, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1416, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1416 is executed (see S1415 in FIG. 69). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1416 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes in S1402 to S1410. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed. S1402 to S1410 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1411 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1411 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1412 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later are set (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1411). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1412). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1415), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1416). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1417), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1414: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). This command determination processing (S1411) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1411), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1502), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1503), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the number of held balls is extracted from the received command. If the received command is of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. If the received command is of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls extracted is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1508). Next, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set (S1509).

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol reservation ball counter (223b, 223c) of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special symbol reservation of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1508. It can be adjusted to the value of the ball counter (203d, 203e). Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter (223b, 223c) of the sound lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter (203d, 203e) of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. When the start winning is detected or the special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter (223b, 223c) of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the special symbol holding ball counter (203d, 203) of the main controller 110 is corrected. 203e). When the processing of S1509 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter (223b, 223c) is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1507, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1507: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1510). When the winning information command is received (S1510: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1511). Return to processing. In the processing of S1511, if the winning information command is for the first special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding information for the first special symbol is stored. One area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. If the winning information command is for the second special symbol, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area for the second special symbol is set to the first special symbol. Let it be an area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1512). When the round number command is received (S1512: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1513), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1514), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1512 (S1512: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( In step S1515, the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include, for example, an opening start command for starting an opening effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1602), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, when the change of the first special symbol is started, the data stored in the first special symbol first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is changed to the second special symbol. When the change is started, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first special area to the fourth area for the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1606). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1607: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1607), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610.

  In the processing of S1610, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1610). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, since the electric accessory is opened and closed during the time reduction, it becomes easier to win the first starting port 63a than the second starting port 63b. The variation effect based on the first start port 63a is large (that is, the variation effect time is long), and the distribution device 4000 has a large variation effect of either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b (variation). It is possible to solve the problem that the effect of preventing the presentation time from becoming long is lost. Specifically, in the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, during a short time, the variation time of the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is shorter than the second start port 63b. As a result, even if the variation effect based on the first start port 63a increases in the short time, the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is short because the variation time of the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is short. It is possible to prevent the long-running effect from being performed for a long time as compared with the variation effect based on the 2 start port 63b.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time is shortened during the time shortening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first starting port 63a is won more than the second starting port 63b (the electric motor is driven by a normal symbol hit). For example, when the accessory is opened and closed), the variation time of the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 63a may be shortened. As a result, even if it is easy to win the first starting port 63a although it is not in a short time, the variation time of the fluctuating effect based on the first starting port 63a can be shortened, and it is suspended despite winning the first starting port 63a. When the number of balls is the upper limit value, the number of times that the winning is invalid (so-called overflow number) can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation based on winning in the first starting port 63a and the variation based on winning in the second starting port 63b are configured to vary in the order of winning. You may comprise. Thereby, even when the production time of the variation effect based on the winning at the second starting port 63b is long, the variation effect based on the winning at the first starting port 63a can be executed at the same time, and therefore, to the first starting port 63a. In a state where it is easy to win a prize (for example, in a short time state), the number of times that the prize is invalidated (so-called overflow number) when the number of held balls is the upper limit despite winning the first start port 63a. Can be reduced.

<Modification of the 12th Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the game balls that have entered the entrance slot 63 of the sorting device 4000 are arranged at the front and rear positions in the sorting device 4000 by the rotating sorting member 4300 that rotates back and forth. The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are distributed.

  On the other hand, in the sorting apparatus 5000 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the rotating sorting member 4300 that rotates back and forth is vertically aligned in the sorting apparatus 4000. The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b arranged at the positions are distributed. In addition, a variable member 642 and openings 4100c and 4100d are provided on both sides of the second start port 63b.

  As a result, in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, a game ball can easily enter the second start port 63b as well as the first start port 63a with respect to the second start port 63b. It can improve the interest of the player.

  As described above, the structural difference between the modified example of the twelfth embodiment and the twelfth embodiment described above is that the sorting device 5000 is used in place of the sorting device 4000, and the other configuration. Are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The structural difference between the sorting device 5000 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment and the sorting device 4000 in the twelfth embodiment described above is the positional relationship between the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Are vertically arranged from the front and back, a flow path 5110a is provided for guiding the game balls distributed by the rotary sorting device 4300 to the second start port 63b, and variable on both sides of the second start port 63b. The member 642 and the openings 4100c and 4100d are provided. Details of these structures will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 in the modification of 12th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 72 is a diagram of the game board 13 in a modification of the twelfth embodiment. In the sorting device 5000, a front cover member 4100 having the same outer shape as the sorting device 4000 is attached to the game board 13 in the same manner as the sorting device 4000. A rotation distribution member 4300 is arranged inside the front cover member 4100, and a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b are arranged vertically below the front cover member 4100, and are distributed to the rotation distribution member 4300. Game balls can be entered.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is provided with a variable member 641 that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the first start port 63a and a variable member 642 that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the second start port 63b. ing.

  Although details of the variable members 641 and 642 will be described later, when the second symbol is hit, the front cover member 4100 is formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 by moving for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is configured such that a game ball enters the front cover member 4100 through the opening and easily enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b.

  Next, the details of the sorting apparatus 5000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a case where a game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a by the rotary distribution member 4300 when a game ball enters the entrance port 63 of the distribution device 5000.

  The sorting device 5000 has a U-shaped front cover member 4100 that allows a game ball to flow down, and a back cover member 4200 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 4100 using screws or the like. It is fixed and configured. The front cover member 4100 is formed in a substantially vertically long box shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an open rear side. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that is rotatably fixed, a first start port 63a, a second start port 63b, and variable members 641 and 642, respectively.

  A first start port 63 a is formed at the front lower portion of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100. The first starting port 63a is formed with an opening at the top where a game ball can enter, and a first flow path 4121a through which the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path 4121a is a flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the first start port 63a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and protrudes downward from the front cover member 4100 so that the game ball is downward. It is configured in a bowl shape that can flow down. Note that the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 4121a is the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the game board 13 (island facilities, etc.) Then, it flows down to the collecting bowl, which is a flow path member for being discharged, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100a and a right opening 4100b through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the first starting port 63a.

  On the rear side of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100, there is provided a passage port 5110a through which game balls distributed in the back can pass. A rear channel 5110a is formed by a rear channel member 5110 at the tip of the passage port 5110a. The rear flow path member 5100 is a flow path that connects the passage opening 5110a and the passage opening 5110b below the passage opening 5110a with the rear face of the front cover member 4100, and is integrally formed with the front cover member 4100 with a resin material.

  More specifically, the back channel 5110a starts from the passage port 5110a and descends while bypassing the back side of the front cover member 4100 to the right so as to avoid the first channel 4121a of the first start port 63a. . After that, it is formed so as to be connected to a passage port 5110b provided below the rotation distribution member 4300 and the first start port 63a and above the second start port 63b. Thereby, the game balls distributed to the back by the rotation distribution member 4300 are guided to the inside of the front cover member 4100 from the passage port 5110b via the back surface flow path 5110a. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the back by the rotation distribution member 4300 are guided to the second starting port 63b provided vertically below the passage port 5110b.

  A second start port 63b is disposed below the passage port 5110b of the front cover member 4100. Similar to the first starter port 63a, the second starter port 63b has a pocket structure having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a second flow path through which the game ball is discharged on the back side. 4122a is formed. Like the first start port 63a, a detection switch (magnetic sensor) that can detect that a game ball has entered is disposed inside the second start port 63b. Further, the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path 4122a flow down to the above-mentioned collective cage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100c and a right opening 4100d through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the second starting port 63b.

  Further, variable members 641 and 642 configured to be rotatable by a solenoid (not shown) are attached to the front cover member 4100. The variable member 641 includes a left variable member 641a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100a can be closed, and a right variable member 641b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100b can be closed. . The variable member 642 includes a left variable member 642a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100c can be closed, and a second right variable member 641b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100d can be closed. ing. The left side variable members 641a and 642a and the right side variable members 641b and 642b are formed in a bilaterally symmetric shape, are configured in a blade shape, and are fixed to the front cover member 4100 so that a lower end portion thereof is rotatable.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, the left side variable member 641a and the right side variable member 641b are closed positions where the variable member 641 is arranged in a vertically upright position so as to close the left side opening 4100a and the right side opening 4100b. In addition, the variable member 641 is variably controlled to the open position where the variable member 641 is disposed at the position of the reverse letter C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b (see FIG. 74A). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the left variable member 642a and the right variable member 642b are arranged at positions where the variable member 642 is vertically upright so as to close the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. The variable member 642 is variably controlled to the closed position and the open position where the variable member 642 is disposed at the position of the inverted C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b (see FIG. 74A). Is done.

  The drive structure that can be changed between the closed position and the open position is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the left side variable members 641a and 642a and the left side variable member solenoid (not shown). ) Are connected by a connecting member (not shown), and the right variable members 641b and 642b and the right variable member solenoid (not shown) are connected by a connecting member (not shown). Thus, the variable members 641a and 642a can be operated simultaneously by a variable member solenoid (not shown), and the variable members 641b and 642b can be operated simultaneously by a right variable member solenoid (not shown). Therefore, the number of solenoids can be reduced as compared with the case where the solenoids are connected to the variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, and 642b, respectively. Reduction can be achieved.

  The variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, and 642b can be operated by connecting one solenoid so that the product cost can be further reduced. Alternatively, the variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, By making 642b operable by different solenoids, the variation of the operation of the variable member may be increased to improve the interest of the player.

  On the upper surface of the front cover member 4100, there is formed a ball entrance 63 having an opening surface into which the above-described game ball can be inserted, and is configured in a vertically long bowl shape. Inside the entrance 63, a guide wall is formed by a protruding wall portion that gradually protrudes from the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10) to the back side to guide the game ball toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Yes.

  A rotation distribution member 4300 is fixed to the lower portion of the ball entrance 63 so as to be rotatable toward the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Since the structure of this rotational distribution member 4300 is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the state in which the rotary sorting member 4300 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction (the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the first position), the first housing The portion 4300a is disposed at a position facing the entrance 63. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance 63 is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 4300a, and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates leftward (toward the pachinko machine 10) by its own weight. It is moved and flows down toward the opening of the first start port 64a. Thereafter, the rotation distribution member 4300 is held in a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction (the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the second position)) (see FIG. 74B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a case will be described in which the sorting rotating member 4300 guides (distributes) the game balls to the second start port 63b. As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 73, when a game ball enters the entrance 63 with the rotation distribution member 4300 disposed at the first position, the game is rotated to the second position. When the sphere is guided to the first start port 63a, the rotational distribution member 4300 is disposed at the second position as shown in FIG. 74 (b). In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63, the game ball flows down to the second housing portion 4300c, and the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the first position by the weight of the game ball, so that the back flow A game ball is guided to the second entrance 64b via the path 5110a.

  As described above, the sorting device 4000 according to the present embodiment alternately guides the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b when the game balls enter the entrance port 63. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball is biased toward one start opening, and can suppress the problem that only the reserved ball for one start opening exceeds the upper limit.

  Furthermore, as will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently obtained without bias by configuring the average of the variation times selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be the same. It can be varied to further suppress overflow. Moreover, overflow can be suppressed more by setting the deviation variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be short (a value based on a design value that enters the entrance 63).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable member 641 (electrical accessory) is attached to the first starting port 63a, and the variable member 642 (electrical accessory) is attached to the second starting port 63b. If the game state is changed to a probability change game state, a so-called overflow is likely to occur where a winning is generated even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Although details will be described later, in this case, in this embodiment, since the variation time of each special symbol is set to be short, it is possible to suppress the holding ball of each special symbol from overflowing, and the player's It can avoid becoming disadvantageous.

  In the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the variable members 641 and 642 are configured to be opened and closed when the time is short. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and which variable member is opened or closed according to the jackpot type. You may specify whether to do it. For example, in the big hit type A, both the variable member 641 and the variable member 642 are opened and closed, but in the big hit type B, only the variable member 641 is opened and closed. As a result, the variable member that can be opened and closed changes depending on the jackpot type (that is, the game value that the player can acquire changes), so the player pays more attention to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  Further, when the variable members 641 and 642 are opened and closed, a time difference may be provided in the opening and closing timing so that the time during which both the variable members 641 and 642 are closed is shortened. Thereby, compared with the case where the variable members 641 and 642 open and close at the same timing, the time which does not enter into the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b becomes short. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time during which the player is in an advantageous state is long.

<About the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the distribution device 4000 that distributes the game balls by alternately rotating the support plate member 4300 in one direction and the other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the game board has been described. The sorting apparatus 6000 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes a pitch sensor 6000a at the entrance to the sorter 6000, and receives a game ball when the game ball enters the entrance of the sorter 6000. Can be notified. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a first start port 63a, a swinging board, and the like. The minute device 6000, the right second starting port 63b2, the variable winning device 65, the general winning port 79, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start ports 63b and 63b2 inside the distribution device 6000, the variable winning device 65, the general winning port 79, and the variable display unit 80 are formed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, a portion different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is provided with a sorting device 6000 instead of the sorting device 4000, and a right-side second starting port 63b2 is additionally provided. It is a part that has been.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first starting port 63a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball enters the second starting port 63b, 63b2. In such a case, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. In the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the right second start port 63b2 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the right second start port 63b2. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right second start opening 63b2, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol. In addition, since the lottery method and the like are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the sorting apparatus 6000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 76A and 76B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting apparatus 6000. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is made of a member that can see through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting device 6000, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 6000a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. Yes. The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 6300 to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b that are arranged below.

  The sorting member 6300 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 6300a or 6300c of the sorting member 6300. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 6300a, the sorting member 6300 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 76A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a. Guide to. Here, each of the sorting members 6300 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 6300b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 6300a and the housing portion 6300c.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 6000, the magnet 6301b of the sorting member 6300 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301 of the sorting member 6300 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 6301 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 6301 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 6300 side.

  The magnet 6300b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 6301, and is fixed to the sorting member 6300 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 6301 side. At the position where the sorting member 6300 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 6300a and the accommodating portion 6300c is located directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter approximately one ball), the base-side magnet 6301 is placed. And the magnet 6300b of the sorting member 6300 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, the N pole and the N pole), there is no rebound, and there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 6300 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 6300b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the sorting member 6300 is repelled by the magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301, so that the sorting member 6300 is either left or right. The container 6300a and the container 6300c are rotated so that one of the container 6300a and the container 6300c faces the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the sorting device 6000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 6300a and the housing portion 6300c and causing a clogged ball.

  In addition, the magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301 are repelled, and for example, the accommodation unit 6300a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first start port 63a, and then distribute the game ball. It is possible to prevent the member 6300 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 6300a faces upward). Thus, after guiding the game ball to the first starting port 63a, the storage unit 6300c is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting device 6000 is received by the storage unit 6300c and played. The sorting member 6300 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second start port 63b. As described above, the sorting member 6300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 6000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b for winning, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery) caused by winning the first start port 63a, which will be described later. Game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second start port 63b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second starting port 63b2 is a starting port where the lottery of the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters as in the second starting port 63b. In the second special symbol, there are four holding balls including the second start port 63b and the right second start port 63b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting device 6000 (size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second start opening 63b2 is configured such that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 6300 is stopped in a state where the sorting member 6300 is rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 6300a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage port, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 6300a, and the first start port 63a is guided to the guide unit z1 by rotating the sorting member 6300 counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball. A game ball is guided to.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 6300, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the distribution member 6300 is stopped at a position where the housing portion 6300c faces upward. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage port, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 6300c, and the game ball is distributed to the second start port 63b. Therefore, it can distribute alternately to the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”, the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means are provided in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 75). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are lit to indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b or 63b2 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to a lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the first start port 63 or the second start ports 63b and 63b2 are displayed. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first start port 63a while the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times, The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when entering the second start ports 63b and 63b2, the number of times of entering the ball is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first starting port 63a and the second starting ports 63b, 63b2 are configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 63a (start winning prize), the first symbol display device 37 performs a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) using that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 77 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 77B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 78) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set in the gaming state. The

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of jackpot are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Here, since the distribution device 6000 wins alternately the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a bias from being biased to one prize opening, and to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress the problem that the performance becomes extremely high. In addition, by making a winning bias toward one winning opening, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of so-called overflow, in which winning is awarded beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the fact that the ball enters the entrance, but the player does not win, and stops the injection of the ball every time the player reaches the upper limit of the number of held balls. It is possible to prevent the sales at the amusement store side from increasing due to the poor turnover rate.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, the lower side is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the 3rd symbol, and the other upper side is the holding ball. This is a sub display area Ds for displaying numbers and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. This is the area to be displayed. Specifically, in the small region Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000 are displayed, and in the small region Ds2, the special symbol 2 is reserved. A reserved symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000 are displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, when a ball enters the sorting device 6000, the entering sensor is detected by the incoming sensor 6000a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 6300 in the sorting device 6000. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a winning is made at the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is “white circle symbol (see FIG. 78 (a))” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 78 (a))”, and the effect symbol is displayed as “white square symbol (see FIG. 77 (a))”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol in the display area of the number of reserved balls, and the integrated symbol of the integrated symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000. Since the effect design which is a part is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved design is being displayed based on having entered the sorting device 6000.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and sometimes a notice effect is performed, for example, when a character appears. . In addition, it may be suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first start port 63a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the holding ball of the second starting port 63b is set in the same manner as the first starting port 63a.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, 63b2 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in the 13th Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment, a part different from the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is an audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, only a different part from the pachinko machine 10 in 12th Embodiment is demonstrated here, and the description is abbreviate | omitted about the other same part.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, in addition to the area of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment, the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f and the leading special figure 2 At least a reserved ball number counter 223g, a special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h, and a special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i are provided.

  The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the passage port when the distribution member 6300 is directed in the direction of distributing the game ball to the first start port 63a.

  The preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 6300 is directed to distribute the game balls to the second entrance with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, it is different in that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 6300 faces in the direction to be sorted to the first starting port 63a. This flag makes it possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 63a after the game ball has passed through the passage port. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the first starting port 63a even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on, the distribution is not performed without entering the first starting port 63a. It can be determined that the device 6000 has been discharged to the outside.

  The special figure 2 pre-winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage port when the sorting member 6300 faces in the direction to be sorted to the second start port 63b. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the second start port 63b after the game ball has passed through the passage port. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second starting port 63b even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on, the player does not enter the second starting port 63b and distributes. It can be determined that the device 6000 has been discharged to the outside.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, the display mode of the reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before passing through the passage port (entrance sensor 6000a) of the sorting device 6000 and entering the first start port 63a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 79 (a) is a timing chart when the game ball has passed through the passage opening and then enters the first start opening 63a before the entrance determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols “white square symbols” indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage are displayed, and two “white circle symbols” that are reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 80 (a)). Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the sorting member 6300 is in a state where it can be distributed to the first start opening 63a in a state where the housing portion 6300a faces upward. In the empty area of the small area Ds1, the “white square symbol” is displayed at the position with the youngest winning order (see FIG. 80B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a within 3 seconds, a “white circle symbol” which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the “white square symbol” (FIG. 81 (a)). reference). When the white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is not displayed.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol with the white circle symbol displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it can be recognized as the effect that the reserved symbol is displayed until the white circle symbol is displayed after the effect symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the hold of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce a sense of incongruity due to a time difference until the ball actually enters the first starting port 63a.

  FIG. 79 (b) is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode when a ball enters the passage opening and does not enter the first start opening 63a even after the ball entry determination period has elapsed. When the sorting member 6300 is directed to the first entrance at the timing when it enters the passage, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), an effect design is added to the small area Ds1 and displayed. To do. Thereafter, if the ball does not enter the first starting port 63a even after the ball entering determination period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the effect symbol is set to non-display as shown in FIG. 81 (b). To do.

  Thus, by making the effect symbol non-displayed at the timing when the ball entry determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the ball has not entered the first start port 63a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the exact number of the reserved balls.

  When the game ball passes through the passing port with the sorting member 6300 facing the position for distributing the game ball to the second starting port 63b, the effect symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. . In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  Note that the position of the sorting member 6300 can be identified by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 6300 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 6300 may be determined each time by the entered entrance. . Specifically, the sorting member 6300 is configured to determine that the storage portion 6300c is facing upward based on the ball entering the first starting port 63a. With this configuration, the position of the sorting member 6300 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 6300 rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 6300 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position every time the ball enters the entrance.

  The above-described entrance sensor 6000a and rotation sensor 990 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113.

<Regarding Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device in 13th Embodiment>
Next, a control process of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, a part different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is a control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, only a different part from the pachinko machine 10 in 12th Embodiment is demonstrated here, and the description is abbreviate | omitted about the other same part.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, in addition to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, a pre-winning detection process (S1451) and a pre-winning effect effect process (S1452) are executed. Some processes in the command determination process (S1411) are changed. The pre-winning effect process (S1452) is configured to be executed in a short cycle similarly to the command determination process (S1411) and the like, and the setting related to the variable effect is performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. It is configured to be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the advance winning detection process (S1451) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning detection process (S1451). This advance winning detection process (S1451) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 82) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, there is a detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 6000a. Is detected.

  In the advance winning detection process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the entrance by the entrance sensor 6000a (S2001). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S2002), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted whether the game ball will enter the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. As a method of predicting the winning prize, the direction of the distribution member 6300 is calculated from the inclination by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown) that detects the inclination mounted on the shaft of the distribution member 6300. Note that the detection of the orientation of the sorting member 6300 for predicting the winning prize may not be performed by the rotation sensor 990 that detects the inclination. For example, it may be realized by using a magnet and a hall sensor so that the magnet and the hall sensor are close to each other when they are tilted to be detected. In addition, as described above, since the direction of the sorting member 6300 is alternated between the left and right in the prediction of the winning prize destination, the winning prize may be predicted based on the number of winning prizes. Product cost can be reduced.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance by the process of S2002 (S2003), and when it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S2003: No). , The process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the first entrance (S2003: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is acquired (S2004). It is determined whether the value (SN1) of the acquired advance special figure 1 hold number counter is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in the present embodiment) (S2005). If it is not less than the predetermined number (S2005: No), S2006 The process of S2008 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S2005: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S2006). Thereafter, the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2007), a display special figure 1 advance prize effect command is set (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009.

  A winning sound is output in the sound editing / output process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 82) in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S2007. As a result, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the sorting device 6000 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that the player cannot visually recognize the winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling compared to the conventional case where a winning sound is output at the timing of winning a prize. In addition, the distribution device 6000 that allows the player to visually recognize the effect (see FIG. 80 (b)) as if the on-hold symbol is turned on by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command set by the processing of S2008. Since the game can be executed at the timing when the ball is entered, the holding symbol is lit at the timing when the player wins at either the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b where the winning is not visible. In comparison, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound output here is continuously output until it enters the first start port 63a. If the ball has not entered the first start port 63a, the ball is stopped based on the flag being turned off after 3 seconds of the ball entry determination period.

  When the process of S2003, S2005 or S2008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the second entrance by the process of S2002 (S2009), and it is predicted that the ball will not win the second entrance. If (S2009: No), the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the second entrance (S2009: Yes), the same processing as in the case where it is predicted to win the first entrance (S2003 to S2008) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is acquired (S2010), and the acquired value of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter (SN2) is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) (S2011), and if it is not less than the predetermined number of times (S2011: No), the processing of S2012 to S2014 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S2011: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S2012). The advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2013), a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S2014), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). In the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, a reserved ball number command reception process (S1551) is performed instead of the processes of S1508 and S1509 in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment. Executed. Since other processes are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 85, the retained ball number command receiving process (S1551) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1551). In the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1551), first, it is determined whether or not the received held ball number command is a reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 (S2101). When it is determined that the received held ball number command is the special symbol 1 (S2101: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 held ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2102). Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set (S2103).

  This display-holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn, so that the start winning is Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls of the main controller 110 by the processing of S2102. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, Or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the process of S2103 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S2104), and the variable display holding number N1 in the special symbol 1 is obtained as the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter. It is determined whether or not there are more (S2105). When it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball counter (S2105: Yes), The value (SN1) is changed to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is not larger than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold ball number counter (SN1), the process of S2106 is skipped and the process of S2107 Migrate to

  In the processing of S2107, within the predetermined period (within 3 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on, the number of variable display hold times N1 in the special symbol 1 and the obtained prior special characteristic are obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the retained ball number counter in FIG. 1 is the same value (S2107). If the determination in S2107 is true, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to OFF (S2108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in S2107 is false, the process of S2108 is skipped and the process ends. Here, based on the detection of the winning by the winning sensor 6000a in the preceding winning detection process (S1451) of the main process (FIG. 83) of the sound lamp control device 113, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to ON, The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. Since the main control device adds 1 to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and transmits it as a hold ball number command, the change in the special symbol 1 The number N1 of the display suspension is equal to the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 retention ball number counter. Therefore, by receiving the reserved ball number command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 pre-winning flag is turned on, the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 and the acquired number of the reserved special figure 1 held balls are obtained. When the counter values (SN1) match, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to OFF because there is a winning at the first starting port 63a after the winning detection by the pitching sensor 6000a. If the special figure 1 advance winning flag is not set to OFF within a predetermined period after the detection of the entering, it can be determined that the first starting port 63a has not been won after the entering detection by the entering sensor 6000a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received reserved ball number command is not the special symbol 1 (S2101: No), the same processing as the processing of S2102 to S2108 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S2109 to S2115). The details of the process are the same as those described in S2102 to S2108 described above, and are therefore omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the advance winning effect process (S1452) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the preceding prize effect processing (S1452). This variation display setting process (S1452) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 82) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the first entry is detected by the entrance sensor 6000a. If no winning is made at the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance, the display special figure 1 advance prize production command or the display special figure 2 advance prize production command is generated in order to change the display of the pseudo hold symbol. And set.

  In the advance prize production process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2201). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (S2201: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S2202). 1 Pre-winning flag 223h is turned off. Thereafter, the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command is set (S2204), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2201: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2205). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2205: Yes), the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S2206). 2 Turn off the pre-paid flag 223i. Thereafter, the display special figure 2 advance winning effect command is set (S2208), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2205: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1412). In the variation display setting process of the thirteenth embodiment, when the variation start flag is on (S1601: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding is determined according to the special symbol for which variation starts. Since the value (SN2) of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223g is different by 1 (S1651) and the other processes are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passed game ball is distributed (in the first start opening 63a, the sound effect “ 2 At the start port 63b, a sound effect “boone” is output. This makes it possible to determine which ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass port.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing of passing through the passage opening is displayed, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entrance determination period, and the first start opening 63a or the first 2 At the timing when the ball enters the start port 63b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the drops, and the drops may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

<About the 14th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the effect symbol is displayed based on the detection of the entrance to the sorting device 6000 by the entrance sensor 6000a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the reserved symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000. If there is no entry to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected (when the player enters the distribution device but does not win), it is displayed once. The production design is hidden.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, a small region corresponding to a pseudo holding symbol, which is a symbol for artificially suggesting the number of balls to be held, based on the detection of the ball entering the sorting device 6000 by the ball entering sensor 6000a. Displayed on Ds1 and Ds2. The hold symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b is displayed in the small area Ds3 which is the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of holds. Correct identification information is displayed (see FIGS. 90A to 90C). (In this embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when the number is two, “C” when three, and “D” when four. Then, if there is no ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball detection, the pseudo hold symbol once displayed is displayed in a pseudo manner. By executing the variable display, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the pseudo-holding symbol is not displayed.

  This is because, for a player who has the impression that it is a reserved symbol with respect to the pseudo reserved symbol that is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000, the pseudo reserved symbol is not displayed (that is, This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when one of the holding balls is digested).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment in terms of configuration is included in the main processing (see FIG. 91) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Other configurations, processing executed by the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<About Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, the display and variation display of the reserved symbol and the pseudo reserved symbol in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, a period in which the variable display can be stopped and restarted in a pseudo manner during the fluctuation period (a replaceable period) is determined in advance for each fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a case where it is determined that there is no ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball detection in the changeable period during the fluctuation period. . Specifically, when there are two pseudo-holding symbols and two holding symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting device 6000, and the ball entering sensor 6000a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 90 (a)). Thereafter, in the replaceable period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b within the period of the ball entering determination period a, a pseudo stop display is displayed and executed next. A pseudo continuous change notice (pseudo continuous notice) suggesting that a continuous display and a continuous presentation are performed is displayed (see FIG. 90B). Thereafter, the display of the pseudo-pending symbols is changed to two states, and pseudo-variable display is started (FIG. 90 (c)). When the pseudo variation display stops, the pseudo hold symbol and the display of the hold symbol are changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 89 will be described. FIG. 89 shows that a ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball is detected in a period (non-replaceable period) that is not the replaceable period described above during the fluctuation period. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no. In this case, before the next variable display to be executed, the pseudo variable display is executed, so that the variable display based on the pseudo hold symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, when there are two pseudo-holding symbols and two holding symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting device 6000, and the ball entering sensor 6000a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 90 (a)). Thereafter, in the non-replaceable period of the variation period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within the period of the ball entering determination period a, the variation display being executed is continued as it is. . After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variation display is stopped, one pseudo hold symbol and one hold symbol are subtracted and the display is changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) is displayed, which suggests that the next fluctuation display to be executed and the continuous production are performed. May be.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that both the pseudo hold symbol and the hold symbol which entered the passage could be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By displaying the pseudo-pending symbol as a symbol that is easily understandable to the player and displaying the pending symbol as a symbol that is difficult for the player to identify, the player can recognize the pseudo-pending symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo on-hold symbol is added and displayed at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening 63a or the first opening opening does not pass through the passage opening. 2 When entering the starting port 63b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, if the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the number of pseudo hold symbols will be larger than the actual hold symbols, but there will be pseudo fluctuations. By executing with a special symbol, the pseudo-reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, a difference can be eliminated. In addition, when the ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b without passing through the passage port, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo hold symbol in accordance with the hold symbol.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 14th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  In the main process in the fourteenth embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) is executed instead of the preceding prize effect process (S1413) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 92, the above-described pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation process (S1461). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) is performed when the entrance sensor 6000a does not enter the first start port 63a or the second entrance 65b despite the entrance detection by the entrance sensor 6000a. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a variation effect is performed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the detection of the incoming ball.

  In the quasi-continuous variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (S3001). If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 pre-winning flag or the special figure 2 pre-winning flag is turned on (S3001: Yes), the ball entering sensor 6000a has detected a ball entering. In spite of this, since it is a case where it did not enter the 1st starting port 63a or the 2nd entrance 65b, a pseudo | simulation continuous variation start process is performed (S3002), and this process is complete | finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93, the pseudo continuous variation start process (S3002) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation start process (S3002). This pseudo continuous fluctuation start process (S3002) is performed when the entrance sensor 6000a detects the entrance but does not enter the first start port 63a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for starting a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a pseudo effect is produced by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a ball entry detection by the ball sensor 6000a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is on (S3101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is not on (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3109. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is on (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is set to off (S3102). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are obtained (S3104), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger (S3104). If it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3104: No), the process proceeds to S3109.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3104: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to be the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3105), and it is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replacement period (S3106).

  If it is determined that the period of stop symbol replacement is possible (S3106: Yes), a display pseudo-stop type command, a display pseudo-variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S3107). ). The fluctuating display is pseudo-stopped by the display pseudo-stop type command set here (see FIG. 90B), and the pseudo continuous variation effect is started by the display pseudo-variation pattern command (FIG. 90 ( c)), the display of the pseudo hold symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command (see FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball count counter (for example, when the ball was not entered into the first starting port 63a or the second ball inlet 65b in spite of the ball detected by the ball sensor 6000a) When the value of N1) does not match the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be shown that the pseudo-holding symbols based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are consumed and a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the special symbol 1 number of held balls When correcting the discrepancy between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort felt by the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the stop symbol replacement period (S3106: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S3108). The pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol as the next variation effect is set by the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command set here, and the pseudo hold symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol is set as the next variation effect. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3101, S3104, S3107 or S3108, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is on (S3109). If it is determined that the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is on (S3109: Yes), the same process as that of the special figure 1 described above with respect to the special figure 2 is performed (S3110 to S3116), and the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is performed. If it is determined that is not on (S3109: No), the processing of S3110 to S3116 is skipped, and this processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (S3001: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is determined whether or not (S3003). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous variation (S3003: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous variation (S3003: Yes), pseudo continuous variation stop processing for determining the stop mode of pseudo continuous variation is executed (S3004). .

  Now, with reference to FIG. 94, the pseudo continuous variation stop process (S3004) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S3004). The pseudo continuous variation stop process (S3004) is a process for determining a stop mode of the pseudo continuous variation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous variation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension of continuous variation (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3202 that there is a suspension of continuous variation (S3201: Yes), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of pseudo continuous variation display (S3202). Thereby, a continuous variation effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variation effect in which the variation effect is started and the variation effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no continuous variation hold (S3201: No), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of normal variation display (S3203). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous variation display is not started even though the continuous variation display stop symbol is displayed.

  Note that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the thirteenth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passed game ball is distributed (in the first start opening 63a, the sound effect “ 2 At the start port 63b, a sound effect “boone” is output. This makes it possible to determine which ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass port.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing of passing through the passage opening is displayed, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entrance determination period, and the first start opening 63a or the first 2 At the timing when the ball enters the start port 63b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the drops, and the drops may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of pseudo-pending symbols is larger than the number of reserved symbols, it is determined whether pseudo-variation is possible within the changing variation pattern. In this determination, it is determined whether or not it is within a switchable period set in advance in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, it can be quickly resolved if pseudo-variation is possible. In addition, when it is outside the switchable period, the pseudo-variation is executed in the subsequent and subsequent fluctuations, so that the problem that the difference continues for a long time can be suppressed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting the continuous notice in the variation mode of the pseudo variation with the variation pattern of winning, the player increases the expectation for the jackpot when the pseudo variation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabet so that it is difficult to determine the number of reserved symbols, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar-like display may be displayed, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the difference in length. Further, the display of the reserved symbols may not be performed at all on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo hold symbol is the actual number of hold. In this case, the reserved symbol is notified by a frame lamp or the like (for example, a cherry petal character is placed and the number of the petals are lit). The number can be notified.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  For example, by arranging the entrance sensor in the entrance 63 in the twelfth embodiment as described above, an entrance sound can be generated when entering the entrance 63, Also in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of holding balls is increasing at the timing when the passage has passed.

  Furthermore, by providing a sensor for detecting which of the support plate member 4300 is tilted, it is possible to discriminate which game ball that has passed through the entrance 63 is assigned (in the first start port 63a). , The sound effect “Puuy” and the sound effect “Boone” can be output at the second start port 63b, and a pseudo-holding symbol can be displayed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Examples of deformation improvements are illustrated below. In the first embodiment, the game ball can flow down the front surface of the sorting apparatus 1000, and the ordinary electric accessory 64 is disposed in front of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b instead of the ordinary electric accessory 64. May be. This ordinary electric accessory is not movable left and right, but is movable forward and backward so that a game ball flowing down the front surface of the sorting apparatus 1000 can enter. In addition, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged near the outer peripheral portion of the sorting apparatus 1000, and the ordinary electric accessory 64 is arranged along with the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. You may set up. The ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable left and right, and allows a game ball flowing down the left and right of the sorting apparatus 1000 to enter. Thereby, also in the sorting apparatus 1000, it is possible to vary the ease of entering the game ball with respect to any one of the starting ports.

  Moreover, it replaced with the support plate member comprised so that the stable distribution could be implement | achieved using the magnetic force in 12th Embodiment to 14th Embodiment, and it stabilized using the weight member in 3rd Embodiment to 11th Embodiment. You may make it use the support plate member comprised so that distribution might be implement | achieved. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the design cost by eliminating the need to consider the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball, and to reduce the product cost by reducing the number of parts.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine having a game area, in which a game ball flows down the game area, receives the game ball flowing down and operates with the weight of the received game ball to move the game ball to a first position and a second position. A gaming machine 1 including a sorting member that alternately distributes to a position.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 includes a sorting member that receives a game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position to the target position, it is possible to guide the game balls equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 1, the first start port and the second start port, each of which determines whether or not the game is successful by entering the ball, and the game balls distributed to the first position by the sorting member are guided to the first start port A gaming machine (2), comprising: a first guiding unit that performs the second guiding unit that guides the game balls distributed to the second position by the sorting member to the second starting port.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1, the first ball that guides the gaming balls alternately distributed to the first position and the second position by the sorting member to the first start port and the second start port, respectively. Since the guide portion and the second guide portion are provided, the game balls can be guided equally to the first start port and the second start port (different target positions).

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the first special symbol corresponding to the first start port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified and 2. When a game ball enters the starting port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified.

  In this case, if a game ball enters the first start opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right to dynamically display the first special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is over the upper limit (for example, It is stored as a holding ball until 4). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start port during dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball.

  However, it is difficult to uniformly enter the game balls at the first start port and the second start port, and the balls are likely to be biased only at one of the start ports. ) Is difficult to use. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit (the number of stored balls is stored up to the upper limit at both the first start port and the second start port), more than the upper limit number of game balls enter at one start port. Overflow is likely to occur. When an overflow occurs, the winning lottery and dynamic display for the overflowed entry are not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 2, the game balls flowing down the game area can be evenly entered into the first start port and the second start port by the sorting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. In other words, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed and the player's disadvantage can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a disk-shaped disk member that is pivotally supported, and a facing wall member that is disposed to face the disk member. The facing wall member is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a position where the phase is different in the circumferential direction from the entrance, and the game at the first position. A first ball outlet for discharging a ball; and a second ball outlet for discharging the game ball at the second position while being disposed at a position that is different in phase in the circumferential direction from the ball inlet, The disc member receives a game ball that has entered the entrance port of the facing wall member, and the disc member is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, whereby the received game A first receiving part for discharging a ball to the first position via the first ball outlet and a game ball that has entered the ball inlet of the facing wall member A second receiving portion that receives and discharges the received game ball to the second position through the second discharge port by rotating the disk member with the weight of the received game ball. A gaming machine 3 characterized in that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance of the facing wall member.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance of the facing wall member and the received game ball is received by the first receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member has a weight of the game ball. When the first receiving portion reaches the first ball outlet of the facing wall member, the game ball is discharged to the first position through the first ball outlet. In this case, since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance wall of the facing wall member, the balls are then entered into the entrance wall of the facing wall member. The received ball is received by the second receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and the second receiving portion reaches the second outlet of the facing wall member. Thus, the game ball is discharged to the second position through the second discharge port. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first position and the second position, and the distribution operation is executed using the weight of the game balls.

  In addition, since the distribution member is formed in a disk shape and can be arranged in a plane, even in a game area where the depth dimension (the interval between the game board and the plate glass) is relatively small, It is easy to secure a space for arranging the sorting members.

  In the gaming machine 3, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a receiving surface that receives a game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member is inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3, the first receiving part and the second receiving part have a receiving surface that receives the game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member, Since it is inclined downward along the circumferential direction, when a game ball entering from the entrance is received by the receiving surface of the first receiving portion or the receiving surface of the second receiving portion, the game is played along the downward inclination of the receiving surface. The ball can roll along the circumferential direction of the disk member, and the position where the weight of the game ball acts on the disk member can be moved. Thereby, since the change of the gravity center position of the disc member due to the weight of the game ball can be increased, the disc member can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly. .

  In the gaming machine 4, a game is characterized in that the receiving surfaces of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same direction so as to be inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Machine 5.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 4, the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same downward direction along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Therefore, the disc member is rotated by the rotating direction when the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the first receiving portion and the weight of the game ball received by the second receiving portion. The rotation direction when rotating is the same direction. That is, the rotating direction of the disk member can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where a disc member rotates to one direction and another direction, the operation | movement which distributes a game ball to a 1st position and a 2nd position can be performed stably. In addition, when a mechanism for reducing or stopping the rotation speed of the disk member is provided, the number of the mechanisms disposed can be reduced and the structure can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via a one-way clutch, and is allowed to rotate in a direction in which the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined downward. A gaming machine 6 characterized in that the rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch, and the receiving surface of the first receiving part and the receiving surface of the second receiving part are inclined downward. Rotation (that is, rotation in the direction to be rotated by the weight of the game ball) is allowed and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted, so that it is affected by disturbances such as vibration However, it is possible to avoid the disk member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it should rotate, and as a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the operation of distributing the game balls to the first position and the second position.

  The one-way clutch is not limited as long as it only allows rotation in one direction and restricts rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch system include a sprag type and a cam type.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet in the facing wall member are inclined and extended toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. A gaming machine 7 to play.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first and second outlets of the facing wall member are inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disk member into the first discharge port or the second discharge port of the facing wall member.

  That is, since the distribution member has a structure in which the disc member is rotated, when the game ball moves from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first outlet or the second outlet, There is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the receiving part or the second receiving part and the first outlet or the second outlet. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet are inclined toward the advancing direction of the disk member (that is, the game ball is the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). Therefore, the game balls pushed out from the first receiving part or the second receiving part can be smoothly received into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first outlet and the second outlet are different in phase by 180 degrees with respect to the entrance. The gaming machine 8, wherein the plate member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with the first receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is a position where the first and second outlets are 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance. And the disc member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the first receiving portion. The timing received by one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion can be matched with the timing at which the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion discharges the game ball to the first outlet or the second outlet. .

  That is, when one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet port or the second outlet port, the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the inlet port. Therefore, when the game ball received in one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet, or after discharging, the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part Thus, the next game ball can be received and the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is being transported toward the first outlet or the second outlet (that is, a circle) It is not necessary to receive the next game ball (with the plate member being rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first and second outlets are disposed. A gaming machine 9 which is arranged at the lowermost position.

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first outlet Since the mouth and the second ball outlet are disposed at the lowermost position, the game ball can be discharged downward from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. That is, when the ball is discharged, the game ball's own weight acts in a direction to enter the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, so that the game ball is hardly bitten and can be discharged reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet have the same phase, and the first ball outlet with respect to the ball inlet And the second drainage port is disposed at a position where the phase is different by 90 degrees, and the disk member is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are arranged around the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees. A gaming machine 10 that is alternately arranged in four directions.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 3 to 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet arranged at the same phase are 90 degrees out of phase with the ball entrance. Since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are alternately disposed at four positions in the circumferential direction of the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees, the first entrance portion and the second reception portion are placed at the entrance. The timing at which one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the played game ball and the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The timing at which the game ball is discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port can be matched.

  That is, when one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet or the second outlet, the first receiver is disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to the first outlet. Since the other of the part and the second receiving part is in the same phase as the entrance, the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first exiting port or the second exiting port. The next receiving ball can be received by the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to one of the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Alternatively, while the game ball received on one side of the second receiving part is being carried toward the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet (that is, in a state where the disk member is rotated), the next game ball There is no need to receive. Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In addition, since the first outlet and the second outlet are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to the entrance, for example, the first receiver is compared with a configuration in which the phase is changed by 180 degrees. The rotation angle of the disk member required for discharging the game ball received at the head or the second receiving part to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be reduced, and as a result, the disk It is possible to reduce the influence of the inertial force accompanying the rotation of the member. Therefore, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, and discharge the ball into the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the facing wall member is recessed in a surface facing the disc member, and the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion when the disc member rotates. And a first groove and a second groove that extend along the movement trajectory and communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and are stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the disk member is rotated in a state where a part of a ball is received in the first groove or the second groove.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the first groove and the second groove are recessed in the surface of the facing wall member facing the disk member, and the first groove and the second groove are The disk member extends along the movement trajectory of the first receiving part and the second receiving part when the disk member rotates, so that when the disk member rotates, the first receiving part or the second receiving part 2. A state in which a part of the game ball stored in the receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove can be formed. Therefore, when the disc member rotates, it is possible to form a state in which the disc member is connected to the facing wall member via the game ball, so that the game ball rolls in the first groove or the second groove. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the inertial force from becoming excessive by applying a rotational resistance to the disk member by utilizing the resistance when sliding. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In addition, since the first groove and the second groove communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is transferred to the first groove or the second groove. If the state received in the second groove (that is, the state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part) can be formed, the game ball is moved to the first outlet or the second outlet for the receiving (protrusion). Since the close-up state and the state where it is easy to enter the first or second exit port, the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first or second exit port.

  Further, the first groove and the second groove are communicated with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is the first groove or the second groove. The first receiving part or the second receiving part has reached the first outlet or the second outlet by being in an accepted state (that is, a state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part). In this case, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the edge located on the extension line of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In addition, although the terminal end of the first groove and the second groove communicates with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, the first groove and the second groove do not communicate with the ball inlet, and the start ends of the first groove and the second groove It is preferable that it is separated from the mouth by a predetermined rotation angle. According to this configuration, the initial stage in which the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, where there is no momentum in the rotation, It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotation of the disk member without generating resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotating operation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, so that rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove occurs. By utilizing the resistance caused by the movement, it is possible to suppress the inertial force of the disk member and to optimize the rotation operation.

  In the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet. The resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the first groove and the second groove can be increased as the first receiving part or the second receiving part approaches the first ball discharging port or the second ball discharging port. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized.

  Also, an amount that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove (that is, an amount protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). The game ball can be moved in the direction in which it is accepted (protruded) by gradually increasing the game ball, so that the game ball has an inertial force in the direction of entering the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Can do. As a result, the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be easily entered, and the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In the gaming machine 12, the first groove and the second groove have a maximum recessed depth greater than ½ of the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 12, the maximum recess depth of the first groove and the second groove is set to be larger than ½ of the diameter of the game ball. Since the portion received in the second groove (that is, the portion protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion) is made larger, the game ball can be brought closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, so that the game A state in which the ball can easily enter the first outlet or the second outlet can be formed, and the gaming ball can be more reliably discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at positions of opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. The gaming machine 14 is arranged closer to the disk member than the bottom surface of the two grooves.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at the positions of the opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. Since the first groove and the second groove are disposed closer to the disc member than the bottom surfaces of the first groove and the second groove, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part is the first groove or the second groove. When the first receiving part or the second receiving part reaches the first outlet or the second outlet, the game ball is received by the player (that is, protruding from the first receiver or the second receiver). Can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the side facing the terminal end of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first groove or the second groove. When the disc member is pivoted in a state of being received, the push portion is provided so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotational direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 15 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine 15, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first. When the disk member is rotated in a state of being received in the first groove or the second groove, the pushing portion is positioned so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotation direction of the disk member. Since the pushing portion abuts the game ball that rolls or slides in the first groove or the second groove from the rear in the rotational direction of the disk member, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball is reduced. As a result, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is discharged to the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, the pushing portion comes into contact with the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disk member, so that the game ball is moved to the first ball discharge port or It can be pushed into the second outlet. Thereby, it is possible to reliably perform the reception of the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and the exit to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member is a disk-side magnet disposed as the magnet disposed on the disk member, and the facing wall member in a direction of a magnetic pole attracting the disk-side magnet. The disk-side magnet and the facing-side magnet are arranged such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disk member are formed of the facing wall member. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that attracts each other at a rotational position of the disk member that is closer to the first and second outlet holes of the facing wall member than the inlet hole. 16.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles attracting the disc member and the facing wall member, respectively. When the disk member rotates, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member by using the magnetic force (attracting force) of the disk side magnet and the facing magnet. It can suppress that inertia force becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disc member have a first outlet port and a second outlet port of the facing wall member rather than the entrance port of the facing wall member. Since the disk members on the side closer to the position of the disk member are disposed at positions where they are attracted to each other, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force can be appropriately applied to the disk member. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. The rotation of the disk member can be smoothly and promptly advanced without generating. On the other hand, when the rotation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases. However, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed using magnetic force. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member includes a facing magnet disposed on the facing wall member and configured as a magnet, and the facing magnet is a first receiving portion of the disk member. Or the position corresponding to the movement locus | trajectory which the game ball accommodated in the 2nd receiving part moves with rotation operation | movement of the said disk member, Comprising: The 1st ball outlet and the 1st ball outlet than the ball entrance of the said facing wall member 2. A gaming machine 17 which is disposed on the side close to the ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the facing side magnet is a game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the disk member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the movement trajectory that moves with the rotation operation, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet (the force that attracts the game ball) is used to A rotation resistance can be made to act on a plate member, and it can control that inertia force of a disk member becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In addition, since the facing magnet is disposed closer to the first outlet and the second outlet than the entrance of the facing wall member, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force is appropriately applied to the disk member. Can do. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotating operation of the disk member without generating (a force to attract the game ball). On the other hand, at the stage where the rotational movement of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, and the inertia of the disk member is utilized by utilizing the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball). Force can be suppressed. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 17, the game ball can be used as a target on which the magnetic force by the facing magnet is applied, so there is no need to dispose a magnet on the disk member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 16 or 17, the facing magnet is disposed at a position spaced apart from the disk side magnet or the game ball by a predetermined distance in the radial direction of the disk member, and around the disk member. A gaming machine 18, wherein a plurality of gaming machines 18 are arranged along the direction.

  According to the gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 16 or 17, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of a plurality of facing magnets arranged along the circumferential direction is utilized. Rotational resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member. That is, when a rotational resistance is suddenly applied to the disk member, the brake member is suddenly braked and the rotational operation of the disk member becomes unstable. Therefore, the first receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance port or The reception by the second receiving part and the discharge of the game ball to the first discharge port or the second discharge port are inhibited. In contrast, according to the gaming machine 18, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member can be smoothly decelerated or stopped, and the rotating operation of the disk member can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In the gaming machine 18, the closer the plurality of facing magnets to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer to the disc member radial direction from the disk side magnet or the game ball. The gaming machine 19 is characterized in that the amount of separation is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 18, the closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer the plurality of facing magnets are from the disc side magnet or game ball to the circle. Since the amount of separation of the plate member in the radial direction is reduced, the effect of the magnetic force by the facing magnet is increased as the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion approaches the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can do. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 19, the sorting member includes a shaft portion that is pivotally supported by the facing wall member, and extends from the shaft portion and protrudes into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. And a braking member having a projecting piece and a facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the projecting piece and arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, It is pushed up as the projecting piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball which is drained from the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the member and passes through the first or second outlet of the facing wall member. The gaming machine 20 is characterized in that the facing piece of the braking member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 20, the braking member has a protruding piece extending from the shaft portion pivotally supported by the facing wall member protruding into the first outlet or the second outlet, and the protruding piece. A game ball that is disposed facing the outer peripheral surface of the disc member and facing away from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disc member, the facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the disc member When the ball passes through the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port of the facing wall member, the game ball pushes down the protruding piece of the brake member, and the brake member is rotated about the shaft portion, whereby the brake member Since the facing piece is pushed up, the pushed-up facing piece of the braking member can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the braking member is operated using a game ball passing through the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, and the operation of bringing the facing piece of the brake member into contact with the disk member can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Therefore, power and control for such operations can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 20, the facing wall member includes a storage portion that is a recessed space recessed in a surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the braking member is operable in the recessed space of the storage portion. A gaming machine 21 that is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 21, the storage portion that operably stores the braking member is recessed in the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. It can be blocked by the outer peripheral surface. That is, the braking member stored in the storage unit can be operatively held between the recessed space of the storage unit and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, a member that holds the braking member (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as a disk member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for holding the brake member. You can plan.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. 22.

  According to the gaming machine 22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, the frictional force between the disk member and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member can be secured, and the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be easily exhibited. In addition, since the elastic member is composed of a rubber-like elastic body, when the elastic member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member, the braking member, and the like are reduced. Since it can absorb by elastic deformation, the effect | action which decelerates or stops a disk member can be exhibited stably. Furthermore, for example, a concave-convex shape is formed as compared with a structure in which the disc member is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member. Since it is not necessary, the shape of the part can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member is characterized in that the facing piece is heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine 23, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member has a facing piece heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity position is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion. When the protruding piece is pushed down and the facing piece is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when rotated in one direction around the shaft), the weight of the braking member (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft) Using this, the brake member can be rotated in the other direction and returned to the initial position. Therefore, there is no need to provide an urging member for applying an urging force for returning to the initial position, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine 24 according to any one of the gaming machines 20 to 23, wherein the facing piece of the braking member is formed to be elastically deformable in a direction approaching or separating from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 24, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines 20 to 23, the facing piece of the braking member is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances such as the disc member and the braking member can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece. The action of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be stably exhibited. Similarly, the variation of the position where the passing game ball pushes down the protruding piece and the passing direction can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece, so that the game ball is prevented from being bounced back and reliably. Can be passed. Further, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, the contact force between them (that is, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disk member) is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the rotating operation of the disk member.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. .

  According to the gaming machine 25, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball discharged to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet from being inhibited by the protruding piece, and to smoothly push down the protruding piece to the passing game ball. .

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receptacle that receive the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. And a main body that is pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, a guide portion disposed on the main body portion, and guided by the guide portion to move. And when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is more than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the first angular position that is below, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game can be performed, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion. When the player receives the game ball, the game received by the second receiving portion is caused by the weight of the game ball and the main body portion rotating to a second angular position where the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the ball can be discharged to the second position and the game ball entered from the entrance can be received. At the first angular position, the guide portion is the first The moving body is moved downward to the receiving portion side and moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward to the second receiving portion side and the moving body is moved. Is moved to the second receiving portion side.

  According to the gaming machine 26, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 26 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the part, for example, after being rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body part to be maintained at the second angular position may return to the first angular position. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 26, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that moves while being guided by the guide unit, the guide unit is the first receiving unit at the first angular position. The moving body is moved downward toward the first receiving portion and moved toward the first receiving portion. At the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion and the moving body is moved toward the second receiving portion. Since it is moved, it is possible to maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first In the case where the two receiving portions are positioned below), the guide body is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, so that the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main body portion is rotated to the first angular position, the moving body moves toward the first receiving portion side. The main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted. A gaming machine 27 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a guide portion. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.

  In the gaming machine 27, the moving body is a ringed end material made of an elastic material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 27, the moving body is formed by forming a ringed end material made of an elastic material, so that the work of mounting the moving body on the guide portion is facilitated. As a result, the number of assembly steps can be reduced. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.

  The annular shape does not need to be circular, and may be a polygonal shape or an elliptical shape as long as a rod-like moving body can be inserted into the inner periphery thereof. Further, the moving body may be a material wound around, a material cut out from the material, or a material punched from the material.

  The gaming machine 29 according to the gaming machine 29, wherein the moving body is wound around the end material and the ends are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 29, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 28, the end portions of the moving body are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the amount of elastic deformation necessary to open a part of the moving body is large. Become. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine 30, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section, so that the contact area between the two is reduced and the sliding resistance is reduced. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the guide portion is tilted downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body can be reliably moved along the downward tilt without stopping in the middle, and the movement of the mobile body (Changing the center of gravity position) can be performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a passage shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a spherical shape that rolls on the guide portion or A gaming machine 31 that is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in the shape of a passage extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the guide portion is rotated. Since the moving body is formed in a moving spherical or cylindrical shape, when the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body is reliably and quickly moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion. Can be moved to.

  For example, in a structure where the moving body slides on the guide part, the sliding resistance is large, so the moving body that moves along the descending slope of the guide part may stop halfway, and the moving speed is slow, The movement of the body (change in the position of the center of gravity) may not be in time. On the other hand, if the moving body is formed in a spherical or cylindrical shape and rolls on the guide portion as in the gaming machine 31, the moving body can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end and moved. It is possible to quickly move the body (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 27, the guide portion includes a box body that is open on one surface side, and a lid body that is attached to the one surface side of the box body, and an internal space formed between the box body and the lid body. A game machine 32, wherein the moving body is accommodated in the game machine 32.

  According to the gaming machine 32, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 27, the guide unit includes a box body that is open on one side and a lid that is attached to the one side of the box body. Since the moving body is housed in the internal space formed between the lids, it is possible to facilitate the work of holding the moving body in the guide portion so that it can be guided, and to reduce the assembly man-hours.

  In the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material, and the fastening screw is fastened. A gaming machine 33, wherein a portion to be fastened is formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 33, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material. The fastened portions to which the fastening screws are fastened are formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, respectively. The fastening screw and the part to be fastened can be positioned at a part that becomes a downwardly inclined end when the guide part is downwardly inclined with the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to reinforce the portion that becomes the descending inclined end and to suppress the damage due to the collision of the moving body. Moreover, since the structure for fastening and fixing the box and the lid can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the moving body collides (the portion that becomes the descending inclined end), a member for reinforcement is provided separately. The product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion includes a recess portion formed by recessing one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion downward. Characteristic gaming machine 34.

  According to the gaming machine 34, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion has a lower end on one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is formed, the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body portion, and when the moving body moves to one end side or the other end side along the downward inclination, the moving body Can be prevented from bouncing back to the rising slope side.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion is curved in an arc shape so that a central portion is below the one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. A gaming machine 35 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine 35, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion has a lower central portion than one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Therefore, in the state where the guide portion is inclined downward in accordance with the rotation operation of the main body portion, the gradient on the upward inclination side can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and promptly move the moving body that has been positioned on the ascending slope side of the guide portion as the main body portion rotates. In particular, in the configuration in which the annular moving body slides on the rod-shaped guide portion, the frictional resistance is large, so there is a possibility that the movement of the moving body positioned on the rising slope side may not be started. On the other hand, the gaming machine 35 is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine 36 according to any one of the gaming machines 26 to 35, wherein the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material, and the moving body is made of a metal material.

  According to the gaming machine 36, in any of the gaming machines 26 to 35, since the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material and the moving body is made of a metal material, the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body Change can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion, and a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. A game that has a main body that is pivotally supported around the center and a center of gravity position moving means that moves the position of the center of gravity as the main body rotates. When the ball is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the main body portion rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving portion is lower than the second receiving portion by the weight of the game ball. The game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball received from the entrance can be received. When the game ball that has entered the mouth is received by the second receiving portion of the main body, the second receiving portion is weighted by the game ball. When the main body rotates to a second angular position below the first receiving part, the game ball received by the second receiving part is discharged to the second position, and the ball enters from the entrance. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received, and the center-of-gravity position moving means is pivotably suspended on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, respectively. A pair of hanging bodies, proximity means for bringing the hanging body located on the upper side close to the body section when the body is rotated to the first angular position or the second angular position, and a position on the upper side A game machine 37, comprising: release means for releasing the approach to the main body by the approach means to the suspended body and hanging the body.

  According to the gaming machine 37, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 37 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the unit, when the game unit is rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body unit to be maintained at the second angular position is flipped up by the repulsive force during the ball discharging operation of the game ball. In some cases, the first angular position may be reversed. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 37, a pair of suspended bodies that are pivotably suspended respectively on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, and the first angular position or the second angular position. When the main body is rotated, the proximity means for bringing the suspended body located on the upper side closer to the main body and the proximity means for the hanging body located on the upper side are released from the proximity to the main body and suspended. The center-of-gravity position moving means having the releasing means to be moved is provided, so that the center-of-gravity position can be moved in accordance with the rotation of the main body, and thereby the main body is supposed to be in a posture (first angular position or second angular position) ) Can be maintained.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first 2 position is located below), the suspended body located on the upper side (first receiving part side) is brought close to the main body part, and the suspended body located on the lower side (second receiving part side). Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main ball portion is rotated to the first angular position, the drooping located on the upper side (first receiving portion side). While the body is brought close to the main body, and the hanging body located on the lower side (second receiving portion side) is suspended, the main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member is disposed on the hanging body in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the main body side magnet disposed as the magnet and disposed on the main body portion between the pair of hanging bodies. A suspension-side magnet that is disposed and configured as a magnet, and the proximity means magnetizes the suspension-side magnet to the body-side magnet so that the suspension body positioned on the upper side is attached to the body A gaming machine 38 characterized in that the game machine 38 is maintained in a state of being close to the portion.

  According to the gaming machine 38, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet to maintain the drooping body located on the upper side close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, and the reliability of the proximity and the releasing operation thereof can be improved. Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member includes a main body side magnet arranged as a magnet between the pair of hanging bodies and configured as a magnet, and the pair of hanging bodies are made of a magnetic material, The gaming machine 39, wherein the proximity means maintains the suspended body positioned on the upper side close to the body portion by magnetizing the suspended body to the body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 39, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the hanging body to maintain the hanging body located on the upper side in a state close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified and the reliability of the proximity and its release operation can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained close to each other. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to arrange | position a magnet only to a main-body part because a pair of drooping body is comprised from a magnetic material. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which magnets are provided on each of the main body and the hanging body, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by the amount that the magnet disposed on the hanging body can be eliminated. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the hanging body is made of a magnetic material, its weight can be increased, and accordingly, to the lower side of the center of gravity position due to the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)). The amount of movement can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 38 or 39, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body portion, and a proximity protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body portion. The drooping body includes an extending piece that extends from the drooping body and that can be locked to the proximity protrusion when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. The means is that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the body portion is locked to the proximity protrusion, so that the hanging body is brought close to the body portion, A gaming machine 40, wherein a drooping body composed of the drooping side magnet or the magnetic material is magnetically attached to a main body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 40, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 38 or 39, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and a proximity that protrudes from the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the proximity projection when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. Since the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the protrusion for proximity, the hanging body is brought close to the main body portion, and the main body side magnet A drooping body composed of a drooping magnet or a magnetic material can be magnetized. Thereby, the drooping body located on the upper side can be reliably brought close to the main body. In addition, the hanging body can be brought close to the main body by locking the extending piece to the proximity protrusion, that is, assisting the magnetic attachment of the hanging magnet or the hanging body to the main body side magnet. Since the magnetic force of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet can be weakened, the cost of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and when the drooping body is located on the lower side, the proximity state can be released. It can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body, a release protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body, And the hanging body includes an extending piece that extends from the hanging body and that can be locked to the release protrusion when positioned on the lower side as the main body rotates. The proximity means is configured such that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side as the body portion is rotated is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the body portion. The gaming machine 41 is characterized in that the proximity of the drooping body to the main body by the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping body or a drooping body made of a magnetic material is released.

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the releasing projection when positioned downward as the main body rotates. Since the extension piece is provided, the extension piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the main body portion, and the main body The magnetic attachment of the side magnet and the drooping side magnet (proximity of the drooping body to the main body) can be released. Thereby, the hanging body located on the lower side can be suspended and the center of gravity as a whole can be moved reliably.

  One extended piece serves as both the extended piece in the gaming machine 40 and the extended piece in the gaming machine 41 (that is, it can be locked to both the proximity protrusion and the release protrusion). It is preferable to configure as described above. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the extending piece for locking to the protruding portion for proximity and the extending piece for locking to the hanging portion for releasing the protrusion on the hanging body. Can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a rotation shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to a tip end thereof, so that the length of the main body portion is from the rotation shaft. The at least one main body side magnet that is larger than the length to the center and is disposed in the main body portion maintains one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies close to the main body portion. A gaming machine 42 that can be used as a magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 42, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip end, Since it is made larger than the length dimension from the rotation axis to the center of the main body, at least one main body side magnet disposed in the main body is in a state where one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies are close to the main body. It can also be used as a magnet for maintaining the above. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. In addition, in this way, by making the length of the hanging body larger than the length from the pivot shaft to the center of the main body, the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) ), The amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position can be increased, and as a result, the main body can be easily maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  In any one of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are arranged such that the center of gravity is located on the tip side from the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip. A gaming machine 43 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 43, in any of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are more on the distal side than the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft supported pivotally to the main body portion to the distal end. Since the center of gravity position is arranged, the amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position associated with the displacement of the drooping body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) can be increased. The first angle position or the second angle position) can be easily maintained.

<Characteristic A group> (sounds when winning 8 chances)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, The storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the storage number based on the storage of the first information or the second information. An identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means; and In a gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of alternately distributing the game ball passing through the passage opening into the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Based on the storage means that can store the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the storage means stores the first information or the second information. , Identification to display on the display means an identification pattern indicating the number of each stored Based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, a privilege game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player, And a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing port can be alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A distribution unit; and a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage. Thereby, since the notification mode is notified by having passed through the passage opening, the discomfort due to the time difference between passing through the passage opening and entering the first and second entrances is determined by the notification mode. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passage, it is determined whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determination unit, wherein the notification unit reports a notification mode in which a determination result by the determination unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a determination unit that determines whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance opening or the second entrance by the distribution unit. And the notification means notifies a notification mode in which the determination result by the determination means can be determined. Thereby, the player can know in advance whether the game ball can be distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily predict future game development.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that a gaming ball has passed through the passage, and the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the passing of the game ball to the passage, so that the player can easily There is an effect that it is possible to determine that it has passed through the passage opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passage The notification mode to be notified when the game ball has passed is equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball has passed through the passage. A gaming machine A4, which is informed of the length of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means is predetermined when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode that is notified when the game ball passes through the passage opening is notified to the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. Since the game ball is notified for a time longer than the time required for the game ball to enter, the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing when it passes through the entrance. Can make a player think. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Provisional hold symbol is displayed at winning timing)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. A discriminating unit for discriminating between which the game ball is distributed, a first informing unit for informing a first informing mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and a game ball at the first entrance or the second entrance A gaming machine B1 comprising: second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. A determination means for determining which of the mouths is distributed; a first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means; and the first entrance or the second entrance And a second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the game ball entering. As a result, in the first notification mode notified by passing through the passage port and the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first entrance port or the second entrance port. You can make the player think as if he entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference between the timing when the player enters the passage and the timing when the player enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified of the first notification mode, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode elapses for a predetermined time or more. In the case, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the first notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, even if the first notification mode has exceeded a predetermined time, the second notification unit When the notification means does not change to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to the non-notification mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage opening enters the first or second entry port. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that he did not.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo hold symbol and book hold symbol are displayed respectively)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Determining means for determining which order is allocated, and decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display means, Based on the establishment of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first is not displayed among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit displays the start symbol. Based on the establishment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. Determining means for determining which order is assigned to the mouth; and a decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display The means is configured to hide, from among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, the decorative symbol displayed first, based on the establishment of the start condition, and the dynamic display unit Based on the establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can alert | report that it entered into the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance by the decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize that the start condition is satisfied. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of the first information or the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. Since there is a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference from the number of the first information or the second information, it is discriminated whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference determination means is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. A gaming machine C4, wherein the difference is discriminated based on a lapse of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3, the difference determining means is configured such that after the gaming ball passes through the passage, the gaming ball is the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined based on the fact that a reference time longer than the time required to enter the mouth has elapsed, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening is the first entry hole or the second entry opening. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has been entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means discriminates the difference based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. A gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determining means is based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to discriminate whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining unit determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit. If there is a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information that is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information. When the start condition is set by the condition setting means, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, And a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information, and the dynamic display means is configured by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, the dynamic display is started again. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the number of first information and second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means includes the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determination means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decoration symbol corresponding to the small number of the first information or the second information is added and displayed by the number of differences, and the gaming machine C7 .

<Feature D group>
A game ball has entered the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A game having lottery means for performing a lottery, and a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result In the machine, a passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass, a first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, and a second flow through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down. A distribution means capable of alternately distributing a path, a game ball flowing down the first flow path to the first entrance and the second entrance, and a game flowing down the second flow path A first position that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance, and a place where the ball enters more than the first position. And a variable control means for changing the variable member from the first position to the second position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass and a second flow path through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down are formed. The game balls flowing down the first flow path are distributed alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance by the assigning means. The game ball flowing down the second flow path is variable between a first position where it is difficult to enter the first entrance or the second entrance and a second position where entry is easier than the first position. It is variable depending on the member. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means. As a result, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening can easily enter the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game balls that have not passed through the passage also have a predetermined opportunity. Thus, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, regular entry and sudden entry can be provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

  The game machine D1 includes a determining unit that determines whether the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control unit based on establishment of a determination condition. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, it is determined by the determining means whether to change the variable member from the first position to the second position by the variable control means, There is an effect that the player can be expected to satisfy the determination condition.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is attached to the first entrance, A gaming machine having a guide portion that guides a game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first entrance by being changed to the second position by the variable control means. D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is the first entrance. Since the game ball flowing down the second flow path is guided to the first entrance by the guide portion by being arranged in association with the second position by the variable control means, the first entrance There is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter one entrance, while efficiently arranging the second entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine D3, the variable member is arranged on both sides of the first entrance, and at the first position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the first entrance. The game machine D4 is characterized in that, in the second position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path is received and guided to the first entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the variable members are arranged on both sides of the first entrance. At the first position, the variable member restricts the game ball flowing down the second flow path from entering the first ball slot, and at the second position, the game ball receiving the game ball flowing down the second flow path is Since it is guided to the 1 entrance by the variable member, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player by changing the winning rate to the 1st entrance by the variable member.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first entrance and the second entrance are arranged on the same plane, and the variable member is a first variable member associated with the first entrance. And a second variable member associated with the second entrance, and a gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first entrance and the second entrance are arranged on the same plane, and the variable member includes the first entrance Since the first variable member associated with the mouth and the second variable member associated with the second entrance are provided, it is possible to vary the winning rate to the first entrance and the second entrance. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine D5, the variable control means includes synchronization means for synchronizing the first variable member and the second variable member so as to vary the first position to the second position. A gaming machine D6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the variable control means synchronizes the first variable member and the second variable member and varies the first position to the second position by the synchronizing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the winning rate to the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied in synchronization.

  In the gaming machine D6, the synchronizing means includes a connecting variable means that is variable by connecting the first variable member and the second variable member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the synchronizing means connects the first variable member and the second variable member and can be varied by the coupling variable means. There is an effect that the variable member and the second variable member can be varied in synchronization.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition The game machine D8 is characterized by comprising a variable display shortening means for setting the dynamic display time according to to be shortened based on a predetermined opportunity.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit based on the lottery result of the lottery unit. The variable display shortening means sets the dynamic display time by the dynamic display means to be shortened based on the predetermined trigger when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed by shortening the dynamic display time in accordance with the increase in the winning rate to the first entrance or the second entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, and the acquisition means Storage means for storing a predetermined number of the information for the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively, and the lottery means triggered by the fact that the lottery condition is satisfied, A gaming machine D9, wherein the lottery is executed in a predetermined order based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are produced. That is, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number for each of the first entrance and the second entrance. The lottery means is executed by the lottery means in a predetermined order based on the information stored in the storage means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to enter more game balls into the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the sorting member has a first receiving portion that can receive the game ball that has passed through the passage port, and a second receiving portion that is different from the first receiving portion. When the first receiving portion receives the game ball, the first receiving portion moves in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first entrance, and the second receiving portion receives the game ball in the second direction. The game machine D10 is characterized in that it moves to the second entrance and guides the game ball to the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the first receiving portion of the sorting member receives the gaming ball and moves in the first direction to play the first entrance. Since the ball is guided and the second receiving portion receives the game ball and moves in the second direction, the game ball is guided to the second entrance, so that the first game ball is not provided with a driving means or the like. There is an effect that game balls can be distributed to the entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine D10, the sorting member includes a pivotable shaft portion, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position facing the passage port by rotating in the first direction, The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the first receiving portion is arranged at a position facing the passage port by rotating in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D10, by moving the sorting member, the position is moved so that the gaming balls alternately enter the first receiving part and the second receiving part. Therefore, there is an effect that the sorting member can be configured with a compact configuration.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the sorting member restricts movement in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part is not receiving a game ball. A gaming machine D12 having a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D10 or D11, the sorting member is moved in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part does not receive the game ball. Since the movement is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the sorting member rotates in a state where the sorting ball is not received by the sorting member, and it is possible to suppress irregular gaming ball sorting. effective.
<Feature E group>
A game ball has entered the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means for performing a lottery, a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific lottery result, and a game ball Launching means capable of launching based on a user's operation, a first flow path through which game balls launched by the launching means flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path Alternatively, a passing port having an opening through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can be passed, and a game ball that has passed through the passing port are alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. Distribution means that can flow, and the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not passed through the passage opening are A first variable member that is variable to a first position that makes it easier to guide to the ball opening, and a second position that makes it difficult to guide to the first position, and the second flow path to flow down to the passage opening. Having a third position that makes it easier to guide the game ball that has not passed to the first entrance and a fourth position that makes it easier to guide the game ball than the third position; A gaming machine E1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E1, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A game ball is fired by the launching means based on the player's operation. A game ball that has passed through a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball that has passed through a first flow path through which a game ball launched by the launching unit flows down or a second flow path different from the first flow path can be passed. The first entrance and the second entrance are alternately distributed by the distribution means. A first position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and has not passed through the passage opening is easily guided to the first entry opening, and a second position that is less likely to be guided than the first position. The first variable member is variable. A third position that makes it easier to guide the game ball that has not passed through the passage through the second flow path to the first entrance, and a fourth position that makes it difficult to guide the game ball from the third position. The second variable member is varied. As a result, even if the game ball does not pass through the passage opening, it is possible to enjoy which of the first flow path and the second flow path the game ball can flow into the first entry opening. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the first variable member is changed to the first position or the second variable member is changed to the third position, the first entrance is more than the passage through the passage. A gaming machine E2, which is set to be easy to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the first variable member is changed to the first position or the second variable member to the third position, rather than passing through the passage port, Since it is set to be easy to enter the first entrance, it is possible not only to pass the passage, but also to enjoy the game ball by aiming at the first variable member or the second variable member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first variable member and the second variable member have synchronization variable means for changing in synchronization.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first variable member and the second variable member are synchronously changed by the synchronous variable means, so that the entrance to the first entrance is made. There is an effect that the ball rate can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E4 is characterized by having independent variable means for independently varying the first variable member and the second variable member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, since the first variable member and the second variable member are independently changed by the independent variable means, the case where the first variable member is changed by the player and the second variable member are changed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide different interests in different cases.

  One of the gaming machines E1 to E4 has a determining means for determining whether or not the first variable member or the second variable member is variable based on the establishment of the determination condition. Machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, whether or not to change the first variable member or the second variable member is determined based on the establishment of the determination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved by making the player expect the determination condition that is an opportunity to change the first variable member or the second variable member to be satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the first variable member and the second variable member are It has a guide part for guiding the game ball to the first entrance by being arranged along with the first entrance and being changed to the first position or the third position. Characteristic gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the first variable member and the first entrance The 2 variable member is arranged along with the first entrance, and is changed to the first position or the third position, so that the game ball is guided to the first entrance by the guide, There is an effect that the first entrance and the second entrance can be arranged in the game area in a space-saving manner.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, a state setting for setting a special state in which the first variable member or the second variable member is easily changed to the first position or the third position based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and dynamic display by the dynamic display means based on the setting of the special state A gaming machine E7, comprising: a variable display shortening means for setting the time to be shorter.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E6, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit based on the lottery result of the lottery unit. The variable display shortening means sets the dynamic display time by the dynamic display means to be shortened based on the predetermined trigger when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed by shortening the dynamic display time in accordance with the increase in the winning rate to the first entrance or the second entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the sorting member has a first receiving part that can receive the game ball that has passed through the passage port, and a second receiving part that is different from the first receiving part. When the first receiving portion receives the game ball, the first receiving portion moves in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first entrance, and the second receiving portion receives the game ball in the second direction. The game machine E8 is characterized in that it moves to the second entrance and guides the game ball to the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the first receiving portion of the sorting member receives the gaming ball and moves in the first direction to play the first entrance. Since the ball is guided and the second receiving portion receives the game ball and moves in the second direction, the game ball is guided to the second entrance, so that the first game ball is not provided with a driving means or the like. There is an effect that game balls can be distributed to the entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine E8, the sorting member has a rotatable shaft portion, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position facing the passage port by rotating in the first direction, The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the first receiving portion is arranged at a position facing the passage port by rotating in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E8, the position is moved so that the gaming balls alternately enter the first receiving part and the second receiving part by rotating the sorting member. Therefore, there is an effect that the sorting member can be configured with a compact configuration.

  In the gaming machine E8 or E9, the sorting member restricts movement in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part is not receiving a game ball. A gaming machine E10 having a regulating means.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8 or E9, the sorting member is moved in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part does not receive a game ball. Since the movement is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the sorting member rotates in a state where the sorting ball is not received by the sorting member, and it is possible to suppress irregular gaming ball sorting. effective.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a First starting port (first entrance)
63b Second starting port (second entrance)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether or not the game is won is determined based on the winning of the game medium at the entrance, and when the determination result is a big hit, a game value advantageous to the player is given. For the purpose of distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance, there is one in which an introduction channel for introducing the game medium to the entrance is provided.

  For example, in a gaming machine equipped with two types of entrances, it is possible to alternate the winning of game media to the two types of entrances by sorting in the introduction channel. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of preventing a ball from entering one side of the mouth.

JP 2012-231902 A

  However, in the above gaming machines, there is a problem that the game is monotonous because the game balls that have entered the introduction path are regularly and alternately distributed in the two types of entrances. It was. As a result, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and the first entrance ball. to means or the second ball entrance means based on the game ball is ball entrance, in the case where the determination means for performing determination, the determination result of the determining means, reaches a certain determination result, advantageously the player anda privilege game providing means for providing a benefit game to be a passing means for game ball having an opening capable of passing a first flow path game ball that has passed through the passing means flows down, the passage a second flow path game balls that did not pass means flows down, the game balls flowing down the first flow path, can be distributed alternately between the first ball entrance means and said second ball entrance means and distribution means, game balls flowing down the second flow path, the first ball entrance unit or the second Of spherical means, in response to the first position to make it difficult to at least ball entrance one to one, a variable, variable means and a second position to facilitate the ball entrance than its first position, the establishment of a predetermined condition , the variable means, a variable control means for variably to said second position from said first position, in which comprises a.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the second ball entry means is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first ball entry means , and the variable means is are arranged in association with 1 ball entrance means, it is varied to the second position by said variable control means, the guide means for guiding the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first ball entrance means It is what you have.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the variable means is disposed on both sides of the first ball entry means , and flows down the second flow path at the first position. game ball restricted to ball entrance to the first ball entrance means, and in the second position, in which receiving game balls flowing down the second flow path is guided to the first ball entrance means is there.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first entrance means capable of entering a game ball , the second entrance means different from the first entrance means, the first entrance means or the second entrance means. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, a determination means for executing the determination, and a bonus game advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. A bonus game granting means to be given, a passing means having an opening through which a game ball can pass, a first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passing means flows down, and does not pass through the passing means A second flow path through which the game balls flow down and a distribution means capable of alternately distributing the game balls flowing down through the first flow path into the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means; The game ball flowing down the second flow path is less than the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Variable means that can be varied between a first position that makes it difficult to enter a ball and a second position that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first position, and the variable means triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. Variable control means for changing the position from the first position to the second position.

As a result, there is an effect that can be improved in the interest of Yu technique's.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the second entrance means is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance means, and the variable means is attached to the first entrance means, and is controlled by the variable control means. By changing to the second position, there is a guide means for guiding the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first entrance means. Thus, the game balls flowing down the second flow path is guided by the guide means to the first ball entrance means, while the first ball entrance means and the second ball entrance means efficiently arranged, the first input There is an effect that more game balls can be entered into the ball means .

According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the variable means is disposed on both sides of the first ball entry means, and in the first position, A game ball flowing down the second flow path is restricted from entering the first ball entering means, and at the second position, the game ball flowing down the second flow path is received and the first ball entering means is received. since it is intended to guide to, the variable means changes the winning rate to the first ball entrance means, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the sorting device schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first start opening, and (b) FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus schematically illustrated to explain the operation of distributing to two start ports. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (a) is the figure which showed the area | region division setting and effective line setting of the display screen typically, (b) is an actual figure. It is the figure which illustrated before and after rearrangement of the reservation symbol display in a display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of a distribution apparatus, (b) is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow VIIb direction view of Fig.7 (a). (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow VIIIb direction view of Fig.8 (a), (c) is the arrow VIIIc of Fig.8 (a). It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of the front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the direction of arrow IXb in FIG. 9 (a), and (c) is IXc− in FIG. 9 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front member in an IXc line. (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow Xb direction view of Fig.10 (a). It is sectional drawing of the facing wall member in the XI-XI line of FIG.9 (c). It is the plane expanded view which expanded and illustrated the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member in the arrow XII direction view of Fig.10 (a). (A) is a top view of a disk member, (b) is a front view of the disk member in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13 (a), and (c) is a front view of FIG. 13 (b). It is a bottom view of the disk member in the arrow XIIIc direction view. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received at the left receiving portion from the left outlet. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram of the sorting apparatus illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the right receiving unit from the right discharge port. It is sectional drawing of the front member in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of a front member, (b) is a top view of the front member in the arrow XXb direction view of Fig.20 (a). (A) is a side view of a braking member, (b) is a top view of the braking member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIb in FIG. 21 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of a distribution device, (a) is the state before the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball, (b) is the state after the protruding piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball. , Respectively. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a sorting apparatus, (b) is a side view of a sorting apparatus. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXVb direction view of Fig.25 (a). (A) is a rear view of a front member, (b) is a side view of the front member in the arrow XXVIb direction view of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 27 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXVIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a weight member, (b) is a side view of the weight member in the arrow XXVIIIb direction view of Fig.28 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a perspective view of the weight member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the weight member in a deformation | transformation state. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVb direction view of Fig.34 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XXXIVc direction view of 34 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVa-XXXVa line | wire of FIG.34 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XXXVb-XXXVb line | wire of Fig.34 (a). (A) to (d) is a front view of the support plate member illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member that receives an entered game ball and discharges the game ball. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angular position. (A) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first start port, and (b) schematically illustrates an operation of distributing the entered game ball to the second start port. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate member, (b) is a side view of the board | substrate member in the arrow XXXIXb direction view of Fig.39 (a). (A) is a front view of a support plate member, (b) is a side view of the support plate member as viewed in the direction of arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a), and (c) is a view in FIG. 40 (a). It is a bottom view of the support plate member in the arrow XLc direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the support plate member in the XLIa-XLIa line | wire of FIG.40 (b), (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 2nd angle position from a 1st angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 2nd angle position. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 2nd angle position, (b) and (c) are the support plates in the state which changes toward a 1st angle position from a 2nd angle position. It is a front schematic diagram of a member, and (d) is a front schematic diagram of a support plate member arranged at the 1st angle position. (A) is a front view of the support plate member in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in a 1st angle position, (c) is a 2nd angle position. It is a front view of the support plate member arrange | positioned in. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 12th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is disposed at the first angular position in the twelfth embodiment and the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) is the view in FIG. 46 (a). It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow XLVIb direction view. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is disposed at the second angular position in the twelfth embodiment, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the open state, and (b) is the FIG. 47 (a). It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow XLVIIb direction view. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 12th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter and the big hit and small hit determination values. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table, and (d) is a hit between the second hit random number counter and the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the first special symbol, (b) is a jackpot in the first hit type counter and the second special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a classification. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of fluctuation classification counter CS1 and fluctuation classification at the time of big hit. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probability variation). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of a fluctuation | variation classification. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the short time fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter and the fluctuation type in the first special symbol in the short time state. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the variation type counter and the variation type in the second special symbol in the short-time state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 12th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the support plate member is arranged at the first angular position in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the closed state, and (b) is FIG. 73. It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow LXXIIIb direction view of (a). (A) is a front view of the sorting apparatus in which the modified support plate member in the twelfth embodiment is disposed at the second angular position, and the ordinary electric accessory is in the open state, and (b) is FIG. 74. It is a side view of the distribution apparatus in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 13th embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in 13th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 13th Embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the change of the display of the holding | maintenance symbol and effect symbol in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of normal in 13th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of entering the distribution unit in 13th Embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect at the time of the entrance into the entrance in 13th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the effect at the time of the entrance judgment period in 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the advance winning detection process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 13th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 13th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the advance prize production | presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the change display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in the case where a ball entering judgment period passes at the time of the fluctuation | variation in 14th Embodiment (it can replace). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in case the entrance judgment period passes at the time of the fluctuation | variation period (impossible replacement) in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance to the distribution unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the production | presentation at the time of the entrance judgment period in 14th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram to show, (c) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect after the entrance judgment period in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous variation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 14th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 18, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63a, 63b, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging the reserved symbol display (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first start port 63 a, 2 The start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A sorting apparatus 1000 is provided at the lower center of the game area. In the sorting apparatus 1000, a normal electric accessory 64 is provided at the top. In a normal state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 stands upward while the facing blades 64a and 64b face each other at a predetermined interval (an interval in which a game ball can enter approximately one ball (the diameter of the game ball is approximately 11 mm)). Arranged in a state. In a normal state (a state in which the blades 64a and 64b stand up), the route through which the game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000 is only a route that passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64. The player first fires the game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64.

  When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, the entered game ball is alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution apparatus 1000 will be described.

  FIG. 4 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically shown for explaining the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 1000 schematically illustrated for explaining the operation of distributing the ball game balls to the second start port 63b.

  As shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the sorting device 1000 has a disc member 1300 that is rotatably mounted therein, and an outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 includes The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are recessed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), when the left game unit 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 depends on the weight of the game ball (that is, the weight of the game ball is equivalent to the disc). The center of gravity of the member 1300 is decentered to one side (right side in FIG. 4 (a)) with respect to the rotation center), while the disc member 1300 stores the game ball in the left receiving portion 1310L, (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction). When the left receiving portion 1310L reaches downward by the rotation of the disc member 1300, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L and the left guide passage 1110L 1 It is guided to the start port 63a.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the sorting apparatus 1000 receives the game ball that has entered next to the game ball shown in FIG. 4A by the right receiving portion 1310R. That is, in the sorting apparatus 1000, the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed 180 degrees out of phase with the left receiving portion 1310L, and when the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned below, the right receiving portion 1310R is positioned above and It is comprised so that the game ball which carried out the ball can be received alternately.

  In this case, when the right receiving portion 1310R receives the next game ball that has entered the distribution device 1000, the distribution device 1000 uses the weight of the game ball in the same manner as when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball. 1300 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 4 (a) clockwise direction) while storing the game ball in the right receiving portion 1310R, and the right receiving portion 1310R reaches downward. The game ball stored in the right receiving portion 1310R is guided to the second start port 63b by being discharged into the right guide passage 1110R.

  As described above, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a and the right receiving portion 1310R moves upward. The right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has been placed and then entered. When the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball, the disc member 1300 rotates 180 degrees in one direction to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and the left receiving portion 1310L is disposed upward. Next, the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered.

  Therefore, the sorting apparatus 1000 can evenly distribute the game balls to be entered into the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be awarded, and as a result, the first start port 63a is caused by winning. It is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second starting port 63b.

  Returning to FIG. A normal symbol start port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13. The normal symbol start port 67 is a gate type and includes a start port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing to the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and “O” and “X” are displayed. After the symbols are alternately turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), the normal symbol indicating the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the symbol “◯” or “×”) is stopped (lit). When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 while the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is won, the second symbol display section 88 is lit and displayed with a symbol “◯” indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been won. When the winning symbol is displayed, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is activated, and the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64, which is normally maintained in the upright state, stand up substantially vertically. It moves substantially in a V shape (inverted C shape) and guides the game balls by the blades 64a and 64b, so that the game balls can easily enter the sorting device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out, the symbol “x” indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out is displayed on the second symbol display section 88.

  A first symbol display in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided in the upper right part of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a illuminate the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation display is not executed among the balls won at the first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, and the normal symbol starting port 67. This is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits and error indications are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. On the left 7-segment LED, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Specifically, the variable display is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning at the first start port 63a elapses (in the present embodiment, the center segment of the seven segments blinks). After that, the display is stopped with a symbol indicating the determination result. In the case where the determination result is off, a symbol “-” indicating that the center segment is off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbol indicating a deviation such as symbols “3” and “7” corresponding to the win is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  Moreover, although the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, a variation time is set for each variation mode, and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the variation pattern can be divided into a long variation pattern with a relatively long variation time and a short variation pattern with a relatively short variation time by a variation pattern that becomes reach and a variation pattern that does not reach. As described above, even when the time is roughly sorted according to a constant reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the dynamics related to the time information Corresponds to the display mode.

  In addition, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the rough fluctuation pattern time information described above (for example, whether it is a long-time fluctuation pattern). Information on time information determined based on (for example, the number of long-time variation patterns performed before the start of variation) also falls under this category.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not a big hit is determined (big hit lottery), and the determination of the big hit type Do. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R normal jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot are prepared. The jackpot symbol displayed on the LED 37b is a symbol indicating the type of jackpot (in this embodiment, for example, “9” for 15R regular jackpot, “7” for 15R probability variation jackpot, “3” for 2R probability variation jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

  Here, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. After the jackpot, a game with a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability is set. That is. “15R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, which will be described later, is set. “2R probability variation jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of two rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability is set.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third symbol (the first symbol) in synchronism with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 with a winning (starting award) to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8 inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, so that one of the third symbols is displayed in the left display area Dm1. The three symbol sequences of left, middle and right showing the first special symbol are displayed (see FIG. 5A). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( Dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, the second special symbol which is one of the third symbols is also displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5B is a diagram exemplifying before and after rearrangement of the reserved symbol display on the actual display screen.

  The third symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is composed of 10 kinds of special symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the end.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in the upper display area Dm. And a display area for displaying a holding symbol (the number of the first lottery game and the second lottery game on hold) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is configured so as to be divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2. Mainly, in the left display area Dm1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a is variably displayed. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b is variably displayed.

  In the left display area Dm1, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity, and the variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row L1, the main symbol numbers are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3, the main symbol numbers appear in ascending order. On the other hand, the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol, and the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed, and the variable display is similarly performed.

  Further, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. If the third symbol is stopped with a combination of jackpot symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm, and is further equally divided into eight small area reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the left-right direction.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), a total of three special symbols (third symbol) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, respectively in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. The

  In the present embodiment, winnings to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b are each suspended up to four times. If a game ball wins at the first start opening 63a while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the reserved symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) in the lower display area Ds. ) In the display area in which no reserved symbol is displayed, “○”, which is the reserved symbol of the first lottery game, is displayed in the lowest-numbered reserved symbol display area (the reserved symbol display area on the left side). .

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start opening 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as in the case where the first start opening 63a wins, the reserved symbol “●” below the second lottery game is displayed. It is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) in the side display area Ds.

  Returning to FIG. When a game ball enters the sorting apparatus 1000, the game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b in order (that is, alternately). Whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed when the first start symbol 63a is won in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped and there is no hold in the first lottery game. Regardless, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the left display area Dm1, and then stopped. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the second start opening 63b, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is in a variable display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2 at the same time. Therefore, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed by distributing the game balls to be alternately awarded to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution device 1000. it can. In the first lottery game and the second lottery game, a lottery is executed as to whether or not the jackpot game is executed, so that the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game is executed only in the first lottery game. It is possible to increase the number of times and increase the chance that the player can win a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding lottery games are supported. Of course, it is also possible to provide each start port and to simultaneously display each lottery result in a variable manner.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery due to the first start port switch and the second start port switch being turned on, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won.

  A horizontally-long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery regarding the first lottery game or the second lottery game jackpot in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is set so that after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop pattern is obtained. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the corresponding display area (the left display area Dm1 or the right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display apparatus 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. . Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 65 is determined according to the determined jackpot type. For example, if it is a 15R normal jackpot, it can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, when the variable winning device 65 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is winning based on winning in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, An opening / closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have won). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. . The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (not shown) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. Counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, hour / hour counter 203k, probability variation flag 203m, First jackpot flag 203o, second jackpot flag 203p, first variation stop flag 203q, second variation stop flag 203r, first variation time storage area 203s, second variation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. Having at least a memory area 203v .

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning at the first start port 63a up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). is there. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that game balls have won the second start opening 63b up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops variably displaying, the first special symbol is stored. When various counter values are stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. .

  The first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d are used for counters when a start winning is detected. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 63a during the timer interruption process, the MPU 201 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, and the first reserved ball storage area 203a. Are stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second start opening 63b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer, as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and corresponding to each. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, in order to execute processing such as jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Of the data corresponding to each start prize stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize. The data is shifted to the special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start port 63a or the second detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning at the start port 63b, the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81) performed in the first symbol display device 37 is up to four times each. It is a counter for counting. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres with a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4, respectively. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 63a. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is counted in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 63b. Is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by one. It is.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reservation ball execution area 203d, the MPU 201 The data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the first variation start process or the second variation start process, and a big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data. At the same time, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second change pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g has passed the normal symbol starting port 67 detected in the timer interruption process periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). Based on this, the number of reserved balls in the variable display effect (variable display effect performed in the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81 and the second symbol display device 88) performed on the first symbol display device 37 ( It is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 67. As an initial value, zero is set by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

  The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area for storing a normal hit random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the normal symbol start port 67. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed to the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning prize) in the timer interrupt process, the MPU 201 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 from the counter buffer, It is stored in the normal random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h. The normal symbol flag 203j is turned on and stored (stored) in the normal symbol flag storage area 203h2. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas so that data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (held) up to four times. Yes. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, the data of the reserved balls are stored in order from the reserved area in the order of digestion in the reserved areas in which the data is vacant in the order of passing (start winning prize) to the normal symbol starting port 67. Is done.

  Further, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery or the first symbol This is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in the process of setting the display (variation pattern) of the symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the normal symbol variation display effect, the MPU 201 executes processes such as winning lottery and setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the normal random number counter C4) stored in the above-described normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, the data corresponding to one starting winning is used as the normal symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area 203i. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal random number counter C4 is stored and being held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is in a variable display. When the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. In addition, when the value of the normal hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number in which the reserved number is reduced and one reserved number is reduced), the value of the reserved area before the shift is changed. The normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal symbol flag 203j of the reserved area that has been shifted and stored is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop process, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is a counter area in which the hour / hour number 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the time reduction count is set, the normal symbol random table for high probability is set in the normal symbol random table 202c until the time reduction count is set to zero. In addition, when the symbol “◯” indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 have a longer opening time than in the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a time-saving gaming state.

  The hour / hour counter 203k is decremented by 1 every time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing display. When the value of the hour / hour counter 203k becomes 0, the normal symbol is changed from the hour / short gaming state. When the random number table for the normal symbol for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol “◯” indicating the normal symbol hit is displayed on the second symbol display unit 88, the release time is 0.2 s. By setting the number of times of opening once, the blades 64a and 64b of the ordinary electric accessory 64 are opened.

  The probability variation flag 203m is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability gaming state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed, a flag that is set to ON based on the fact that the jackpot game has ended It is. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203m is set to ON and is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating the big hit (all types), it is set to OFF, and after the big hit game, depending on the big hit type, If it is 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot, it is set to ON.

  The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the first start port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a win based on winning the second start port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to off.

  The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a win while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process, the first special symbol variation display is set to OFF when the temporary display is performed.

  The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a win while the second special symbol is variably displayed. In a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop process, it is set to OFF when the temporary display process of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area where the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variation time storage area 203s counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the first special symbol starts to be varied, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area where the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variation time storage area 203t counts the variation time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variation time (2 ms for one interrupt).

  In the present embodiment, the first variation time storage area 203s and the second variation time storage area 203t measure the variation time by counting the number of interrupts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and obtains time measurement data from the RTC at the time of the variation start. The configuration may also be such that timekeeping data is acquired and the fluctuation time is measured at any time thereafter. In addition, it is naturally possible to have a configuration in which the variation time for variation display is stored in advance and the value is subtracted as needed.

  The rearrangement hold storage area 203u is stored in each of the hold areas 1 to 4 stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch process or the second prefetch process. This is a storage area in which each determination result determined based on data is stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display portion 88, and the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange the displayed reserved symbol display in the order of the variable display start.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, winning at the winning opening becomes an important factor for determining the gaming state, so it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration and prevent intentional winning at the winning opening. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or a situation of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first variation start flag 223c1, a second variation start flag 223c2, 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, second stop type selection flag 223d2, slave first variation stop flag 223e, slave second variation stop flag 223f, slave first variation restart flag 223g, slave second variation restart flag 223h, slave first A variable time storage area 223i, a secondary second variable time storage area 223j, a secondary rearranged storage area 223k, and another memory area 223m are provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is analyzed by the command determination process. Then, processing according to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  Similarly to the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is the second special symbol held by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that displays symbols in a variable display (dynamic display), and counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standby times) of a variable display effect held in the main control device 110.

  The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a second fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is done. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The sub first variation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. When a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110, it is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first change restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the change display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main control device 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process for resuming the variable display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, the setting is turned off.

  The second change restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the change display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON. On the other hand, when the process of resuming the variable display of the second special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF.

  The sub first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the fluctuation time of the actual fluctuation display is stored.

  The second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area that is stored with a value synchronized with the second variation time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms, and the actual change time of the variable display is stored.

  In the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k, data similar to the rearrangement storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is received from the main control device 110 based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control is performed. This is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output to the device 113.

  The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Accordingly, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u as backup data in the backup area of the RAM 203. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed up data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is read from the backup area, and each corresponding hold area in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u is changing. Stored in the data storage area.

  In the start-up process, as in the winning command generated in the first look-ahead update process, all winning commands are generated based on the rearrangement hold storage area 203u from which the backed-up data is read and stored. By outputting to the lamp controller 113, data synchronized with the same rearrangement storage area 203u is also set in the secondary rearrangement storage area 223k.

  In addition, in the start-up process, a configuration in which data in the rearrangement hold storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k is synchronized even when returning from a power failure by transmitting a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores each data of the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k as backup data in the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Anyway, of course.

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is activated when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is pressed when the power is turned on (while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is turned on). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processes such as detection of special symbols and normal symbols, and various lotteries such as selection of winning patterns and variation patterns. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, a lottery for determining whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is controlled as in the present embodiment. By performing the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box (box) made of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member, which is called a board box. The substrate box is caulked by an anti-fraud member called “sealing member” so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated. Generally, when a base member and a lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through-hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method in which an opening mark remains such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

  Next, a detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b).

  FIG. 7A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 1000, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 1000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the sorting apparatus 1000 is disposed on the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8) and the front side of the substrate member 1100 (the front side in FIG. 7). A front member 1200 (see FIGS. 9 to 12) and a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 1100 and the front member 1200 (internal space). Then, the game balls that have entered the ball are alternately distributed to two positions (first start port 63a and second start port 63b in the present embodiment) of the first position and the second position (see FIG. 4).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 1100, the front member 1200, and the disk member 1300 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 8A is a front view of the substrate member 1100, FIG. 8B is a side view of the substrate member 1100 in the direction of arrow VIIIb in FIG. 8A, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the board | substrate member 1100 in the arrow VIIIc direction view of Fig.8 (a). In FIG. 8A, the front member 1200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 1200 with respect to the substrate member 1100.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the board member 1100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 1100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four positions in the central portion of the substrate member 1100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A), and the front side of the board member 1100 (FIG. 8A front side of the paper). ) And the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed.

  Two guide paths (a left guide path 1110L and a right guide path 1110R) are disposed below the center of the substrate member 1100. The left guide passage 1110L and the right guide passage 1110R receive the game balls discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the disc member 1300, and receive the received game balls in the first start port. 63a and a passage for guiding to the second starting port 63b (see FIG. 4), and openings (left opening 1111L and right opening 1111R) serving as entrances for game balls are formed to open upward on one end side. The opening serving as the outlet of the game ball is formed in a state where it is communicated with the left communication hole 1120L and the right communication hole 1120R on the other end side.

  The left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 8C) of the board member 1100 with respect to the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R. That is, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are juxtaposed along the front-rear direction of the board member 1100 (the vertical direction in FIG. 8A), whereby the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100. In the state, the left opening 1111L and the right opening 1111R are respectively communicated with the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 is inserted into the left opening 1111L of the left guide passage 1110L via the left exit port 1222L of the front member 1200 and the disc member 1300. The game balls discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R are respectively introduced into the right opening 1111R of the right guide passage 1110R through the right discharge port 1222R of the front member 1200 (see FIGS. 14 to 18).

  A first start port 63a is connected to the left communication hole 1120L of the board member 1100, and a second start port 63b is connected to the right communication hole 1120R (see FIG. 4). Therefore, the left guide passage 1110L guides the game ball introduced from the left opening 1111L to the left communication hole 1120L and causes the first start port 63a to win. On the other hand, the right guide passage 1110R guides the game ball introduced from the right opening 1111R to the right communication hole 1120R and wins the second start port 63b.

  Next, the entire configuration of the front member 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9A is a front view of the front member 1200, FIG. 9B is a side view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IXb in FIG. 9A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the front member 1200 in the IXc-IXc line | wire of Fig.9 (a). FIG. 10A is a rear view of the front member 1200, and FIG. 10B is a top view of the front member 1200 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Xb in FIG. 10A.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the front member 1200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and a cylindrical facing wall member 1220 disposed on the back side (front side in FIG. 10) of the front plate 1210. And a shaft member 1230 disposed concentrically on the inner peripheral side of the facing wall member 1220, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The facing wall member 1220 is a portion in which a disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13) is rotatably mounted, and the inner diameter dimension thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the disk member 1300. Set to

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed such that the opening on one end side in the axial direction (right side in FIG. 9C) is closed by the front plate member 1210 and the opening on the other end side in the axial direction (left side in FIG. 9C) is opened. Is done. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 1100 (see FIGS. 7 and 8). That is, the assembling of the sorting device 1000 is performed by inserting the disc member 1300 from the open side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 1200 and fastening and fixing the substrate member 1100 to thereby attach the disc member 1300 to the sorting device 1000. The interior can be rotated and cannot be removed. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The facing wall member 1220 is formed with a ball inlet 1221, a left ball outlet 1222 </ b> L and a right ball outlet 1222 </ b> R, a left groove 1223 </ b> L and a right groove 1223 </ b> R, a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225.

  The entrance 1221 is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and is formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the uppermost portion of the facing wall member 1220. In addition, the entrance 1221 is the center of the facing wall member 1220 in the axial direction (FIG. 9C, left and right) (that is, both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13) of the rotating member 1300). A game ball that is disposed at a position where the movement trajectory overlaps and is entered can be received (guided) by either the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R are for introducing the game balls conveyed by the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 into the left guiding passage 1110L and the right guiding passage 1110R of the board member 1100. And is drilled along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10) at a position that is the lowermost portion of the facing wall member 1220 (that is, a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance 1221).

  The left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are spaced apart from each other in the axial direction of the facing wall member 1220 (FIG. 9 (c) left and right direction), and the left receiving portion 1310L when the disk member 1300 is rotated and They are arranged on the movement trajectory on the exit side (the inclined side surface 1312 side, see FIG. 13) of the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The left groove 1223 </ b> L and the right groove 1223 </ b> R are concave grooves having an arcuate cross section that are recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and extend along the circumferential direction of the facing wall member 1220. When the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is conveyed toward the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R as the disc member 1300 rotates, one of the game balls The portion can be received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (see, for example, FIG. 15).

  The curvature radii of the inner peripheral surfaces of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R (the arc shape in the cross section perpendicular to the extending direction) are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the curvature radius of the game ball. Therefore, when the disc member 1300 is rotated in a state where the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R, the game ball rolls or slides on the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R.

  The guide inclined portion 1224 is a concave portion whose upper surface side is opened and the ball entrance 1221 is opened on the bottom surface, and the inner wall of the concave portion is formed as four inclined surfaces inclined downward toward the ball entrance 1221. (See FIG. 10B). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down into the guide inclined portion 1224 can be guided to the entrance port 1221 and surely entered.

  Since the inner wall of the guide inclined portion 1224 is made higher (larger) than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball can be held inside (in the recess space). In other words, when a game ball cannot be introduced from the entrance hole 1221 to the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion is rotated along with the rotation of the disc member 1300. The game ball can be held inside the guide inclined portion 1224 until the portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221. When the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is disposed immediately below the entrance 1221 along with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the held game ball is passed through the entrance 1221. It can be promptly introduced into the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The tightened hole 1225 is a screw hole opened on the end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 10) of the facing wall member 1220, and is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 1100b (see FIG. 8) of the substrate member 1100. In other words, the front member 1200 is fastened and fixed to the board member 1100 by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 1100 b from the back side of the board member 1100 into the fastening hole 1225 of the facing wall member 1220.

  A facing side magnet 1226 is embedded in the outer peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. The facing magnet 1226 is a magnet for applying a magnetic force (attracting force) to the game ball conveyed toward the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R, and extends in the extending direction of the left groove 1223L and the right groove 1223R. A plurality (three in the present embodiment) are arranged along the line.

  On the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, a shaft portion 1230 is erected vertically from the back surface of the front plate member 1210. The shaft portion 1230 is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and is used as a shaft that pivotally supports the disk member 1300 (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a detailed configuration of the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R, the left groove 1223L, and the right groove 1223R of the front member 1200 will be described.

  11 is a cross-sectional view of the facing wall member 1220 along the line XI-XI in FIG. 9C, and FIG. 12 is a plan view of the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. FIG.

  Since the left outlet 1222L has the same configuration as the right outlet 1222R and the left groove 1223L has the same structure as the right groove 1223R, only the right outlet 1222R and the right groove 1223R will be described here, and the left outlet 1222L. The description of the left groove 1223L is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the right vent hole 1222R is a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 11) to the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 11) of the facing wall member 1220. Formed as. In other words, the right ball outlet 1222R is a hole that extends in an inclined direction toward the rotation direction of the disc member 1300 (the direction away from the right groove 1223R in FIG. 11). It is formed. Therefore, as will be described later, the game ball discharged from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disk member 1300 smoothly enters the right discharge port 1222R of the facing wall member 1220, and without entering the game ball. It can be made to pass to an exit (refer FIG.16 (b)).

  The right discharge port 1222R is an opening edge on the inner peripheral surface side of the facing wall member 1220, and the position of the opening edge on the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R (left side in FIG. 11) is the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R. Rather than the center of the facing wall member 1220 (ie, the side closer to the disk member 1300, the upper side in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball reaches the right drainage port 1222R (see FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) while accepting (inserting) a part thereof in the right groove 1223R, the outer peripheral surface of the game ball is It can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the right outlet port 1222R (the side facing the terminal end of the right groove 1223R, the left side in FIG. 11) (see FIG. 16B). As a result, as will be described later, the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped.

  The right groove 1223R has a terminal end (lower end in FIG. 12) connected to the right ball outlet 1222R, and a starting end (upper end in FIG. 12) is not connected to the ball inlet 1221. That is, the start end (upper end in FIG. 12) of the right groove 1223R is located at a position advanced by about 80 degrees from the entrance 1221. In the phase range of about 80 degrees from the entrance hole 1221, the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310 R is not substantially in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (FIGS. 14B and 15A). This is because the recess in the right groove 1223R is wasted. Thereby, the strength reduction of the facing wall member 1220 due to unnecessary recesses can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved. On the other hand, by making the starting end of the right groove 1223R a little (about 10 degrees) ahead of the position where the phase is advanced 90 degrees from the entrance 1221R, the game ball is surely introduced into the right groove 1223R. In addition, the effect of the right groove 1223R (the rolling resistance or the sliding resistance acting on the game ball) can be maximized.

  In the right groove 1223R, the recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 is increased (deeper) toward the right ball outlet 1222R. In this case, as described above, in the right groove 1223R, the radius of curvature of the inner peripheral surface is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball.

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls or slides in the right groove 1223R with the rotation of the disc member 1300, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance that acts on the game ball from the right groove 1223R is transferred to the right ball outlet 1222R. The closer it is, the larger it can be. In addition, the amount that the game ball can be received in the right groove 1223R (the amount that fits in) can be gradually increased as it approaches the right discharge hole 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right ball outlet 1222R, and the inertial force in the direction of entering the right ball outlet 1222R can be increased. Can be held in a game ball.

  On the bottom surface side of the right groove 1223R, facing magnets 1226 are arranged in a line along the extending direction of the right groove 1223R. That is, the facing-side magnet 1226 is disposed at a position corresponding to a movement trajectory in which the game ball moves as the disc member 1300 rotates. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed on the side closer to the right exit port 1222R (lower side in FIG. 12) than the entrance port 1221 of the facing wall member 1220. In the present embodiment, it is disposed within a range in which the phase is retracted by 15 degrees from the opening edge (right side in FIG. 11) of the right discharge port 1222R (the central angle is 15 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 11).

  Therefore, when the game ball passes through the right groove 1223, the magnetic force of the facing-side magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. Can act. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation speed of the disk member 1300 can be easily reduced, and the game ball can be reliably discharged to the right discharge port 1222R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is used as a target on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 acts, so that it is not necessary to dispose a magnet on the disc member 1300. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced. However, a magnet may be provided on the disc member 1300 in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the facing magnet 1226.

  A plurality (three in the present embodiment) of facing magnets 1226 are disposed, and the more the facing magnets 1226 that are closer to the right discharge port 1222R, the more the game ball (that is, the bottom surface of the right groove 1223R). ) Is separated from the facing wall member 1220 in the radial direction. Therefore, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 can be increased as the game ball approaches the right exit port 1222R. Therefore, as will be described later, the effect of applying a magnetic force from the facing magnet 1226 to the game ball can be gradually increased, so that the rotational speed of the disk member 1300 can be smoothly reduced.

  Next, the disk member 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a top view of the disk member 1300, and FIG. 13B is a front view of the disk member 1300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb in FIG. 13A. These are the bottom views of the disc member 1300 in the arrow XIIIc direction view of FIG.13 (b). In FIG. 13B, the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R are schematically illustrated by broken lines, while the push plate 1320 is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the disk member 1300 is a member for transporting a game ball entered from the entrance 1221 of the facing wall member 1220 to the left exit 1222L or the right exit 1222R (FIG. 9). To FIG. 12), and is formed in a circular disk shape having a predetermined thickness (FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 13 (c) vertical dimension) as viewed in the axial direction.

  In the following, the surface on one end side in the axial direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13B, the front side on the paper surface) is referred to as a front surface F, and the surface opposite to the front surface F is referred to as a back surface B. In the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 has a front surface F facing the front plate member 1210 (see FIG. 9C) of the front member 1200 and a back surface B facing the substrate member 1100 (see FIG. 8). Thus, it is installed between the board member 1100 and the front member 1200.

  The disc member 1300 includes a left receiving portion 1310L and a right receiving portion 1310R that are recessed in the outer peripheral surface thereof, a push plate 1320 that is installed in the opening portions of the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, and a front member. And a one-way clutch 1330 serving as a bearing portion supported by a shaft portion 1230 of 1200 (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R receive the game balls that have entered the entrance 1221, store the received game balls, and discharge them to the left exit 1222L and the right exit 1222R, respectively. The concave portions are rectangular in front view, and are arranged 180 degrees out of phase with each other.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R include an inclined bottom surface 1311 and an inclined side surface 1312 that continues to the inclined bottom surface 1311. The inclined bottom surface 1311 is a flat surface that forms the bottom surface of the recess, and a game ball is dropped from the entrance 1221 to one end side (the opposite side to the inclined side surface 1312) of the inclined bottom surface 1311.

  The inclined bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward toward the front side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300. That is, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, the recessed depth from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is deeper toward the inclined side surface 1312 side (the distance from the axis of the disk member 1300 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 is It is shortened toward the inclined side surface 1312 side). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the entrance 1221 to the inclined bottom surface 1311 rolls on the inclined bottom surface 1311 toward the inclined side surface 1312 (see FIG. 14). As a result, as will be described later, the position of the center of gravity of the disc member 1300 as a whole is decentered from the axis by the weight of the game ball, and the disc member 1300 is rotated (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

  The inclined side surface 1312 is a flat surface that forms the side surface of the recess, and the game ball stored in the recess is rolled on the inclined side surface 1312 toward the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R (FIG. 15A). reference). The inclined side surface 1312 has an angle of 90 degrees or more with the inclined bottom surface 1311 and is erected from the other end side (the front side in the rotational direction of the disk member 1300) that becomes the descending inclined end of the inclined bottom surface 1311. The

  Here, in the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is the thickness direction of the disk member 1300 (FIG. 13A and FIG. 13 (c) direction) while the left receiving portion 1310L is located in the center, the inclined side surface 1312 is positioned on the front surface F side of the disk member 1300, and the right receiving portion 1310R has the inclined side surface 1312 on the back surface of the disk member 1300. Located on the B side.

  That is, one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1311 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) enters the ball when the disk member 1300 is rotated in both the left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R. It is formed so as to be able to pass through a position (facing position) corresponding to the mouth 1221. Therefore, the game ball dropped from the entrance 1221 can be received and stored in the recess.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member 1300 is rotated, the inclined side surface 1312 of the left receiving portion 1310L has a position corresponding to the left groove 1223L and the left outlet port 1222L (facing position), and the inclined side surface of the right receiving portion 1310R. Reference numeral 1312 is formed so as to be able to pass through positions (facing positions) corresponding to the right groove 1223R and the right ball outlet 1222R when the rotating member 1300 is rotated. Therefore, the stored game balls can be discharged to the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R.

  The left receiving portion 1310L and the right receiving portion 1310R have a recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (a rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312). The dimension is a depth dimension that is at least larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, in the initial stage of receiving a game ball from the entrance 1221, the rotation of the disc member 1300 is suppressed by preventing the game ball bounced off the inclined bottom surface 1311 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220. Can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the dimension of the recessed depth on one end side of the inclined bottom surface 1211 (the rising inclined end opposite to the inclined side surface 1312) is a depth dimension smaller than 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when two or more game balls are successively entered from the entrance 1221, the second and subsequent game balls are inserted into the entrance 1221 (guide slope) in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotating member 1300. Part 1224).

  The pushing plate 1320 is a plate-like member that pushes the game ball against the left groove 1223L or the right groove 1223R and pushes it into the left outlet 1222L or the right outlet 1222R (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The disk member 1300 is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw. In addition, a storage groove deeper than the thickness dimension of the pressing plate 1320 is recessed in the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed in the storage groove. Therefore, the push plate 1320 and the head of the fastening screw are not projected from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300.

  Here, since the pushing plate 1320 repeatedly receives a large reaction force when pushing the game ball into the ball outlet, the fastening screw may be broken. In this case, since the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, the reaction force received when the pushing plate 1320 pushes the game ball into the ball outlet is applied to the side surface of the housing groove (the pushing plate on the side surface of the housing groove). 1320 can be supported), and the load applied to the fastening screw can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, breakage of the fastening screw can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the pressing plate 1320 is fastened and fixed to the disc member 1300 with a fastening screw. However, the fastening with the fastening screw may be omitted. That is, the pushing plate 1320 is housed in the housing groove, and the opening of the housing groove is closed by the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, so that the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 and the facing wall member 1220 If the gap between the inner peripheral surface is set to be smaller than the thickness of the pushing plate 1320, the pushing plate 1320 can be arranged so that the game ball can be pushed in and cannot fall off. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the assembly process can be simplified by the amount that the fastening screw can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost.

  The one-way clutch 1330 is a part for regulating the rotation direction of the disk member 1300, and when viewed from the front (front F view) of the disk member 1300 shown in FIG. While turning in the right direction is allowed, turning in the opposite direction (FIG. 13B counterclockwise (left rotation)) is restricted.

  That is, the disk member 1300 rotates in the direction in which the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving part 1310L and the right receiving part 1310R is inclined downward (that is, in the direction in which the disk member 1300 should rotate depending on the weight of the game ball). Rotation) is allowed, and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  Here, for example, immediately after the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (before the rolling of the game ball falling on the inclined bottom surface 1311 is started, FIG. When a vibration is input to the sorting apparatus 1000 due to a disturbance such as a player hitting the glass unit 16 in a)), the disc member 1300 is opposite to the direction in which the disk member 1300 should originally rotate. There is a risk of turning in the direction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch 1330, even if it is affected by disturbances such as vibrations, it is in a direction opposite to the direction in which it should originally rotate. It is possible to avoid the rotation of the disk member 1300.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14 to FIG. 18, the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 1000 will be described. 14, FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are schematic partial sectional views of the sorting apparatus 1000 illustrating the transition of the operation of discharging the game ball received by the left receiving portion 1310L from the left outlet 1222L. These are the partial cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the distribution apparatus 1000 which illustrate the transition of the operation | movement which drains the game ball received by the right receiving part 1310R from the right discharge port 1222R.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), when a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the game ball is received by the left receiving portion 1310L, The sphere falls from the entrance 1221 to one end side (left side in FIG. 14A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) is directed downward toward the other end side (inclined side surface 1312 side) by the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 14B). Thus, since the bottom surface 1311 is inclined downward and the game ball rolls along the downward inclination direction, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the entire disc member 1300 including the game ball can be increased accordingly. it can. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly.

  In addition, for example, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may not be started while the game ball is rolling toward the inclined side surface 1312 due to resistance such as biting of a foreign object. In addition, the game ball rolling on the bottom surface 1311 can be made to collide with the inclined side surface 1312, and an impact force can be applied to the disc member 1300 by the collision of the game ball with the inclined side surface 1312. Therefore, it is possible to provide a trigger (for example, removal of foreign matter by impact force) for the disk member 1300 to start the rotation operation. In particular, since the direction in which the impact force acts coincides with the direction in which the disc member 1300 should originally rotate, it is possible to effectively provide a trigger for the disc member 1300 to start the rotation operation.

  Here, the game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221 in an unstable state (for example, a falling state where the falling direction is not constant and the side wall repeatedly collides), and the entrance For example, when the game ball collides with the pushing plate 1320 and then collides with the side surface opposite to the inclined side surface 1312 (the left side surface in FIG. 14A), the impact force at the time of the collision causes the left Depending on the weight of the game ball stored in the receiving portion 1310L, the rotation of the disk member 1300 may start in a direction opposite to the original direction to be rotated (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disk member 1300 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 1230 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) via the one-way clutch 1330, so that the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L is inclined downward. Only the rotation in the direction (that is, the original direction to be rotated depending on the weight of the game ball) is allowed, and the rotation in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 14A) can be restricted. it can.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the inclined side surface 1312 has an inclination (ascending inclination) that rises with increasing distance from the bottom surface 1311. When the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started, the disk As the member 1300 rotates, the tilt angle of the rising slope is gradually reduced, and after reaching the horizontal level, the slope is lowered (falling slope) as it moves away from the bottom surface 1311. Therefore, the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination toward the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220).

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the game ball reaches the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by rolling on the inclined side surface 1312 along the descending inclination. In this case, the left groove 1223L provided in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 extends along the movement locus of the left receiving portion 1310L (inclined side surface 1312), so that the disk member 1300 rotates. In this case, a state where a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310 is received in the left groove 1223L can be formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), 15 (b) and 16 (a), when the rotation of the disk member 1300 is further advanced, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the inclined side surface 1312 is further increased. Thus, the game ball is moved toward the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 by its own weight and the centrifugal force that acts in accordance with the rotation of the disk member 1300. As a result, the disc member 1300 is rotated while maintaining a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L.

  Thus, when the disc member 1300 rotates, the disc member 1300 can be connected to the facing wall member 1220 (left groove 1223L) via the game ball. Therefore, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300 using the resistance when the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L. As a result, the disk member 1300 moves in the rotation direction. It can suppress having an excessive inertia force (rotation speed). Therefore, after that, when the game ball is discharged to the left outlet 1222L (see FIG. 16B), the ball can be reliably discharged.

  A push plate 1320 is installed in the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L. The push plate 1320 rotates the disc member 1300 in a state where a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223. In this case, the disc member 1300 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball behind the game ball. Therefore, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball can be transmitted to the disk member 1300 via the pushing plate 1320, and as a result, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member 1300.

  As described above, if a state in which a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, a state protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L) can be formed (the protruding amount) ), The game ball is brought close to the left ball exit 1222L, and can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. Therefore, the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). It can be done reliably.

  Since the recess depth of the left groove 1223L increases (deeply) toward the left outlet 1222L, the resistance of the game ball due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is reduced. As it approaches the left vent hole 1222L (that is, the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds), it can be gradually increased. Therefore, the inertia force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In addition, since the amount of a part of the game ball stored in the left receiving portion 1310L can be gradually increased in the left groove 1223L (that is, the amount by which the game ball protrudes from the left receiving portion 1310L), the disc member 1300 can be increased. With this rotation, the game ball can be moved outward in the radial direction (that is, the direction accepted by the left groove 1223L). Due to this outward movement in the radial direction, the game ball can have an inertial force in the direction of entering the left ball exit 1222L, so that the game ball can easily enter the left ball exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the mouth 1222L (see FIG. 16B).

  Here, the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L after the disc member 1300 is rotated by a predetermined angle (see FIGS. 12 and 15A). As a result, the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) and the disk member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14) is the circle. Where there is no momentum in the rotation of the plate member 1300, resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L is not generated, and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is started and advanced smoothly and quickly. be able to. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 proceeds (the middle stage shown in FIG. 15A and the latter stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B), the inertial force of the disk member 1300 is obtained. As the momentum gradually increases and the momentum increases, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 can be efficiently suppressed by utilizing the resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the game ball and the left groove 1223L.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16A, a facing magnet 1226 is disposed near the end of the left groove 1223L. The facing magnet 1226 is disposed along the extending direction of the left groove 1223L (that is, the movement trajectory in which the game ball accommodated in the left receiving portion 1222L moves as the disc member 1300 rotates). When the game ball rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L as the disc member 1300 rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 (the force that attracts the game ball) can be applied to the game ball. As a result, the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can act as a rotational resistance (braking force) on the disc member 1300 via the game ball, and the disc member 1300 can be decelerated. As a result, it is ensured that the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the game ball is thrown into the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B). Can be done.

  Further, by providing the facing magnet 1226 in the vicinity of the terminal end of the left groove 1223L in this way, it is possible to effectively brake the disk member 1300 using magnetic force (apply rotation resistance). That is, as described above, in the initial stage in which the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 and the disc member 1300 starts to rotate (see FIG. 14), the rotation has momentum. However, at that stage, no magnetic force (a force that attracts the game ball) is generated, and the rotating operation of the disc member 1300 can be started and advanced smoothly and quickly. On the other hand, the inertial force of the disk member 1300 increases to the maximum at the stage where the rotation of the disk member 1300 progresses (particularly, the later stage shown in FIGS. 15B to 16B). When the momentum increases, the inertial force (rotation speed) in the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be effectively suppressed by using magnetic force (force to attract the game ball).

  In this case, since the plurality of facing-side magnets 1226 are arranged along the left groove 1223L (that is, along the circumferential direction of the disk member 1300), when the disk member 1300 rotates, The rotation resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member 1300 by using the magnetic forces of the plurality of facing magnets 1226, respectively. That is, when a turning resistance is suddenly applied to the disc member 1300, the disc member 1300 is suddenly braked, and the turning operation of the disc member 1300 becomes unstable. The reception by the unit 1310R (see FIG. 17A) and the ball discharge of the game ball to the left ball exit 1222L (see FIG. 16B) are inhibited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member 1300 as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated and the rotation operation of the disk member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R and to discharge the game ball to the left exit 1222L.

  Further, the closer the plurality of facing magnets 1226 are to the left ball exit port 1222L, the smaller the distance from the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L to the outer side in the radial direction of the disk member 1300, that is, the left ball exit port 1222L. Since the closer to the left, the closer to the game ball that rolls or slides in the left groove 1223L, the effect of the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball) by the facing magnet 1226 is applied to the left ball exit 1222L. The closer it is, the larger it can be. That is, the rotational resistance applied to the disk member 1300 can be gradually increased, and the disk member 1300 can be smoothly decelerated without sudden braking. Therefore, similarly to the above-described case, the rotation operation of the disc member 1300 can be stabilized. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received by the right receiving portion 1310R and the left exit 1222L. The game ball can be reliably discharged to the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the left receiving part 1310L of the disc member 1300 reaches the left ball outlet 1222L of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball stored in the left receiving part 1310L By entering the mouth 1222L and passing through the left ball outlet 1222L, the ball is discharged to the left guide passage 1110L (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the pushing plate 1320 provided on the opening portion of the left receiving portion 1310L is formed so as to be able to contact the game ball from the rear in the rotational direction of the disc member 1300. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged to the left ball outlet 1222L, the pushing plate 1320 contacts the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disc member 1300, thereby pushing the game ball into the left ball outlet 1222L ( Push in).

  In this case, the position of the opening edge on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is closer to the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 than the bottom surface of the left groove 1223L. Arranged. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a part of the game ball is received in the left groove 1223L (that is, protruding from the left receiving portion 1310L), while the left receiving portion 1310L is left When reaching the ball outlet 1222L, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L (the side facing the terminal end of the left groove 1223L, the left side in FIG. 16B). Thereby, not only can the game ball be reliably discharged to the left discharge port 1222L, but also the rotation of the disk member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 by the right receiving portion 1310R.

  The recessed depth from the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 of the left groove 1223L is the maximum depth dimension at the end communicating with the left outlet 1222L, but in the present embodiment, this maximum depth The depth dimension is approximately ¼ of the diameter of the game ball. The maximum recess depth is preferably ¼ or more of the diameter of the game ball, and more preferably ３ or more. This is because the game ball can be reliably brought into contact with the opening edge of the left outlet 1222L and can be prevented from being bounced back into the left receiving portion 1310L.

  Further, the left vent hole 1222L is formed as a tapered hole whose diameter increases from the inner peripheral surface side (upper side in FIG. 16B) of the facing wall member 1220 toward the outer peripheral surface side (lower side in FIG. 16B). Is done. That is, in the left vent hole 1222L, the inner peripheral surface on the side facing the end of the left groove 1223L (the left side in FIG. 16B) is inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member 1300 in the rotational direction. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L of the disc member 1300 can smoothly enter the left ball discharge port 1222L, and the exit (see FIG. ).

  Note that the left vent hole 122L is disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 (the opening of the left receiving portion 1310L) and is disposed at the lowermost portion in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the left receiving portion 1310L to the left discharge port 1222L, the ball can be discharged using the centrifugal force associated with the rotation of the disk member 1300, and the game ball is moved downward (gravity to the game ball). In the direction of the action). That is, when a ball is thrown, the game ball's own weight (gravity) acts in a direction that causes the game ball to enter the left ball outlet 1222L, so that it is difficult to bite the game ball and the ball can be discharged reliably. .

  Here, the facing wall member 1220 is disposed at a position where the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R are 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the inlet 1221 (see FIGS. 9 to 12), Since the plate member 1300 is disposed at a position where the right receiving portion 1310R is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 13), the left receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 is received. The timing received by one of the portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R can be matched with the timing at which the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R discharges the game ball to the left ball outlet 1222L or the right ball outlet 1222R.

  That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, in a state where the left receiving portion 1310L is positioned in the same phase as the left exit port 1222L, as shown in FIG. 17A, the right receiving portion 1310R is 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is discharged to the left exit port 1222L or the right exit port 1222R. The next game ball can be received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R at the time or after the ball is discharged, and the game ball received by one of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R is left exit port 1222L Alternatively, it is not necessary to receive the next game ball in the middle of carrying toward the right ball outlet 1222R (that is, in a state where the disk member 1300 is rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the left receiving portion 1310L or the right receiving portion 1310R.

  As described above, when the game ball is brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball outlet 1222L and the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped (see FIG. 16B), the disk member 1300 is stopped. The right receiving portion 1310R faces the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) (see FIG. 17A). Therefore, in this case, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance 1221, the right receiving portion 1310R receives the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left receiving portion 1310L receives a game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), the game ball is received from the entrance 1221 to the right. It is dropped to one end side (left side in FIG. 17A) of the bottom surface 1311 of the portion 1310R.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the game ball that has entered (dropped) faces the other end side (the inclined side surface 1312 side) on the bottom surface 1311 due to the downward inclination of the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R. Rolled.

  As a result, the weight of the game ball is added to the disk member 1300, and the position of the center of gravity of the entire disk member 1300 including the weight of the game ball is decentered with respect to the axial center. The game ball is rotated in the rolling direction (that is, the clockwise direction in FIG. 17B).

  Here, since the bottom surface 1311 of the left receiving portion 1310L and the bottom surface 1311 of the right receiving portion 1310R are inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member 1300, the left receiving portion 1310L has received the same inclination direction. A rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and a rotation direction when the disc member 1300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the right receiving portion 1310R. Can be in the same direction. That is, the rotation direction of the disk member 1300 can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where the disc member 1300 rotates alternately in one direction and the other direction according to the receiving portion (left receiving portion 1310L or right receiving portion 1310R) that receives the gaming ball, the gaming ball is positioned at two positions. The operation of distributing to (the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R) can be stably executed.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the operation after the game ball rolls on the inclined side surface 1312 along its descending inclination and reaches the inner peripheral surface (right groove 1223R) of the facing wall member 1220 ( The action / effect is the same as that when the left receiving portion 1310L receives the game ball (see FIGS. 14 to 16), and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the sorting apparatus 1000, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the left ball outlet 1222L and the right ball outlet 1222R. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, since the sorting apparatus 1000 has a structure using a disk member 1300 formed in a disk shape, a planar arrangement is possible. Therefore, the distribution device 1000 is disposed even in a region where the distance between the game board 13 (base plate 60) and the glass unit 16 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is relatively narrow. Can do.

  Next, a distribution device 2000 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the rotation of the disk member 1300 is stopped by the game ball being brought into contact with the opening edge of the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R (FIG. 16 ( b), the rotation of the disc member 1300 of the second embodiment is stopped by being braked by the braking member 2240. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19, the front member 2200 according to the second embodiment has recesses 2230 that are recessed spaces provided in two locations, and the brake member 2240 can operate in the recessed spaces of the respective storage portions 2230. Respectively. Here, with reference to FIG.20 and FIG.21, the detailed structure of the accommodating part 2230 and the braking member 2240 is demonstrated.

  20A is a cross-sectional view of the front member 2200, and FIG. 20B is a plan view of the front member 2200 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20A. As shown in FIG. 20, the storage portion 2230 includes an operation recess 2231 and a shaft support recess 2232 connected to the operation recess 2231.

  The operation recess 2231 is a recess for accommodating the protruding piece 2342 and the facing piece 2243 of the braking member 2240 so as to be operable (swingable), and the left groove 1223L and the left groove 1223L sandwiching the left outlet 1222L and the right outlet 1222R. Recessed at two locations on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on the opposite side of the right groove 1223R. The operation recess 2231 has one surface side (upper side in FIG. 20 (a)) opened to the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220, and one end side (right side in FIG. 20 (a)) is the left or right outlet port. It communicates with 1222R.

  The shaft support recess 2232 is a recess for housing (supporting) the shaft portion 2241 of the braking member 2240 so that the shaft portion 2241 can be operated (turned). It is recessed with a recess depth shallower than 2231. The shaft support recess 2232 is opened on the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 on one side (upper side in FIG. 20A).

  FIG. 21A is a side view of the braking member 2240, and FIG. 21B is a top view of the braking member 2240 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, the braking member 2240 includes a columnar shaft portion 2241, a protruding piece 2242 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241, and a direction opposite to the extending direction of the protruding piece 2242. A facing piece 2243 extending from the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 2241 and an elastic member 2244 disposed at the extending tip of the facing piece 2243 are formed integrally from a resin material.

  The shaft portion 2241 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the shaft-supporting concave portion 2232 of the storage portion 2230. The protruding piece 2242 is a portion that protrudes to the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R through the opening on one end side of the operation recess 2231. By the game ball passing through the left ball exit 1222L or the right ball exit 1222R Pushed down.

  The facing piece 2243 is a part whose front end is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and is pushed up toward the disk member 1300 around the shaft portion 2241 when the protruding piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball. It is done. The elastic member 2244 is made of a rubber-like elastic body, and is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 when the facing piece 2243 is pushed up.

  The protruding piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the side. The protruding direction of the projecting piece 2242 is a direction in which the protruding piece 2242 is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft portion 2241 (that is, in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, see FIG. 22A).

  The total length of the facing piece 2243 is larger (longer) than the total length of the protruding piece 2242, and the width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 21B) is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Is done. That is, the facing piece 2243 is heavier than the protruding piece 2242 even if the weight excluding the elastic member 2244 is used. Therefore, the barycentric position of the braking member 2240 is located closer to the facing piece 2243 than the shaft portion 2241.

  The facing piece 2243 is formed to be bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the side, and is easily elastically deformed in the direction of increasing the bending angle. In other words, as described above, the facing piece 2243 is spaced away from or in the direction of approaching the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 even when the width dimension is larger (wider) than the width dimension of the protruding piece 2242. Elastic deformation in the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 22B) is ensured.

  With reference to FIG. 22, the braking operation of the disk member 1300 by the braking member 2240 will be described. 22 is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 2000. FIG. 22A shows a state before the protruding piece 2242 of the braking member 2240 is pushed down by the game ball, and FIG. 22B shows the brake member by the game ball. The state after the projecting piece 2242 of 2240 is pushed down is shown respectively.

  The brake member 2240 disposed on the left ball outlet 1222L side and the storage portion 2230 that stores the brake member 2240, and the brake member 2240 disposed on the right ball outlet 1222R side and the housing that stores the brake member 2240. Since the parts 2230 have the same configuration, only the configuration on the right exit port 1222R side will be described here, and the description on the configuration on the left exit port 1222L side will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the braking member 2240, in the non-operating state (initial state), the protruding piece 2242 protrudes into the right outlet port 1222R, and the facing piece 2243 is the disc member 1300. It is arrange | positioned facing the outer peripheral surface of this.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the game ball drained from the right receiving portion 1310R of the disc member 1300 passes through the right drain port 1310R of the facing wall member 1220, the game ball causes the braking member 2240. The projecting piece 2242 is pushed down in the passing direction, and the braking member 2240 is rotated around the shaft portion 2241 to push up the facing piece 2243. Thereby, the extended tip of the pushed-up facing piece 2243 can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 via the elastic member 2244, and the disc member 1300 can be stopped. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) can be reliably received by the left receiving portion 1310L (see FIG. 14A).

  As described above, the braking member 2240 is operated using the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, and the operation of bringing the facing piece 2243 into contact with the disk member 1300 can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Power (actuator) and control for operation can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, even when the game ball passes through the right ball outlet 1222R, the state in which the facing piece 2243 (elastic member 2244) of the braking member 2240 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is maintained. Subsequent rotation of the member 1300 is hindered. Therefore, after the game ball has passed, it is necessary to quickly return the braking member 2240 to the non-operating state (initial state). On the other hand, if power is used for the return operation, as described above, the braking operation is mechanically performed, so that control and sensors are unnecessary, and the significance of reducing the product cost is lost.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gravity center position of the braking member 2240 is located on the facing piece 2243 side (left side in FIG. 22A) with respect to the shaft portion 2241 as described above. Therefore, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down and the facing piece 2243 is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when the braking member 2240 is rotated in one direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise) around the shaft portion 2241). ), The braking member 2240 is rotated in the other direction (FIG. 22 (b) counterclockwise) by utilizing its own weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft portion 2241). ) To the non-operating state (initial state) shown in FIG. Therefore, power for the return operation can be made unnecessary.

  Since the projecting piece 2242 is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 toward the extended distal end side (right side in FIG. 22 (a)), the projecting piece 2242 is discharged to the right discharge port 1222R. It is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball from being obstructed by the protruding piece 2242 and to smoothly push down the protruding piece 2242 by the passing game ball.

  The facing piece 2243 is provided with an elastic member 2244 at its extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), so that the frictional force with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300 is reduced. It is possible to ensure the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member 1300.

  In this manner, the use of the elastic member 2244 can reduce the product cost. That is, for example, a structure in which the disc member 1300 is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece 2243 to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300 is conceivable. In this embodiment, since it is not necessary to form uneven shapes on the disc member 1300 and the braking member 2240, the shape of the parts can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, the facing piece 2243 is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and an elastic member 2244 is disposed at the extending tip thereof, so that the facing piece 2243 is formed. When the extending tip (elastic member 2244) is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 130, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member 1300, the braking member 2240, and the like are caused by elastic deformation of the facing piece 2243 itself and It can be absorbed by elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244.

  Similarly, when the projecting piece 2242 is pushed down by the game ball passing through the right ball outlet 1222R, the variation in the pushed position and the direction in which the game ball passes is determined not only by the elastic deformation of the projecting piece 2242 but also by the facing piece. Since it can also be absorbed by the elastic deformation of 2243, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced back to the protruding piece 2242 and to pass it reliably.

  When the facing piece 2243 is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 1300, the abutment force between them (ie, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disc member 1300) is used as the protruding piece 2242. In addition to the elastic deformation of the elastic member 2244, the elastic deformation of the facing piece can be used gradually so that the rotational movement of the disk member 1300 can be prevented from changing suddenly.

  The assembling of the sorting apparatus 2000 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that a step of storing the braking member 2240 in the storage portion 2230 of the front member 2200 is added, and the opening side of the facing wall member 1220 of the front member 2200 The disc member 1300 is inserted and the substrate member 1100 is fastened and fixed.

  In other words, the storage portion 2230 is recessed in the inner peripheral surface of the facing wall member 1220 (the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300), and the opening of the concave space of the storage portion 2230 has an opening of the disk member 1300. The outer peripheral surfaces are confronted. Therefore, the opening of the recessed portion space of the storage portion 2230 can be closed by the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the braking member 2240 stored in the storage portion 2230 can be connected to the recessed space of the storage portion 2230 and the outer periphery of the disk member 1300. It can be operatively held between the surfaces. As a result, a member that holds the braking member 2240 (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as the disk member 1300, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for such holding. Can be reduced.

  Next, a distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the distribution device 3000 that distributes the game balls by rotating the disk member 1300 in one direction has been described. However, the distribution device 3000 according to the third embodiment alternates in one direction and the other direction. Rotate to distribute game balls. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 3000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 23A shows the operation of distributing the game balls that have entered the ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 23, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 3000 will be described. The distribution device 3000 is provided with a support plate member 3300 therein. The support plate member 3300 is pivotally supported between a first angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 23A or a second angle position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A, the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 23A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23B, the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 23 (b), the support plate member 3300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 23 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, and is alternately disposed at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 3300 is provided with a weight member 3400 so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture in which the center plate 3330 faces upward. That is, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When arranged at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the weight member 3400 is arranged on the descending inclination side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23A (shown by a broken line in FIG. 23B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 3300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position shown by the broken line in FIG. 23B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When the weight member 3400 is disposed at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the weight member 3400 is disposed on the descending inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 3300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 23B (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 3300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 3000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the overall configuration of the sorting apparatus 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  24A is a front view of the sorting apparatus 3000, and FIG. 24B is a side view of the sorting apparatus 3000. As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the sorting device 3000 is disposed on the substrate member 3100 (see FIG. 25) and the front side of the substrate member 3100 (the front side in FIG. 24). Front plate member 3200 (see FIG. 26), a support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) rotatably disposed between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 (internal space), and the support plate member A weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) to be attached to 3300, and the entered game ball is in two positions, a first position and a second position (in this embodiment, a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b). ) Alternately (see FIG. 23).

  Next, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100, the front member 3200, the support plate member 3300, and the weight member 3400 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a front view of the substrate member 3100, and FIG. 25B is a side view of the substrate member 3100 as seen in the direction of the arrow XXVb in FIG. In FIG. 25A, the front member 3200 is schematically shown using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 3100.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the board member 3100 is formed in a plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and insertion holes 1100a are formed at four corners of the plate-like body. The The board member 3100 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 by the fastening screws inserted through these insertion holes 1100a.

  Insertion holes 1100b are formed at approximately four central portions of the substrate member 3100. A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 1100b from the back side of the board member 3100 (FIG. 25A, the back side of the paper), and the fastening screw causes the front side of the board member 3100 (the front side of the paper side of FIG. 25A). ) And the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed.

  A shaft hole 3130 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the board member 3100, and an opening serving as an outlet for a game ball is provided below the center of the board member 3100. A left communication hole 3120L and a right communication hole 3120R are formed. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted through the shaft hole 3130.

  The left communication hole 3120L and the right communication hole 3120R are openings for allowing the game balls discharged from the support plate member 3300 to win the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b (see FIG. 23). In the assembled state in which the front member 3200 is fastened and fixed to the front member 3200, the front member 3200 is disposed at the downstream end of the guide passage (see FIG. 26) formed by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200.

  Next, the overall configuration of the front member 3200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26A is a rear view of the front member 3200, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the front member 3200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the front member 3200 includes a plate-shaped front plate member 1210 and wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c that are erected on the back side of the front plate 1210 (the front side of FIG. 26 (a)). These are integrally formed from a resin material.

  A shaft hole 3230 for pivotally supporting the support plate member 3300 is formed above the center of the front plate member 1210. A rotation shaft 3320 (see FIG. 27) of the support plate member 3300 is inserted into the shaft hole 3230. The wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c are members that surround the periphery of the support plate member 3300 (see FIG. 27) and form a guide path for game balls distributed by the support plate member 3300.

  In the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c, the opening on the front side (FIG. 26 (a), the back side of the paper) of the internal space surrounded by them is sealed by the front plate member 1210, and the back side (FIG. 26 (a) the front side of the paper). Side) opening is formed. The opened opening is sealed by the substrate member 3100 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

  That is, the assembling of the sorting device 3000 is performed by installing the support plate member 3300 from the opening on the back side of the internal space surrounded by the wall members 3220a, 3220b, and 3220c of the front member 3200, and setting the rotation shaft 3320 of the support plate member 3300. The substrate member 3100 is fastened and fixed while being inserted through the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, respectively. As a result, the support plate member 3300 can be installed inside the sorting device 3000 so as to be rotatable and not dropout. Therefore, the manufacturing process can be reduced by performing an assembly process.

  The wall member 3220a is formed in an inverted U shape in a rear view, and the wall member 3220b is formed in a straight line in a rear view extending vertically on the inner side of the wall member 3220a. That is, the wall member 3220b is opposed to a linear part in back view extending in the vertical direction (FIG. 26 (a) vertical direction) of the wall member 3220a with a space through which one game ball can pass. Arranged.

  The upper ends of the straight portions of the wall member 3220b as viewed from the back are bent inwardly (in directions close to each other). The linear portion that is bent and extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 26A, left-right direction) abuts on the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R of the support plate member 3300, and rotates the support plate member 3300. It functions as a part that regulates the moving angle.

  The wall member 3220c is formed by connecting the lower ends of linear portions in back view extending in the vertical direction of the wall members 3220a and 3220b. As a result, the guide passage through which the game ball passes is defined, and the end of the guide passage is formed.

  In the wall member 3220a, a ball entrance 1221 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), a guide inclined portion 1224, and a fastening hole 1225 are formed. Since these are the same structures as each site | part 1221,1224,1225 in 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 3300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 3300, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 3300 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 28 is a bottom view of the support plate member 3300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C, the support plate member 3300 includes a cylindrical central cylindrical portion 3310 and an axial rotation shaft 3320 protruding from both end surfaces of the central cylindrical portion 3310. A central plate 3330 extending upward from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (upper side in FIG. 27A), and left and right from the outer peripheral surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310 (left and right sides in FIG. 27A). Left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R extending toward the bottom, and guide portion 3350 disposed on the bottom surface side (the lower side in FIG. 27A) of left receiving plate 3340L and right receiving plate 3340R. These are integrally formed from a resin material. However, the rotation shaft 3320 is made of a metal material and is fitted into the central cylindrical portion 3310.

  The outer cylindrical dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 is made larger than the inner diameters of the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, and the length dimension of the central cylindrical part 3310 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 27B) is determined by the distribution device 3000. The dimension is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the substrate member 3100 and the back surface of the front plate member 1220 of the front member 3200 in the assembled state. Therefore, in the assembled state of the sorting device 3000 in which the rotation shaft 3320 is inserted into the shaft holes 3130 and 3230, the support plate member 3300 cannot be removed and can be rotated between the substrate member 3100 and the front member 3200 facing each other. Decorated.

  The central plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R are portions formed in a flat plate shape, and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R extend vertically with respect to the central plate 3330. A space between the central plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340 or a space between the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340 is a part that receives the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000.

  The guide portion 3350 is a portion for guiding the weight member 3400 according to the inclined state of the support plate member 3300, and is formed in a bar shape with a circular cross section. Specifically, a linear portion extending in the left-right direction (FIG. 27 (a) left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and both ends of the linear portions are connected. And a portion connected to the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. The weight member 3400 is moved to the downward inclined side of the support plate member 3300 by sliding on a linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 (see FIG. 29).

  The linear portion extending in the left-right direction of the guide portion 3350 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the extending direction. Therefore, the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced, and sliding resistance can be suppressed. Therefore, the weight member 3400 can be reliably moved along the descending slope of the guide portion 3350 without stopping the weight member 3340 in the middle, and the weight member 3400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400 (FIG. 29). (See (a) or FIG. 29 (d)).

  Next, the overall configuration of the weight member 3400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28A is a front view of the weight member 3400, and FIG. 28B is a side view of the weight member 3400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the weight member 3400 is a member that is attached to the guide portion 3350 of the support plate member 3300 and functions as a weight, and is an end material (made of a metal material). For example, it is formed in an annular shape by winding a piano wire. Therefore, since the opening can be formed in a part of the weight member 3400 by elastic deformation, the guide member 3350 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the weight member 3400 through the opening. Therefore, the mounting work can be facilitated and the number of assembly steps can be reduced.

  In addition, when the weight member 3400 is formed by winding a material with ends, the end portions are overlapped in a front view. That is, the end material has a length of 180 degrees or more along the circumferential direction. As described above, the weight member 3400 is formed by overlapping the end portions thereof, so that even if the weight of the weight member 3400 is increased, the weight member 3400 is separated from the guide portion 3350. It can suppress falling off.

  Further, the material of the weight member 3400 has a circular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the material. Therefore, since the contact area between the weight member 3400 and the guide portion 3350 can be reduced and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, the weight member 3400 can be reliably and rapidly moved as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the operation of distributing the game balls and the operation of the weight member 3400 by the distribution device 3000 will be described. FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are front views of the support plate member 3300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 3300 that receives an incoming game ball and discharges the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the support plate member 3300 is positioned such that the left receiving plate 3340L side is positioned downward and receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. At the first angle position, the left receiving plate 3340L is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated counterclockwise when the rotation shaft 3320 is the rotation center (FIG. 29). (B) Counterclockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  As shown in FIG. 29B and FIG. 29C, when the support plate member 3300 at the first angular position receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, the weight of the game ball The support plate member 3300 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction) about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the game balls received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R are moved to the second start port 63b (FIG. 23 ( b), the support plate member 3300 is in a posture to receive the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. At the second angle position, the right receiving plate 3340R is brought into contact with the upper end of the wall member 3220b of the front member 33200, and the support plate member 3300 with the rotation shaft 3320 as the center of rotation is viewed clockwise (FIG. 29 ( d) The clockwise rotation is restricted (see FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  When the next game ball is entered in the state where the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29D, the door receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In both cases, the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the opposite side to that described above, whereby the game ball is discharged to the second starting port 63a (see FIG. 23A).

  Thus, for example, when the support plate member 3300 is disposed at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the central plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIGS. 29A and 29B), By turning the game ball from the first angle position to the second angle position using the weight of the game ball (FIGS. 29C and 29D), the game ball is moved to the second start port 63b. To throw a ball. At the same time, the support plate member 3300 is arranged in a posture (second angular position) where the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. Accordingly, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in the present embodiment, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  However, the center plate 3330, the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R receive the game balls, the direction in which the game balls drop, or the direction in which the game balls are discharged from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, etc. Depending on the state of the variation and the timing at which disturbances such as vibrations input from the outside to the sorting device 3000 are transmitted to the support plate member 3300, there are variations, for example, as shown in FIG. After the game ball is received at one angular position and the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d) and the game ball is discharged, it is maintained at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d). The support plate member 3300 to be returned may return to the first angular position shown in FIG. In this case, the next game ball is received by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R in the same manner as the previous game ball, and the operations from FIG. 29 (a) to FIG. 29 (d) are repeated. The game balls are continuously discharged to the second start port 63b. For this reason, the game balls cannot be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position (in this embodiment, the second start port 63a and the second start port 63b).

  On the other hand, the distribution device 3000 includes a guide unit 3350 and a weight member 3400 that is guided and moved by the guide unit 3350. For example, in the second angular position shown in FIG. Since the member 3400 is moved to the downward inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side), the posture of the support plate member 3300 is supposed to be originally (FIG. 29 (d) using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 3400. ) Second angular position).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 3400 is positioned at the descending inclined end (the left receiving plate 3340L side) of the guide portion 3350, so that the left receiving plate The 3340L side is made heavy, and the support plate member 3300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 29B and 29C, the support plate member 3300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 rotates by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (FIG. 29 (b) rightward rotation direction), the guide portion 3350 is also rotated in the same direction, and the guide portion 3350 is lowered toward the right receiving plate 3340R. By being inclined, the weight member 3400 is moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion 3350.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), when the support plate member 3300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 3400 reaches the descending inclined end of the guide portion 3350. As a result, the center of gravity position as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 3400 (the lower right receiving plate 3340R side is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (d), the support plate member 3300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 29 (d)), and the second angular position shown in FIG. 29 (a). Since it can suppress returning to 1 angular position, this support plate member 3300 can be maintained at a 2nd angular position.

  In the present embodiment, since the support plate member 3300 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 3400 is made of a metal material, a change in the center of gravity position due to the movement of the weight member 3400 can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to reliably exhibit the effect of maintaining the support plate member 3300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, a support plate member 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the portion for guiding the weight member 3400 of the guide portion 3350 is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed in a curved shape in a circular arc when viewed from the front. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a front view of the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 30B is a front view of the support plate member 4300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 30B, for the purpose of comparison, the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment is illustrated using a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), the guide portion 4350 in the fourth embodiment is formed to be curved in a front view arc shape concentric with the rotation shaft 3320, and the bottom surfaces of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. It is arranged. In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 4350 is circular in cross section similarly to the guide part 3350 in 3rd Embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b), according to the support plate member 4300 in the fourth embodiment, when the support plate member 4300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 320, the gradient on the ascending inclination side is increased. Can be great. That is, in the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment, the weight member 3400 that is slidably moved by the guide direction (that is, gravity (self-weight) of the weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) at the position P1 on the ascending inclination side is the guide part 3350. Is the extending direction of the linear portion of the guide portion 3350.

  On the other hand, in the guide part 4350 in the fourth embodiment, the guide direction of the weight member 3400 at the position P2 on the ascending slope side is the tangential direction of the guide part 4350, and therefore the angle of the descending slope is made larger (more) Can be directed downward). Therefore, the movement of the weight member 3400, which is positioned on the rising inclination side (position P2) of the guide portion 4350 with the rotation of the support plate member 4300, is compared with the guide portion 3350 of the third embodiment. , It can be performed more reliably and promptly.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the annular weight member 3400 (see FIG. 28) slides on the rod-shaped guide portions 3350 and 4350, the friction resistance is large, and thus the weight that is positioned on the ascending slope side (positions P1 and P2) There is a possibility that the movement of the member 3400 may not start (that is, the static friction coefficient is larger than the dynamic friction coefficient), and the configuration in which the guide portion 4350 is curved in a circular arc when viewed from the front is particularly effective for such a configuration.

  Next, a support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 3rd Embodiment, although the part which guides the weight member 3400 of the guide part 3350 was formed in linear form from the start end to the terminal end, the weight member 3400 was added to the guide part 5350 of 5th Embodiment. A depression (depression 5350a) is formed in a part of the guided portion. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 31A is a front view of the support plate member 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a front view of the support plate member 5300 arranged at the second angular position. FIG. 31B shows the support plate member 5300 in a state where the weight member 3400 is attached to the guide portion 5350.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment extends in the left-right direction (FIG. 31A left-right direction) parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R. At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 31 (a)) of the linear portion to be provided, recessed portions 5350a that are recessed downward are formed.

  The hollow portion 5350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the guide part 5350 is set to the same cross-sectional shape as a whole including the hollow part 5350a, and is circular in cross section like the guide part 3350 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), since the recessed portions 5350a are formed at both ends of the guide portion 5350, the guide plate 5300 is rotated with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. When the weight member 3400 moves toward one end side (the right side in FIG. 31 (b)) along the downward inclination of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is moved to the recess portion 5350a. Can be fitted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from bouncing back to the rising slope side (left side in FIG. 31B).

  That is, like the guide portion 3350 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), when the entire portion that guides the weight member 3400 is formed in a straight line from the start end to the end, it follows the descending slope of the guide portion 3350. When the weight member 3400 is slid vigorously to the end and is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end (right end in FIG. 29 (d)), there is nothing that hinders the movement of the bounced weight member 3400. The member 3400 may be bounced back to the start end (left end in FIG. 29 (d)). In that case, with the movement of the weight member 3400, the support plate member 3300 is rotated in the opposite direction, and cannot be maintained in a desired posture (first angular position or second angular position). .

  On the other hand, in the guide portion 5350 in the fifth embodiment, since the recessed portion 5350a is formed at the terminal end (right end in FIG. 31B) of the guide portion 5350, the weight member 3400 is formed along the descending inclination of the guide portion 5350. Even if it is slid swiftly to the end, the weight member 3400 is fitted into the recess 5350a and collides with the end (the right end in FIG. 31 (b)), so it is rebounded in the reverse direction at the end. However, the movement of the weight member 3400 in the rebound direction can be inhibited by the upward inclination of the recess 5350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 3400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 31 (b)), and the support plate member 5300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment will be described. In 3rd Embodiment, although the case where the weight member 3400 was formed from the raw material of a cross-section circular strip | line body was demonstrated, the weight members 6400 and 7400 of 6th Embodiment and 7th Embodiment are from plate-shaped material. It is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the weight member 6400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the weight member 6400 in the sixth embodiment is made of a metal material, and a circular plate shape in which a slit extending in the radial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is a member. According to this weight member 6400, since the material has a thickness in the axial direction, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are shifted in the axial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  FIG. 33A is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a perspective view of the weight member 7400 in the deformed state. As shown in FIG. 33A, the weight member 7400 in the seventh embodiment is made of a metal material, and a cylindrical member in which a slit extending in the axial direction is formed in a part of the circumferential direction. It is. According to this weight member 7400, since the material has a thickness in the radial direction, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), both ends sandwiching the slit are displaced in the radial direction to be elastically deformed, and the guide portion 3530 is It can be easily inserted.

  According to the weight members 6400 and 7400 in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, for example, the weight member 6400 can be formed in one step by punching a shape including a slit by pressing from a flat plate material, A plurality of weight members 7400 can be formed by rolling a flat material by roll processing, creating a relatively long roll-shaped body, and cutting the roll-shaped body at predetermined lengths. Therefore, these weight members 7400 Manufacturing efficiency can be increased, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Thus, while the weight members 6400 and 7400 are easy to manufacture, the weight members 6400 and 7400 are made of a plate-shaped material, so that it is easy to secure the weight as the weight. Thus, by applying the weight to the support plate member 3300 or the like as a weight, the holding plate member 3300 or the like can be reliably maintained in a posture (first angle position or second angle position) that should be originally.

  Next, a support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In 3rd Embodiment, although the guide part 3350 was penetrated to the cyclic | annular weight member 3400 and the weight member 3400 was slid along the guide part 3350, the weight member 8400 of 8th Embodiment is as follows. Rolled along the guide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 34 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 8300 in the direction of the arrow XXXIVb in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 (c) is a bottom view of the support plate member 8300 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVc in FIG. 34 (a). 35A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 8300 along the line XXXVa-XXXVa in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 35B is a support plate along the line XXXVb-XXXVb in FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of member 8300.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the support plate member 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes a box body 8350 for housing a weight member 8400 on the bottom side of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the box 8350. A lid body 8360 attached to the opening is disposed, and the weight member 8400 rolls along a path formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 (see FIG. 36).

  The box 8350 is a box-shaped body that is open on one side (the front side in FIG. 34 (a)), the ceiling surface is formed by the central cylindrical portion 3310, the left receiving plate 3340L, and the right receiving plate 3340R. The bottom surface is formed in parallel with the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (the left-right direction in FIG. 35A). The side walls (left and right side walls in FIG. 35 (a)) facing each other of the box 8350 are bulged outward in a semicircular cross section, and the bulged portion (meat) Fastened holes 8351 are respectively formed in the thick portions).

  The lid body 8360 is a plate-like body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an insertion hole for inserting the fastening screw 8370 is provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 34 (a) left-right direction). The fastening screw 8370 inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the fastening hole 8351 of the box body 8350, whereby the lid body 8360 is fastened and fixed to the box body 8350, and one side of the box body 8350 (FIG. 34 (a The opening on the front side) is closed by the lid 8360.

  The weight member 8400 is formed in a cylindrical shape from a metal material, and is housed in a passage formed by the box body 8350 and the lid body 8360 in a posture in which the axis is parallel to the rotation shaft 3320. The length of the weight member 8400 in the axial direction is slightly smaller than the facing distance between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360 (the distance in the left-right direction in FIG. 35B). Accordingly, the weight of the weight member 8400 can be secured, and the posture of the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being disturbed in the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be prevented from being bitten between the side wall of the box 8350 and the lid 8360.

  Next, the operation of the weight member 8400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (d) are front views of the support plate member 8300 illustrating the transition of the operation of the support plate member 8300 that receives a game ball that has been entered and discharges the game ball. Note that the game ball distribution operation is the same as that in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), at the first angular position, the weight member 8400 has a descending inclined end (left receiving plate 3340L) of a passage (hereinafter referred to as “passage”) formed by the box 8350 and the lid 8360. The left support plate 3340L side is made heavy and the support plate member 8300 is maintained at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 36B and 36C, the support plate member 8300 receives a game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right support plate 3340R, and the support plate member 3300 is rotated by the weight of the game ball. When the shaft 3320 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 2369 (b)), the passage is also rotated in the same direction, and the passage is inclined downward toward the right receiving plate 3340R. Thus, the weight member 8400 is rolled along the downward slope of the passage.

  As shown in FIG. 36D, when the support plate member 8300 is rotated to the second angular position, the weight member 8400 reaches the descending inclined end (one of the opposing side walls) of the passage. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the right receiving plate 3340R side by the amount of movement of the weight member 8400 (the right receiving plate 3340R side positioned below is made heavier). Therefore, at the second angle position shown in FIG. 36 (d), the support plate member 8300 is difficult to turn counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 (d)), and the second angle position shown in FIG. Since it can suppress returning to 1 angle position, this support plate member 8300 can be maintained in a 2nd angle position.

  In the present embodiment, a passage parallel to the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R is formed, and the weight member 8400 is formed as a columnar body that can roll on the passage, so that the support plate member 8300 rotates. Accordingly, when the passage is inclined downward, the weight member 8400 can be reliably and rapidly moved along the downward inclination of the passage.

  For example, in the structure in which the annular weight member 3400 moves by sliding the guide portion 3350 as in the case of the third embodiment, since the sliding resistance is large, the movement of the weight member 3400 is not started, or the guide portion The weight member 3400 that moves along the descending slope of 3350 may stop halfway, and the movement speed of the weight member 3400 may not be in time because the movement speed is slow.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the weight member 8400 is formed as a cylindrical body and is configured to roll the passage, so that the weight member 8400 can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end of the passage, The weight member 8400 can be moved quickly (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the support plate member 8300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by using the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the weight member 8400.

  Here, in this embodiment, since the box body 8350 is made of a resin material, the entire support plate member 8300 can be integrally formed, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, its weight can be secured, so that the change in the center of gravity position due to rolling can be increased.

  On the other hand, during the game ball sorting operation by the support plate member 8300 (see FIG. 36), the opposite side walls of the box 8350 (that is, one end side and the other end side of the passage where the weight member 8400 rolls, FIG. a) Since the weight member 8400 repeatedly collides with the left side and the right side, as described above, the box 8350 is made of a resin material, and the weight member 8400 is made of a metal material, the box The side walls of the 8350 facing each other are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a fastening hole 8351 for fastening the fastening screw 8351 is formed on the side walls of the box 8350 facing each other, and a part of the side wall is partially formed along with the formation of the fastening hole 8351. It bulges outward (thickness). Therefore, a state in which the fastening screw 8370 made of a metal material is embedded in the opposite side walls of the box 8350 can be formed, and a part of the side wall can be partially thickened. The portion where 84000 collides can be reinforced to prevent the side wall from being damaged. In addition, the structure for fastening and fixing the box 8350 and the lid 8360 can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the weight member 84000 collides (the side wall of the box 8350). Since it is not necessary to provide the product, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a support plate member 9300 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the bottom surface of the passage in which the weight member 8400 rolls is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front end to the end, but the weight member 8400 is formed on the bottom surface of the passage in the ninth embodiment. A depression (depression 9350a) is formed in a part of the portion that guides the movement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 9300 arranged at the second angular position. In FIG. 37A, the weight member 8400 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the bottom surface of the box 9350 in the ninth embodiment has a horizontal direction parallel to the extending direction of the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R (FIG. 37 (a) horizontal direction). At both ends (the left side and the right side in FIG. 37 (a)) of the linear portion extending to the bottom, recessed portions 9350a that are recessed downward are formed. The hollow portion 9350a is formed to be inclined downward in a straight line toward one end side or the other end side (left side and right side in FIG. 37 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), since the recessed portions 9350a are formed at both ends of the box body 9350, the support plate member 9300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as a rotation center. Even if the weight member 8400 rolls vigorously to the end along the descending inclination, the weight member 8400 is fitted into the recess 9350a while the end (see FIG. 37 (b) right end), even if it is bounced back in the reverse direction at the end, it is possible to inhibit the movement of the weight member 8400 in the bounce direction due to the rising inclination of the recess 9350a. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the weight member 8400 from being bounced back to the start end (the left end in FIG. 37 (b)), and the support plate member 9300 can be reliably maintained in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, a sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position is changed by sliding the weight member 3400 along the guide portion 3350 has been described. In the tenth embodiment, either the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R is used. The position of the center of gravity is changed by hanging one side downward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 10000 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 38 (a) shows the operation of distributing the entered game ball to the first starting port 63a. FIG. 6 schematically shows the operation of distributing the entered game balls to the second start port 63b.

  With reference to FIG. 38, the outline of the game ball distribution operation by the distribution device 10000 will be described. The sorting device 10000 has a support plate member 10300 disposed therein. The support plate member 10300 is pivotally supported between a first angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 38A or a second angular position indicated by a solid line in FIG. The game ball entered therein is received between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L or between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 at the second angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the left receiving plate 3340L. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A, the support plate member 10300 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 38A due to the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the first angular position. The game balls are distributed to the first start port 63a.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B, the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position receives the entered game ball between the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. In this case, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 38 (b), the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 38 (b) by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position. The game balls are distributed to the second start port 63b.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 is rotated by the weight of the received game ball and is alternately arranged at the first angular position or the second angular position, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a and the second angular position. Evenly distributed to the start ports 63b to win.

  Here, the support plate member 10300 is provided with a left weight member 10360L and a right weight member 10360R so that the center plate 3330 does not stop in a posture facing right above. That is, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the second angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38A is rotated counterclockwise to guide the game ball to the first starting port 63a, and FIG. When placed at the first angular position indicated by the solid line in (a), the left weight member 10360L hangs down on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side), and maintains the support plate member 10300 at the first angular position. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball to be entered next at the first angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38A (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 38B). 2 Guide to the start port 63b.

  On the other hand, the support plate member 10300 that has received the game ball at the first angular position indicated by the broken line in FIG. 38B is rotated clockwise to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b, and FIG. When arranged at the second angle position indicated by the solid line in b), the right weight member 10360R is suspended downward (to the right receiving plate 3340R side), and the support plate member 10300 is maintained at the second angle position. Therefore, the support plate member 10300 receives the next game ball to be entered at the second angular position shown by a solid line in FIG. 38B (broken line in FIG. 23A). 1 It guides to the starting port 63a.

  As described above, the support plate member 10300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 10000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, detailed configurations of the substrate member 3100 and the support plate member 10300 will be described in order. FIG. 39A is a front view of the substrate member 10100, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the substrate member 10100 in the direction of the arrow XXXIXb in FIG. In FIG. 39A, the front member 3200 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to show the relationship of the arrangement position of the front member 3200 with respect to the substrate member 10100.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, the board member 10100 differs from the board member 3100 in the third embodiment only in that an upper protrusion 10141 and a lower protrusion 10142 are added. The configuration is the same. Therefore, only different configurations will be described.

  A pair of upper protrusions 10141 and a pair of lower protrusions 10142 protrude from the periphery of the shaft hole 3130 of the substrate member 10100. The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 are columnar protrusions used when the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and are released from the magnetic attachment (FIGS. 42 and 43). The pair of upper protrusions 10141 are equally disposed on the left and right sides at positions above the shaft hole 3130, and the pair of lower protrusions 10142 are equally disposed on the left and right positions at positions below the shaft hole 3130. The

  The upper protrusion 10141 and the lower protrusion 10142 located on the left side (left side in FIG. 39A) of the shaft hole 3130 are left-locked when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. The upper projection 10141 and the lower projection 10142 that are provided on the movement trajectory of the piece 10370L and are located to the right of the shaft hole 3130 (right side in FIG. 39A) have the support plate member 10300 that rotates the rotation shaft 3320. It protrudes on the movement trajectory of the left locking piece 10370L when rotated as the center. Therefore, when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3320, the left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are locked to the upper protrusion 10141 or the lower protrusion 10142 (FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).

  Next, the overall configuration of the support plate member 10300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 10300, and FIG. 40 (b) is a side view of the support plate member 10300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 42 is a bottom view of the support plate member 10300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLc in FIG. 41A is a cross-sectional view of the support plate member 10300 along the XLIa-XLIa line of FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B is a view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the first angular position. It is a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports a rotating shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the left receiving plate 3340L, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 10350. A left weight member 10360L and a left locking piece 10370L are fixed to the rotation shaft 10351. Similarly, a bearing 10350 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 10351 is attached to the bottom surface of the right receiving plate 3340R, and the rotation shaft 10351 pivotally supported by the bearing 10350 includes The right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed.

  The left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are plate-like bodies made of a metal material (magnetic material) and are formed in the same shape. The left locking piece 10370L and the right locking piece 10370R are portions that are locked to the upper protrusion 1141 or the lower protrusion 1142 when the support plate member 10300 is rotated about the rotation shaft 2210. For example, as shown to Fig.41 (a), it arrange | positions by plane symmetry with the center board 3330 as a symmetry plane.

  Note that the left weight member 10360L and the left locking piece 10370L, and the right weight member 10360R and the right locking piece 10370R are fixed to the same rotation shaft 10351, respectively, and thus rotate in the same phase together with the rotation shafts 10351. Is moved (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  Magnets 10380 are disposed on the bottom surface of left receiving plate 3340L and the bottom surface of right receiving plate 3340R, respectively. Each of these magnets 10380 magnetizes the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R, thereby maintaining the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R ( 42 and 43).

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the left receiving plate 3340L is disposed at the first angular position below the right receiving plate 3340R, the support plate member 10300 is on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side). The left weight member 10360L located in the vertical direction is suspended vertically, while the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380. Accordingly, the support plate member 10300 can be rotated clockwise in FIG. 41 (b) with the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 being eccentric to the left receiving plate 3340L side with respect to the rotation shaft 3320 and the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Since it is suppressed, the first angular position shown in FIG. 41 (b) is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 41B (first angular position), when the next game ball is inserted, the support plate member 10300 receives the game ball by the center plate 3330 and the right receiving plate 3340R. . As a result, the support plate member 10300 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 41B around the rotation shaft 3320 by the weight of the game ball, and is disposed at the second angular position (FIG. 38). (Refer to the state of the solid line in (b)).

  At this second angular position, the support plate member 10300 is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 with the left weight member 10360L suspended vertically at the first angular position, while being magnetized to the magnet 10380 at the first angular position. The right weight member 10360R is released from the magnetic attachment and is suspended vertically. Therefore, the center of gravity of the support plate member 10300 is decentered toward the right receiving plate 3340R with respect to the rotation shaft 3320, and the rotation of the support plate member 10300 about the rotation shaft 3320 in the counterclockwise direction is suppressed. Therefore, the second angular position is maintained unless the next game ball is received.

  In the present embodiment, the magnet 10380 is used to maintain the state in which the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3344R. Compared to the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, the structure can be simplified, and the close state can be maintained and the releasing operation can be performed reliably. Can be improved.

  Further, since the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material), the magnet 10380 may be only the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R. It is necessary to arrange a magnet in Therefore, the number of magnets can be reduced by half compared to the case where the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R and the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R are provided with magnets, respectively. Accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

  Furthermore, the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R are made of a metal material, so that not only the number of magnets can be reduced, but also the weight as a weight can be increased. In addition, the amount of movement of the center of gravity associated with the rotation of the right weight member 10360R can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 10300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  42 and 43, when the support plate member 10300 is disposed from the first angle position to the second angle position (or vice versa) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, the left weight member The principle that the states of the 10360L and the right weight member 10360R (the suspended state and the magnetically attached state) are alternately switched will be described.

  FIG. 42A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position. FIGS. 42B and 42C are directed from the first angular position to the second angular position. FIG. 42D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the second angular position.

  On the other hand, FIG. 43A is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position, and FIGS. 43B and 43C illustrate the first angular position from the second angular position. FIG. 43D is a schematic front view of the support plate member 10300 arranged at the first angular position.

  The principle that the state of the left weight member 10360L is alternately switched in the transition from the first angular position to the second angular position and the transition from the second angular position to the first angular position is that the right weight member 10360R Since the state is alternately switched and is the same as the principle, only the right weight member 10360R will be described, and the description of the left weight member 10360L will be omitted. 42 (b) to 42 (d), the upper protrusion 10141 is not shown, and in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (d), the lower protrusion 10142 is not shown.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 42A to 42D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the first angular position (FIG. 42A) to the second angular position (FIG. 42D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising inclination side, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R. Maintained. In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap between both the upper protrusion 1141 and the lower protrusion 1142.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) about the rotation shaft 3320, the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ2. The right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the lower protrusion 10142. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the lower protrusion 10142, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (b) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right locking piece 10370R is pushed upward relatively by the lower protrusion 10142 (in the direction close to the right receiving plate 3340R, the upper side of FIG. 42B), as shown in FIG. 42C. The weight member 10360R is rotated in the direction away from the right receiving plate 3340R (the lower side in FIG. 42B), and the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released as shown in FIG.

  Since the right weight member 10360R is heavier than the right locking piece 10370R, when the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380 is released, the right weight member 10360R hangs vertically around the rotation shaft 10351 as the rotation center. When the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the downward inclination direction (FIG. 42 (c) clockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center, and the downward inclination angle reaches the angle θ4, the right receiving plate 3340R is disposed at the second angular position. .

  As shown in FIG. 42 (d), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the descending slope side. In this case, the right locking piece 10370 </ b> R is disposed at a position having a gap with the lower protrusion 1142. Therefore, the weight of the right weight member 10360R can be efficiently applied to the right receiving plate 3340R.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 43A to 43D, the right weight member 10360R at the time of transition from the second angular position (FIG. 43A) to the first angular position (FIG. 43D). The state of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically at the second angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the downward slope side. From this state, the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclined direction (FIG. 43 (a) counterclockwise) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center while the right weight member 10360R is suspended vertically. The

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the right receiving plate 3340R is rotated in the upward inclination direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) about the rotation shaft 3320, and the upward inclination angle reaches an angle θ5. Then, the right locking piece 10370R comes into contact with the upper protrusion 10141. From the state in which the right locking piece 10370R is in contact with the upper protrusion 10141, the right receiving plate 3340R is further rotated in the upward tilt direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 43 (b)) with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center. Then, the right engagement piece 10370R is pushed relatively downward (lower side in FIG. 43 (b)) by the upper protrusion 10141, so that the right weight member 10360R is moved to the right receiving plate as shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is rotated in the direction approaching 3340R (the upper side in FIG. 43 (c)) and is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  In the present embodiment, the right weight member 10360R can be brought close to the magnet 10380 by the right locking piece 10370R coming into contact with the upper protrusion 10141, so that the magnet 10380 can be securely attached to the magnet. Can be done. Therefore, since it is not necessary to increase the magnetic force of the magnet 10380 unnecessarily, the release of the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380 described above (see FIGS. 42B and 42C) can be ensured.

  In the right receiving plate 3340R, the right weight member 10360R is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380, and the right weight member 10360R is in close proximity to the right receiving plate 3340R with the rotation shaft 3320 as the rotation center (FIG. 43 (c) counterclockwise). When the rising inclination angle reaches the angle θ1, it is arranged at the first angular position.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (d), at the first angular position where the right receiving plate 3340R is on the rising slope side, the right weight member 10360R is maintained in the state of being close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment by the magnet 10380. . In this case, the right locking piece 10370R is disposed at a position having a gap with the upper protrusion 1141. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right locking piece 10370R from coming into contact with the upper protrusion 1141 due to the influence of disturbance or the like and inadvertently releasing the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R by the magnet 10380.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the support plate member 10300 includes the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 1036OR that are pivotably suspended by the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R, and the left weight member 10360L and the left weight member 10360L. The left inclined piece 10370L and the right inclined piece 10370R connected to the right weight member 1036OR are provided, and when the support plate member 10300 is arranged up to the first angular position or the second angular position, it is arranged on the upward inclined side. The left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR is magnetically attached to the magnet 10380 and is close to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R, while the left weight member 10360L or the right weight member 1036OR arranged on the descending slope side is a magnet. The magnetic attachment by 10380 is released, and the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3 It can be suspended vertically from the 40R. Thereby, the gravity center position of the support plate member 10300 can be moved, and the support plate member 10300 can be maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  For example, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the right weight member 10360R located on the rising inclination side (right receiving plate 3340R side) is brought close to the right receiving plate 3340R by the magnetic attachment of the magnet 10380. At the same time, the left weight member 10360L located on the descending slope side (left receiving plate 3340L side) is suspended vertically, so that the position of the center of gravity as a whole is changed to the left receiving plate 3340L side (that is, located on the descending slope side). The left support plate 3340L side can be made heavier). As a result, it is possible to suppress the support plate member 10300 from rotating back in the reverse direction and back to the second angular position, and maintain the first angular position. The same applies to the support plate member 10300 disposed at the second angular position.

  Next, the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the tenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the left weight member 10360L and the magnet 10380 for magnetizing the right weight member 10360R are individually provided. In the eleventh embodiment, 1 The magnet 10380 is configured to be used for both the magnetic attachment of the left weight member 10360L and the magnetic attachment of the right weight member 10360R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  44 (a) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 arranged at the first angular position, and FIG. c) is a front view of the support plate member 11300 disposed at the second angular position.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), the support plate member 11300 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with one magnet 10380 on the bottom surface of the central cylindrical portion 3310. Further, the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R are made larger in length than the left weight member 10360L and the right weight member 10360R in the tenth embodiment.

  That is, in the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R, the length dimension from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip (lower end in FIG. 44 (a)) is made larger than the linear distance from the rotation shaft 10351 to the magnet 10380. . Therefore, at the first angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the right weight member 11360R can be magnetized to the magnet 10380, while at the second angular position, as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The left weight member 11360L can be magnetically attached to the magnet 10380.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, one magnet 1038 is also used as a magnet for magnetizing the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R and maintaining them in a state in proximity to the left receiving plate 3340L or the right receiving plate 3340R. To do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. Further, by increasing the lengths of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R in this way, the amount of movement of the center of gravity position accompanying the displacement of the left weight member 11360L and the right weight member 11360R can be further increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the support plate member 11300 in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  A pachinko machine may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration in one of the above embodiments with part or all of the configuration of the other embodiments. For example, it is exemplified that the pachinko machine is configured by combining the sorting apparatus 1000 in the first embodiment and the sorting apparatus 3000 in the third embodiment (that is, both are arranged on the game board 13). .

  In each said embodiment, the case where the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b are arrange | positioned in the distribution destination (1st position and 2nd position) of the game ball by each distribution apparatus 1000-10000 as an example. Although described, what is disposed at the first position and the second position is not limited to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, and may have any other configuration. That is, there is no limitation on the type of winning prize. Further, the components disposed at the first position and the second position do not need to have a structure in which a game ball such as a prize opening enters. For example, a nail or a windmill may be used. Also, nothing may be provided. In other words, the first position and the second position specify the position in the game area, and the configuration existing at the position is not limited.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the case where the object on which the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 disposed on the facing wall member 1220 is applied is a game ball, but instead or in addition to this, Then, a magnet may be disposed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 1300, and the magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 may be applied to this magnet. The magnetic force of the facing magnet 1226 can be applied with higher accuracy according to the phase (rotation position) of the disk member.

  In the third to ninth embodiments, the case where the number of weight members 3400 to 8400 attached to the guide portions 3350 to 5350 or accommodated in the passages of the box bodies 8350 and 9350 is one has been described. The weight members 3400 to 8400 may be mounted or stored at the same time. By effectively using the space in the extending direction (sliding or rolling direction) of the guide portions 3350 to 5350 and the passage (that is, mounting or storing two or more in parallel along the extending direction) By doing so, it is possible to further secure the weight while reducing the size of the sorting apparatus.

  Although the case where the weight members 3400 to 7400 are configured as an open system has been described in the third to seventh embodiments, the weight members 3400 to 7400 may be configured as a closed system. In that case, the guide portions 3350 to 5350 may be separated from the left receiving plate 3340L and the right receiving plate 3340R.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the case has been described in which the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are made of a metal material (magnetic material). However, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L are made of a nonmagnetic material such as a resin material. Also good. In this case, magnets may be disposed on the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R in the direction of the magnetic poles that can be magnetically attached to the magnet 1380.

  In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R are shaped so that the center of gravity is located in the center in the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. The case where the shape is a flat plate shape having a constant thickness dimension) has been described, but it is preferable that the center of gravity is decentered toward the tip side from the center in the length direction from the rotation shaft 10351 to the tip. This is because the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the support plate members 10300 and 11300 accompanying the displacement of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R can be increased.

  As a method of decentering the center of gravity toward the distal end side, a method of increasing the thickness or / and width dimension of the left weight members 10360L and 11360L and the right weight members 10360R and 11360R toward the distal end side, the left weight members 10360L and 11360L, and Examples thereof include a method of attaching an aluminum sheet or a lead sheet to the front end side of the right weight members 10360R and 11360R or fastening a metal screw.

<About the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 71. In the third embodiment described above, the first starting port 63a disposed at the left and right positions in the sorting device 3000 by the support plate member 3300 that can turn the game ball that has entered the sorting device 3000 left and right. And the second start port 63b.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, a game ball that has entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 is moved back and forth in the sorting device 4000 by the support plate member 4300 that tilts back and forth (one is the base). The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged on the front surface of the plate 60 and the other is disposed on the back surface of the base plate 60). Further, an ordinary electric accessory 64 is provided in association with the first starting port 63a disposed on the surface of the base plate 60. When the ordinary electric accessory 64 moves, the base plate does not enter the entrance 63. The game balls flowing down the surface of 60 can easily enter the first starting port 63a. Furthermore, when the ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable and a game ball that has not entered the entrance 63 can easily enter the first start port 63a, the variation based on the entrance to the first start port 63a. The variation time of the production is shortened.

  Thereby, in 3rd Embodiment, the game ball which did not enter into the entrance of the distribution apparatus 3000 was not able to enter into each starting port, but in 12th Embodiment, it is normal electric A game ball that has not entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 can be entered into the first start port 63a by the accessory 64. As a result, a state in which the game ball can easily enter the first start port 63a, that is, a state advantageous to the player can be achieved, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the short-time gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable, and a gaming ball can easily enter the first starting port 63a. As a result, an overflow in which more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the starting port is likely to occur. In the twelfth embodiment, when the game ball can easily enter the first start port 63a, the variation time of the variation effect based on the ball entering the first start port 63a is shortened, so that an overflow occurs. Can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the variation effect based on the ball entering the first starting port 63a and the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 63b can be executed simultaneously. In the twelfth embodiment, in order to obtain a more general configuration, the variation effect is configured such that one variation effect is executed in the order of entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Moreover, the jackpot type selected based on each start port is also partially changed.

  As described above, the structural difference between the twelfth embodiment and the third embodiment described above is that the sorting device 4000 is used instead of the sorting device 3000, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The structural difference between the distribution device 4000 in the twelfth embodiment and the distribution device 3000 in the third embodiment described above is that the positional relationship between the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b is from the left and right. That is, it is that the support plate member is distributed back and forth from the left and right, and that the ordinary electric accessory 64 is provided along with the first start port 63a. Details of these structures will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47. FIG.

  Further, the difference in electrical configuration is that the contents of the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the jackpot type table based on each start port, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. The various areas stored in the RAM 223 are different, and the difference in the control processing is that part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Is different. Details of the electrical configuration and control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 71. FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 45, the game board 13 in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 45 is a diagram of the game board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, a sorting device 4000 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. The distribution device 4000 is attached to the opening provided in the game board 13 from the back side.

  The sorting apparatus 4000 has a back cover member disposed on the back side, and a front cover member 4100 is attached to the front side of the back cover member. When the distribution member 4000 can be attached to the game board 13, the front cover member 4100 is inserted into the opening of the game board 13 and is fixed to the back side of the game board 13 with screws or the like by the back cover member 4200. .

  In the state in which the sorting device 4000 is attached to the game board 13, the entrance 63 that allows a game ball formed on the upper part of the front cover member 4100 to enter is configured to protrude to the front side of the game board 13. ing. The front cover member 4100 is made of a resin (polycarbonate or the like) that is permeable to the inside, and has a box shape having a flow path through which a game ball can flow down. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that distributes the rolling direction of the game balls that have passed through the entrance 63 and flowed into the interior. A first start port 63a and a second start port 63b are disposed below the rotation distribution member 4300.

  As will be described in detail later, the game balls that have entered the entrance 63 of the sorting device 4000 are alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the rotary sorting member 4300. It is configured as follows. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 63a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is executed, and a game ball enters the second start port 63b. Thus, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is executed.

  With respect to the balls entering the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, each ball is stored as a holding ball with an upper limit of 4 balls. Therefore, since the game device is configured to alternately enter the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b by the distribution device 4000, the entering ball is biased to one of the starting ports, and the upper limit of the holding ball is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that exceeds.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is provided with a variable member 64 that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the first start port 63a. Although details of the variable member 64 will be described later, when the second pattern is hit, the movable portion 64 is moved for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the openings formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 are formed. By opening, it is configured such that a game ball enters the front cover member 4100 through the opening and easily enters the first start port 63a.

  Next, the details of the sorting apparatus 4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a case where a game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a by the rotary distribution member 4300 when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63 of the distribution device 4000.

  The sorting device 4000 has a U-shaped front cover member 4100 on which a game ball can flow down, and a back cover member 4200 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 4100 using screws or the like. It is fixed and configured. The front cover member 4100 is formed in a substantially vertically long box shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an open rear side. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that is rotatably fixed, a first start port 63a, a second start port 63b, and a variable member 64.

  A first start port 63 a is formed at the front lower portion of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100. The first starting port 63a is formed with an opening at the top where a game ball can enter, and a first flow path 4121a through which the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path 4121a is a flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the first start port 63a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and protrudes to the back side of the front cover member 4100 so as to be vertically downward. It is composed of a bowl shape that allows game balls to flow down. Note that the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 4121a is the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the game board 13 (island facilities, etc.) Then, it flows down to the collecting bowl, which is a flow path member for being discharged, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100a and a right opening 4100b through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the first starting port 63a.

  A variable member 64 configured to be rotatable by a solenoid (not shown) is attached to the front cover member 4100. The variable member 64 includes a left variable member 64a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100a can be closed, and a right variable member 64b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100b can be closed. . The left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are formed in a symmetrical shape, are configured in a blade shape, and are fixed to the front cover member 4100 so that the lower end portion can be rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are closed positions in which the variable member 64 is disposed vertically upright so as to close the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. In addition, the variable member 64 is variably controlled to an open position where the variable member 64 is disposed at the position of the inverted C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. The drive structure that can be changed between the closed position and the open position is already known. In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are excited by exciting the solenoid in the same manner as the known structure. Are configured to rotate in conjunction with each other, and in a non-excited state, the rotation is fixed at the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are configured to rotate in conjunction with one solenoid. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b are connected to each other. Each solenoid may be connected, and each variable member 64 may be configured to be operable independently. Thereby, the variation of the operation | movement of the variable member 64 can be increased and the interest improvement of a player can be aimed at.

  The second start port 63b is formed to protrude from the front cover member 6100 at a position on the back side of the first start port 63a. Similar to the first start port 63a, the second start port 63b has a pocket structure having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a discharge port through which the game ball is discharged is formed on the back side. Has been. The outlet is configured to engage with an opening communicating with the second flow path 4122a formed in the back cover body 4200 fixed to the back side of the front cover member 4100. Like the first start port 63a, a detection switch (magnetic sensor) that can detect that a game ball has entered is disposed inside the second start port 63b. In addition, the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path 4122a from the discharge port flow down to the above-described collective cage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the upper surface of the front cover member 4100, there is formed a ball entrance 63 having an opening surface into which the above-described game ball can be inserted, and is configured in a vertically long bowl shape. Inside the entrance 63, a guide wall is formed by a protruding wall portion that gradually protrudes from the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10) to the back side to guide the game ball toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Yes.

  A rotation distribution member 4300 is fixed to the lower portion of the ball entrance 63 so as to be rotatable toward the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. The rotation distribution member 4300 has a shaft portion 4300z that is rotatably fixed to the front cover body 4100, and a vertical wall portion 4300s is formed vertically upward from the shaft portion. Further, a first wall portion 4300t and a second wall portion 4300u of about 90 degrees are formed from the shaft portion 4300z with respect to the vertical wall portion 4300s, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), a first accommodating portion 4300a capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the vertical wall portion 4300s and the first wall portion 4300u of the rotary sorting member 4300, and is vertical. A second housing 4300c capable of receiving one game ball is formed between the wall 4300s and the second wall 4300u. Note that the width of the shaft portion 4300z is slightly larger than that of one game ball, and the vertical wall portion 4300s, the first wall portion 4300t, and the second wall portion 4300u are also configured to have the same width as the shaft portion 4300z. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the state where the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction (the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the first position), the first housing The part 4300a is arranged at a position facing the entrance 63. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance 63 is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 4300a, and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates leftward (toward the pachinko machine 10) by its own weight. It is moved and flows down toward the opening of the first start port 64a. Thereafter, the rotation distribution member 4300 is held in a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the second position) (see FIG. 47B).

  A magnet 4300b is provided at the tip of the vertical wall portion 4300s of the rotational distribution member 4300. Base-side magnets 4301 are also disposed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4300. The base-side magnet 4301 is disposed at a position facing the position of the magnet 4300b when the vertical wall portion 4300b is positioned in the vertical direction. The magnet 4300b and the base-side magnet 4301 of the rotational distribution member 4300 are configured to have opposite polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 4301 is composed of a magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip.

  The magnet 4300b is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the vertical wall portion 4300s so that the tip portions thereof face the base-side magnet 4301 side. At the position where the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates and the vertical wall portion 4300s is vertical, the base side magnet 4301 and the magnet 4300b are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they are attached so as to repel each other.

  Accordingly, when the vertical wall portion 4300 s approaches the base-side magnet 4301, a magnetic force acts so as to prevent the approach, and a rotational force opposite to the direction in which the rotational distribution member 4300 rotates acts. Therefore, after a game ball enters the entrance 63 and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates in the direction of the first position or the second position by the game ball that has entered, the rotation distribution member 4300 reacts in a reaction. When returning to the original position again, when the base side magnet 4301 is approached, a force opposite to the rotational direction to be returned by the magnetic force is applied, and the problem of returning to the original position can be suppressed. Therefore, after the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated by the game ball, it can be stopped at the rotated position. As a result, when the game ball enters the entrance 63, the rotation distribution member 6300 can be alternately changed between the first position and the second position, and the first start port 63a and the second start port The game balls can be distributed alternately to 63b.

  In addition, it is possible to efficiently execute a lottery game resulting from winning at the first entrance 63a and a lottery game resulting from winning at the second entrance 63b. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by suppressing the occurrence of winning (so-called overflow) even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a case will be described in which the sorting rotation member 4300 guides (distributes) a game ball to the second start port 63b. As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 46, when a game ball enters the entrance 63 with the rotation distribution member 4300 disposed at the first position, the game is rotated to the second position. When the sphere is guided to the first starting port 63a, the rotation distribution member 4300 is disposed at the second position as shown in FIG. 47 (b). In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63, the game ball flows down into the second housing portion 4300c, and the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the first position by the weight of the game ball, and the second A game ball is guided to the entrance 64b.

  As described above, the sorting device 4000 according to the present embodiment alternately guides the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b when the game balls enter the entrance port 63. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball is biased toward one start opening, and can suppress the problem that only the reserved ball for one start opening exceeds the upper limit.

  Furthermore, as will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently obtained without bias by configuring the average of the variation times selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be the same. It can be varied to further suppress overflow. Moreover, overflow can be suppressed more by setting the deviation variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be short (a value based on a design value that enters the entrance 63).

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable member 64 (electrical accessory) is attached to the first starting port 63a, the number of balls entering the first starting port 63a is reduced when a short-time game or a probable variable game state described later is entered. More than the second start port 63b. Although details will be described later, in this case, since the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol in this embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol overflows. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is formed with a spiral pattern on the front side so that the state of the rotation distribution member 4300 is difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether the rotation distribution member 4300 is in the first position or the second position, and it is difficult to determine and divide the entrance for the player to enter. . Even if a spiral shape is formed, the front cover member is made of a resin that can penetrate the inside, so it can be determined whether or not a game ball is flowing down, and problems such as ball clogging can be determined early. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game board 13 is made of wood, but it may be made of acrylic resin or the like and a nail for changing the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged on the acrylic resin. Good. In this way, the flow path for discharging the game balls formed on the back side of the sorting device 4000 is made of a transparent resin or the like, so that the game balls enter the sorting device 4000 and are discharged. Until the player can visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the manner in which game balls flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the detection switches for detecting the game balls that have entered the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged inside the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, respectively. You may comprise so that it may each arrange | position in the 1st flow path 4121a and the 2nd flow path 4122a. By comprising in this way, the fraud that a detection switch is turned on by the piano wire etc. from the outside can be suppressed. In addition, a flow path that flows down to the detection switch and a flow path that is discharged to the outside are formed in front of the detection switch so that game balls can be randomly distributed. A game can be played in the hope that it will be detected by the switch, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  As in the conventional configuration, when the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged on the left and right, and the rotational distribution member 4300 is arranged at the upper middle portion, the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. The blade member such as the electric accessory can be provided only on one side (specifically, on the opposite side of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b), but can be disposed on both sides of each start port. could not. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, since the electric member of the blade member can be provided on both sides of the first start port 63a, the winning rate to the first start port 63a can be greatly varied, and the interest of the game Can be improved. In the present embodiment, the first start port 63a is disposed on the front side of the second start port 63b. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the second start port 63b may be disposed on the front side. In addition, for example, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b may be controlled to be switched by a change in the gaming state (time reduction, probability change game, etc.). In this case, it may be configured to controlly determine that a game ball won in the first start port 63a has won in the second start port 63b.

  In the present embodiment, the left variable member 64a and the right variable member 64b of the electric accessory 64 are configured to open and close in synchronization, but may be configured to open and close independently. In this case, the variable member to be opened / closed may be determined according to the hit type of the second symbol, or a lottery for determining opening / closing from only the left side, only the right side, and both types may be executed. .

<Electrical Configuration in 12th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113 are different from those of the above embodiments, and the other parts are the same. Are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 49, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 66). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Is done. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 66).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 63a. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 63b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a includes a special symbol for a low probability (a period during which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that the special symbol is a big hit from the low probability ( Two types of determination values are included for the period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in the table in each state is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 63a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 63b.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0-2” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in the table 202a (see FIG. 51B). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the value “0-29” is the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 51 (b) ))). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “3/40”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIGS. 52A to 52B). As shown in FIG. 52A, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. Becomes “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 99” is “jackpot B”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the case of a big hit of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), the random number value is “0 to 19” in the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type is “Big Jack A”. The jackpot type when the value is “20 to 59” is “jackpot B”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot C”.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 63a. It is stored in the area 203a and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 63b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79, which is a narrow probability range, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first start port 63a. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, a lot of reach display with a long production time can be performed, so that it is possible to secure a time for entering the ball into the first start port 63a, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously performed. It becomes easy to break. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 66) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. It should be noted that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value), or time variation The pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 51A). In the present embodiment, this variation pattern selection table is selectively used depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time. In the short time variation pattern selection table 202e used in the short time, the variation pattern selection table 202d used in a normal time is used. Compared to the above, a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected. This is to change the variation time depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is running short. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is running short of time, it becomes easier to win a prize at the starting hole, and the winning ball becomes invalid because the number of held balls is the upper limit despite the winning at the starting hole. It is conceivable that the number of times (so-called overflow) increases. However, by shortening the fluctuation time in the short time, digestion of the number of reserved balls can be accelerated and the frequency at which the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit can be reduced. The number of overflows can be reduced.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D), for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “disconnect (for a long time)”, “disconnect (for a short time)”, “disconnect normal reach”. ”,“ Outgoing Super Reach ”,“ Outgoing Special Reach ”are stipulated, and the variation patterns for jackpots are“ Normal Normal Reach ”,“ Per Super Reach ”, and“ Perch Special Reach ”. Yes. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the lottery result and the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The short time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C) includes a special diagram 1 short time variation pattern table 202e1 used based on the ball entering the first start port and the second start port. A special figure 2 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used based on a sphere is provided, and the special figure 1 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e1 has a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (out of the short time A or A per short time). In the special figure 2 short time fluctuation pattern table 202e2, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 2.0 seconds (out of the short time B or B per short time) is specified. Then, when the game state is short, the variation pattern is selected using the short-time variation pattern selection table 202e, so that the variation time of the first special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, even when the gaming state becomes shorter and easier to enter the first starting port 63a (that is, a state in which the number of changes in the first special symbol increases), the variation time of the first special symbol becomes the first. It is possible to reduce the deviation of the fluctuation time that is longer than the fluctuation time of the two special symbols. Therefore, the ball entering the first start port 63a without impairing the above-described effect of reducing the deviation of the variation time by causing the distribution device 4000 to enter the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b alternately. It is possible to provide a player with a short game that makes it easier to play.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. , Stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table (FIG. 51 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value matches the random number value set by the second random number table, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  There are 24 random numbers that are hit by a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first start port 63a is opened “only once for 0.2 seconds”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first start port 63a is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first start port 63a is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the first start port 63a is further reduced. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, the ball easily enters the first start port 63a. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first start port 63a is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 66).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. 49, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 49, the stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 66), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 65) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 64) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, probability changing counter 203g, hour and minute counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, fluctuation execution flag 203j, and fluctuation order storage area 203k Other memory areas 203z are also provided.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first start port 63a (first special symbol), and includes one execution area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and In these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored, respectively.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first starting opening 63a (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, a winning information command including those values is received. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), and the first starting port 63a (first The only difference is that the special symbol) is changed to the second start port 63b (second special symbol), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the order of winning. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first starting port 63a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first start port 63a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S604 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of the first special symbol is executed (see S206 in FIG. 57).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the second special symbol) is Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command (see S209 and S214 in FIG. 57 and S605 and S612 in FIG. 61). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f is set to an initial value of zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 62).

  When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 63). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 63). S803: No).

  The probability changing counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and if the value of the counter 203g during probability change is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability changing counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and the main controller 110 sets the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the closing timing (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot. A value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, 0 is set for “big hit type A”, and 100 is set for “big hit type B” and “big hit type C”. Thereafter, while the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S221 in FIG. 57).

  When the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process or the special symbol 2 variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, it is based on the determination value for the high probability in the first random number table 202a. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability determination value in the first random number table 202a.

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203h is set to zero, and the value corresponding to the jackpot type at the timing of closing the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a (that is, the jackpot end timing) in the final round of jackpot Is set. Specifically, 100 is set for “big hit type A” and “big hit type B”, and 0 is set for “big hit type C”. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is ended until the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 (S223 in FIG. 57).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, a lottery of a normal symbol is drawn based on a random number table for a normal symbol for a high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random number table per normal symbol for low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 62).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of held data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this variation order storage area 203k, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data described above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 51A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the ROM 202 has a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a short-time variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the probability (first random number table 202a for a high probability), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. In the first per-random number table 202a for high probability, a small hit determination value is set to “30 to 39”. On the other hand, no small hit determination value is set in the first hit random number table 202a for low probability.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent a small hit that is not advantageous to the player from being realized at a low probability that is not advantageous to the player as compared to a high probability that is advantageous to the player. Dissatisfaction can be reduced, and at the time of a high probability that is advantageous to the player, a small hit that is not advantageous to the player is established, thereby preventing an excessively advantageous state for the player.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 51C) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. . As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b includes a special figure 1 selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 52 (a)) dedicated to the first special symbol and a special figure 2 dedicated to the second special symbol. And a selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 52B).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the special chart 1 selection table 202b1 is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected, respectively, and the value “1” of the first hit type counter C2 is determined as the big hit A determination value. “0-19” is set as “20-99” as the judgment value of jackpot B. Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the special figure 2 selection table 202b2 is set so that the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be selected, respectively. The counter C2 value “0-19” is set as a jackpot B determination value “20-59” and a jackpot C determination value “60-99”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 51 (d)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 51D, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 53A) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 53 (b)) in the case where the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, and the success / failure determination. When the result is out of play and in the normal gaming state, the dedicated out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 53 (c)), and when the result of the determination is out of place and in the probable gaming state, the dedicated out Each of them is configured at least by a use (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 53 (d)).

  The short time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 54A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern in the short time gaming state, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. At this time, the short variation pattern selection table 202e defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d described above. Specifically, a pattern selection table similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d is defined, and the contents of each selection table are defined to have a variation time shorter than that of the variation pattern selection table 202d. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is running short of time, it becomes easier to win a prize at the starting hole, and the winning ball becomes invalid because the number of held balls is the upper limit despite the winning at the starting hole. It is conceivable that the number of times (so-called overflow) increases. However, by shortening the fluctuation time in the short time, digestion of the number of reserved balls can be accelerated and the frequency at which the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit can be reduced. The number of overflows can be reduced.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is already well known and will be described briefly. However, based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough variation contents (variation time, variation type) indicated by the variation pattern command are described. (Reach, miss, etc.)) to determine more detailed fluctuation contents. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 55, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start flag 223d. And a stop type selection flag 223e and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area). In each of these areas, each of the counters C1 to C3 which are winning information is provided. Each value is stored. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variable display is added by entering the first start port 63a, or in main controller 110, variable display in the first special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 70). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a reserved ball number counter dedicated to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), and is different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Since only 63a (first special symbol) is changed to the second starting port 63b (second special symbol), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 70), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 71). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 70), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 71). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 70) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in 12th Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 56 to 71. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 63a (start winning) is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passage of a ball at the normal symbol starting port 67 is executed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, a change execution determination process is executed in which it is determined which of the reserved balls of the first special symbol or the reserved balls of the second special symbol is to be executed, and the change execution flag 203j is set (S204). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process is variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205). If it is not variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205: No), the variable execution flag 203j. Is determined to be variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210), and if it is not variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203j is variation execution in the special figure 1 (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206), and the special symbol changed by the calculation is obtained. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the one held ball number counter 203d is set (S207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 66) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S209). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S205, if the variable execution flag 203j is not the variable execution in FIG. 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j is the variable execution in FIG. 2 (S210), and the variable execution flag If 203j is variation execution in special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the same process as the process for the reserved ball of the first special symbol described above is performed for the reserved ball of the second special symbol.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S212). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the number-of-holding-balls command in the process of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. 2 Fluctuation start processing is executed (S214). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) described later with reference to FIG. 59 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the big hit of the second special symbol If it is, it is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C will be set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, the special symbol display (the result of the current lottery) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0 (S220). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the probability changing counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203g is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

  In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the hour / hour counter 203h is determined. 1 is subtracted (S223), and the process proceeds to S224. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

  In the process of S224 executed after the process of S219, S222, or S223, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S217 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S224).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is used. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Thereafter, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S304).

  If it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S305), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (S304: No), it is determined whether the execution area data is the special figure 2 (S306). If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (S306: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S307), and this process ends. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  If it is determined in the process of S306 that the execution area data is not special figure 2 (S306: No), there is no suspended ball to be executed in a variable manner, and thus this process is terminated with the variable execution flag 203j remaining in the initial state. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the first special random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the stop type selection of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S401), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S402). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in S402 that the probability change is in progress (S402: Yes), a lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (S403). ), The process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 51B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S403). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 39”, it is determined that it is a small hit, and “40 to 399” If it is within the range, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 51B).

  On the other hand, when the probability changing counter 203g is 0 and it is determined that the probability is not changing (S402: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the low probability of the first hit random number table 202a. (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first hit random number table 202a (FIG. 51B). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S404). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0 to 29”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “30 to 399”, it is determined that it is out (see FIG. 51B). ).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. In the process of S406, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 A display mode is set more (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

  More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 selection table 202b1 of the first hit type selection table 202b, and 3 Of the special jackpots of special symbols (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “20 to 99”, the jackpot B (15R probability variation big hit) is determined (see FIG. 52A).

  In the process of S407, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S408). Specifically, when the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is in the middle of time. If it is determined that the hour / counter counter is 0 and the hour / short counter is not shorter (S408: No), the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 of the variation pattern selection table 202d (S409). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S409, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S408, if the hour / minute counter is greater than 0 and it is determined that the hour / hour counter is running (S408: Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 hour / short fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (S410). ). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S410, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 as in the process of S409. The variation time of the third symbol until it stops at is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern is A (0.5 seconds) per hour (see FIG. 54B).

  In the process of S406, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S406: No), a display mode of out is set (S411). In the process of S411, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out”, and the like are defined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S412). Specifically, when the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than zero, it is determined that the hour / hour counter is in the middle of time. When it is determined that the time / counter counter is 0 and it is not time / short (S412: No), the deviation pattern is used as the deviation (normal) selection table 202d2 or the deviation (probability) selection table of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. It is determined based on 202d3 (S413). It is determined based on the out (normal) selection table 202d2 at the normal time (when the probability changing counter 203g is 0) and based on the out (probability) selection table 202d3 at the probability change (when the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0). It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S409 and S410, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of “150 to 197”, it is super reach (60). If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  On the other hand, in the process of S412, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter is greater than 0 and the hour / hour counter is shorter (S412: Yes), a deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 hour / short fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (S414). ). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S414, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the out symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set as in the processing of S410. The variation time of the third symbol until it stops at is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the values of the entire range), the fluctuation pattern of the time deviation A (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54B).

  When the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is set (S415). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S409, S410, S413, or S414 is set (S416). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 66). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S416 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing (S214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S214) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 57) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), the first per-random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the first per-random number table 202a per the first per-random number table 202a are obtained by the process of S501. The lottery result based on the determination value of the random number table 202a is acquired. Except for the processing of S510 and S514, the same processing as the processing of S209 is performed on the data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the second special symbol, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S510 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S506: Yes), and the game state is short (S508: Yes). In the processing of S510, the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S510). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S510, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the range of values), the fluctuation pattern is B (0.5 seconds) per short time (see FIG. 54C).

  In addition, the process of S514 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is out (S506: No), and the game state is short (S512: Yes). In the processing of S514, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S514). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S514, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern of the time deviation B (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54C).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 56), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first start port 63a. This is a process for holding the value indicated by the random number counter.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start port 63a (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball entering the first start port 63a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 63a (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  If there is no winning at the first starting port 63a (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S603: No), the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 retained ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 66) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S605, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols. 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a (S606), the special figure 1 is set in the first area of the change order storage area 203k (S607), and the process proceeds to S608. In the process of S607, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203k in the fluctuation execution determination process (S204) described above, the start opening fluctuates the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even when there are two types of fluctuations that change the symbol, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the starting slot.

  In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second starting port 63b (S608). If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 63b (S608: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when the first starting port 63a was won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S609), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S610: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S611), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S612). Then, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S613), and to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k. Special figure 2 is set (S614), and this process ends. Note that the determination of the first area in S614 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S607.

  If there is no winning at the second starting port 63b (S608: No), or even if there is a winning at the second starting port 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4. (S610: No), this processing is performed as it is.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the first start port 63a. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first starting port 63a is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol hour / hour state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits a ball to win the special prize opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first start opening 63a is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first start opening 63a as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first starting opening 63a, even if the ball is prevented from entering the first starting opening 63a during the special symbol jackpot, A lot of balls enter 63a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 63a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 51 (d)).

  In the process of S708, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 51 (a)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S712: Yes). The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is greater than 0 (S714: Yes) It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first starting port 63a as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so the first start port 63a. Is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first start port 63a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first start port 63a.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 66) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first start port 63a is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 66) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol start port 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S801: No), or the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than 4 even though the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter One is added to the value (M) of 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 66, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 56) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Also, the number-of-holding balls command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) and the start winning process (see FIG. 61), the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 59), and the special symbol 2 variation process (see FIG. 60). ) Is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 67) and the sound lamp control device 113 are transmitted. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the first start port 63a is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 62), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. The first symbol display device 37 starts. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 59) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 60) is ended, The variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 62) or the process of S721, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 62), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 62). (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1109: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 64 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 66). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1201). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 57) S219 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a of this time is the last round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1207).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 100 in the hour / short counter 203h, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (short time state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), S1208 and S1209 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1416 (see FIG. 69) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 69, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1413 in FIG. 69), it executes a power-off process in S1416. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1416 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process in S1416 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1416, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1416, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1416 is executed (see S1415 in FIG. 69). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1416 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes in S1402 to S1410. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed. S1402 to S1410 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1411 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1412 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1411 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1412 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1408 described later are set (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1409 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1411, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1411). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1412). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1412 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1415), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1416). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1417), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1414: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). This command determination processing (S1411) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1411), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned on (S1502), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1503), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 71) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the number of held balls is extracted from the received command. If the received command is of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. If the received command is of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls extracted is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (S1508). Next, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set (S1509).

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol reservation ball counter (223b, 223c) of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special symbol reservation of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1508. It can be adjusted to the value of the ball counter (203d, 203e). Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter (223b, 223c) of the sound lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter (203d, 203e) of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. When the start winning is detected or the special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter (223b, 223c) of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the special symbol holding ball counter (203d, 203) of the main controller 110 is corrected. 203e). When the processing of S1509 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter (223b, 223c) is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1507, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1507: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1510). When the winning information command is received (S1510: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1511). Return to processing. In the processing of S1511, if the winning information command is for the first special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding information for the first special symbol is stored. One area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. If the winning information command is for the second special symbol, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area for the second special symbol is set to the first special symbol. Let it be an area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1510 (S1510: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1512). When the round number command is received (S1512: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1513), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1514), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1512 (S1512: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( In step S1515, the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include, for example, an opening start command for starting an opening effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1602), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, when the change of the first special symbol is started, the data stored in the first special symbol first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is changed to the second special symbol. When the change is started, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first special area to the fourth area for the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1606). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1607: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1607), and then in the process of S1606 of the command determination process (see FIG. 70), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610.

  In the processing of S1610, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1610). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, since the electric accessory is opened and closed during the time reduction, it becomes easier to win the first starting port 63a than the second starting port 63b. The variation effect based on the first start port 63a is large (that is, the variation effect time is long), and the distribution device 4000 has a large variation effect of either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b (variation). It is possible to solve the problem that the effect of preventing the presentation time from becoming long is lost. Specifically, in the configuration of the twelfth embodiment, during a short time, the variation time of the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is shorter than the second start port 63b. As a result, even if the variation effect based on the first start port 63a increases in the short time, the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is short because the variation time of the variation effect based on the first start port 63a is short. It is possible to prevent the long-running effect from being performed for a long time as compared with the variation effect based on the 2 start port 63b.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time is shortened during the time shortening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first starting port 63a is won more than the second starting port 63b (the electric motor is driven by a normal symbol hit). For example, when the accessory is opened and closed), the variation time of the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 63a may be shortened. As a result, even if it is easy to win the first starting port 63a although it is not in a short time, the variation time of the fluctuating effect based on the first starting port 63a can be shortened, and it is suspended despite winning the first starting port 63a. When the number of balls is the upper limit value, the number of times that the winning is invalid (so-called overflow number) can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation based on winning in the first starting port 63a and the variation based on winning in the second starting port 63b are configured to vary in the order of winning. You may comprise. Thereby, even when the production time of the variation effect based on the winning at the second starting port 63b is long, the variation effect based on the winning at the first starting port 63a can be executed at the same time, and therefore, to the first starting port 63a. In a state where it is easy to win a prize (for example, in a short time state), the number of times that the prize is invalidated (so-called overflow number) when the number of held balls is the upper limit despite winning the first start port 63a. Can be reduced.

<Modification of the 12th Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the game balls that have entered the entrance slot 63 of the sorting device 4000 are arranged at the front and rear positions in the sorting device 4000 by the rotating sorting member 4300 that rotates back and forth. The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are distributed.

  On the other hand, in the sorting apparatus 5000 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the rotating sorting member 4300 that rotates back and forth is vertically aligned in the sorting apparatus 4000. The first start port 63a and the second start port 63b arranged at the positions are distributed. In addition, a variable member 642 and openings 4100c and 4100d are provided on both sides of the second start port 63b.

  As a result, in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, a game ball can easily enter the second start port 63b as well as the first start port 63a with respect to the second start port 63b. It can improve the interest of the player.

  As described above, the structural difference between the modified example of the twelfth embodiment and the twelfth embodiment described above is that the sorting device 5000 is used in place of the sorting device 4000, and the other configuration. Are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The structural difference between the sorting device 5000 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment and the sorting device 4000 in the twelfth embodiment described above is the positional relationship between the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Are vertically arranged from the front and back, a flow path 5110a is provided for guiding the game balls distributed by the rotary sorting device 4300 to the second start port 63b, and variable on both sides of the second start port 63b. The member 642 and the openings 4100c and 4100d are provided. Details of these structures will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 in the modification of 12th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 72 is a diagram of the game board 13 in a modification of the twelfth embodiment. In the sorting device 5000, a front cover member 4100 having the same outer shape as the sorting device 4000 is attached to the game board 13 in the same manner as the sorting device 4000. A rotation distribution member 4300 is arranged inside the front cover member 4100, and a first start port 63a and a second start port 63b are arranged vertically below the front cover member 4100, and are distributed to the rotation distribution member 4300. Game balls can be entered.

  Further, the front cover member 4100 is provided with a variable member 641 that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the first start port 63a and a variable member 642 that makes it easy to enter a game ball into the second start port 63b. ing.

  Although details of the variable members 641 and 642 will be described later, when the second symbol is hit, the front cover member 4100 is formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 by moving for a certain time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Is configured such that a game ball enters the front cover member 4100 through the opening and easily enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b.

  Next, the details of the sorting apparatus 5000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a case where a game ball is distributed to the first start port 63a by the rotary distribution member 4300 when a game ball enters the entrance port 63 of the distribution device 5000.

  The sorting device 5000 has a U-shaped front cover member 4100 that allows a game ball to flow down, and a back cover member 4200 disposed on the back side of the front cover member 4100 using screws or the like. It is fixed and configured. The front cover member 4100 is formed in a substantially vertically long box shape, and is formed in a U-shape with an open rear side. The front cover member 4100 is provided with a rotation distribution member 4300 that is rotatably fixed, a first start port 63a, a second start port 63b, and variable members 641 and 642, respectively.

  A first start port 63 a is formed at the front lower portion of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100. The first starting port 63a is formed with an opening at the top where a game ball can enter, and a first flow path 4121a through which the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path 4121a is a flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the first start port 63a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and protrudes downward from the front cover member 4100 so that the game ball is downward. It is configured in a bowl shape that can flow down. Note that the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 4121a is the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the game board 13 (island facilities, etc.) Then, it flows down to the collecting bowl, which is a flow path member for being discharged, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 together with the game balls that have entered the other winning holes. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100a and a right opening 4100b through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the first starting port 63a.

  On the rear side of the rotation distribution member 4300 of the front cover member 4100, there is provided a passage port 5110a through which game balls distributed in the back can pass. A rear channel 5110a is formed by a rear channel member 5110 at the tip of the passage port 5110a. The rear flow path member 5100 is a flow path that connects the passage opening 5110a and the passage opening 5110b below the passage opening 5110a with the rear face of the front cover member 4100, and is integrally formed with the front cover member 4100 with a resin material.

  More specifically, the back channel 5110a starts from the passage port 5110a and descends while bypassing the back side of the front cover member 4100 to the right so as to avoid the first channel 4121a of the first start port 63a. . After that, it is formed so as to be connected to a passage port 5110b provided below the rotation distribution member 4300 and the first start port 63a and above the second start port 63b. Thereby, the game balls distributed to the back by the rotation distribution member 4300 are guided to the inside of the front cover member 4100 from the passage port 5110b via the back surface flow path 5110a. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the back by the rotation distribution member 4300 are guided to the second starting port 63b provided vertically below the passage port 5110b.

  A second start port 63b is disposed below the passage port 5110b of the front cover member 4100. Similar to the first starter port 63a, the second starter port 63b has a pocket structure having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a second flow path through which the game ball is discharged on the back side. 4122a is formed. Like the first start port 63a, a detection switch (magnetic sensor) that can detect that a game ball has entered is disposed inside the second start port 63b. Further, the game balls that have flowed down the second flow path 4122a flow down to the above-mentioned collective cage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. A detection switch (such as a magnetic sensor) that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the opening of the first start port 63a, and can notify the main controller 110 of the passage of the game ball. It has a possible configuration. A left opening 4100c and a right opening 4100d through which a game ball can pass are formed on both side surfaces of the front cover member 4100 above the opening of the second starting port 63b.

  Further, variable members 641 and 642 configured to be rotatable by a solenoid (not shown) are attached to the front cover member 4100. The variable member 641 includes a left variable member 641a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100a can be closed, and a right variable member 641b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100b can be closed. . The variable member 642 includes a left variable member 642a disposed at a position where the left opening 4100c can be closed, and a second right variable member 641b disposed at a position where the right opening 4100d can be closed. ing. The left side variable members 641a and 642a and the right side variable members 641b and 642b are formed in a bilaterally symmetric shape, are configured in a blade shape, and are fixed to the front cover member 4100 so that a lower end portion thereof is rotatable.

  As shown in FIG. 73A, the left side variable member 641a and the right side variable member 641b are closed positions where the variable member 641 is arranged in a vertically upright position so as to close the left side opening 4100a and the right side opening 4100b. In addition, the variable member 641 is variably controlled to the open position where the variable member 641 is disposed at the position of the reverse letter C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b (see FIG. 74A). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), the left variable member 642a and the right variable member 642b are arranged at positions where the variable member 642 is vertically upright so as to close the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b. The variable member 642 is variably controlled to the closed position and the open position where the variable member 642 is disposed at the position of the inverted C so as to guide the game ball to the left opening 4100a and the right opening 4100b (see FIG. 74A). Is done.

  The drive structure that can be changed between the closed position and the open position is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the left side variable members 641a and 642a and the left side variable member solenoid (not shown). ) Are connected by a connecting member (not shown), and the right variable members 641b and 642b and the right variable member solenoid (not shown) are connected by a connecting member (not shown). Thus, the variable members 641a and 642a can be operated simultaneously by a variable member solenoid (not shown), and the variable members 641b and 642b can be operated simultaneously by a right variable member solenoid (not shown). Therefore, the number of solenoids can be reduced as compared with the case where the solenoids are connected to the variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, and 642b, respectively. Reduction can be achieved.

  The variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, and 642b can be operated by connecting one solenoid so that the product cost can be further reduced. Alternatively, the variable members 641a, 642a, 641b, By making 642b operable by different solenoids, the variation of the operation of the variable member may be increased to improve the interest of the player.

  On the upper surface of the front cover member 4100, there is formed a ball entrance 63 having an opening surface into which the above-described game ball can be inserted, and is configured in a vertically long bowl shape. Inside the entrance 63, a guide wall is formed by a protruding wall portion that gradually protrudes from the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10) to the back side to guide the game ball toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Yes.

  A rotation distribution member 4300 is fixed to the lower portion of the ball entrance 63 so as to be rotatable toward the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Since the structure of this rotational distribution member 4300 is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), in the state in which the rotary sorting member 4300 is rotated to the maximum angle in the right direction (the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the first position), the first housing The portion 4300a is disposed at a position facing the entrance 63. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entrance 63 is accommodated in the first accommodating portion 4300a, and the rotation distribution member 4300 rotates leftward (toward the pachinko machine 10) by its own weight. It is moved and flows down toward the opening of the first start port 64a. Thereafter, the rotation distribution member 4300 is held in a state where it is rotated to the maximum angle in the left direction (the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the second position)) (see FIG. 74B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a case will be described in which the sorting rotating member 4300 guides (distributes) the game balls to the second start port 63b. As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 73, when a game ball enters the entrance 63 with the rotation distribution member 4300 disposed at the first position, the game is rotated to the second position. When the sphere is guided to the first start port 63a, the rotational distribution member 4300 is disposed at the second position as shown in FIG. 74 (b). In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 63, the game ball flows down to the second housing portion 4300c, and the rotation distribution member 4300 is rotated to the first position by the weight of the game ball, so that the back flow A game ball is guided to the second entrance 64b via the path 5110a.

  As described above, the sorting device 4000 according to the present embodiment alternately guides the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b when the game balls enter the entrance port 63. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball is biased toward one start opening, and can suppress the problem that only the reserved ball for one start opening exceeds the upper limit.

  Furthermore, as will be described later, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently obtained without bias by configuring the average of the variation times selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be the same. It can be varied to further suppress overflow. Moreover, overflow can be suppressed more by setting the deviation variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be short (a value based on a design value that enters the entrance 63).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable member 641 (electrical accessory) is attached to the first starting port 63a, and the variable member 642 (electrical accessory) is attached to the second starting port 63b. If the game state is changed to a probability change game state, a so-called overflow is likely to occur where a winning is generated even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Although details will be described later, in this case, in this embodiment, since the variation time of each special symbol is set to be short, it is possible to suppress the holding ball of each special symbol from overflowing, and the player's It can avoid becoming disadvantageous.

  In the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the variable members 641 and 642 are configured to be opened and closed when the time is short. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and which variable member is opened or closed according to the jackpot type. You may specify whether to do it. For example, in the big hit type A, both the variable member 641 and the variable member 642 are opened and closed, but in the big hit type B, only the variable member 641 is opened and closed. As a result, the variable member that can be opened and closed changes depending on the jackpot type (that is, the game value that the player can acquire changes), so the player pays more attention to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, Can improve the interest of the elderly.

  Further, when the variable members 641 and 642 are opened and closed, a time difference may be provided in the opening and closing timing so that the time during which both the variable members 641 and 642 are closed is shortened. Thereby, compared with the case where the variable members 641 and 642 open and close at the same timing, the time which does not enter into the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b becomes short. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time during which the player is in an advantageous state is long.

<About the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the distribution device 4000 that distributes the game balls by alternately rotating the support plate member 4300 in one direction and the other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the game board has been described. The sorting apparatus 6000 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes a pitch sensor 6000a at the entrance to the sorter 6000, and receives a game ball when the game ball enters the entrance of the sorter 6000. Can be notified. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a first start port 63a, a swinging board, and the like. The minute device 6000, the right second starting port 63b2, the variable winning device 65, the general winning port 79, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first start port 63a, the second start ports 63b and 63b2 inside the distribution device 6000, the variable winning device 65, the general winning port 79, and the variable display unit 80 are formed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, a portion different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is provided with a sorting device 6000 instead of the sorting device 4000, and a right-side second starting port 63b2 is additionally provided. It is a part that has been.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first starting port 63a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball enters the second starting port 63b, 63b2. In such a case, the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. In the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the right second start port 63b2 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the right second start port 63b2. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the right second start opening 63b2, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol. In addition, since the lottery method and the like are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the sorting apparatus 6000 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 76A and 76B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting apparatus 6000. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is made of a member that can see through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  In the upper part of the sorting device 6000, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 6000a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. Yes. The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 6300 to the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b that are arranged below.

  The sorting member 6300 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 6300a or 6300c of the sorting member 6300. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 6300a, the sorting member 6300 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 76A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start port 63a. Guide to. Here, each of the sorting members 6300 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left and right directions, and a magnet 6300b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 6300a and the housing portion 6300c.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 6000, the magnet 6301b of the sorting member 6300 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301 of the sorting member 6300 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 6301 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 6301 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 6300 side.

  The magnet 6300b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 6301, and is fixed to the sorting member 6300 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 6301 side. At the position where the sorting member 6300 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 6300a and the accommodating portion 6300c is located directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter approximately one ball), the base-side magnet 6301 is placed. And the magnet 6300b of the sorting member 6300 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, the N pole and the N pole), there is no rebound, and there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 6300 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 6300b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the sorting member 6300 is repelled by the magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301, so that the sorting member 6300 is either left or right. The container 6300a and the container 6300c are rotated so that one of the container 6300a and the container 6300c faces the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the sorting device 6000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 6300a and the housing portion 6300c and causing a clogged ball.

  In addition, the magnet 6300b and the base-side magnet 6301 are repelled, and for example, the accommodation unit 6300a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first start port 63a, and then distribute the game ball. It is possible to prevent the member 6300 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 6300a faces upward). Thus, after guiding the game ball to the first starting port 63a, the storage unit 6300c is directed upward, and the next game ball that has entered the sorting device 6000 is received by the storage unit 6300c and played. The sorting member 6300 rotates about 180 degrees to the right by the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second start port 63b. As described above, the sorting member 6300 can alternately guide the game balls entering the sorting device 6000 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b for winning, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery) caused by winning the first start port 63a, which will be described later. Game) and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning in the second start port 63b can be efficiently executed.

  The right second starting port 63b2 is a starting port where the lottery of the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters as in the second starting port 63b. In the second special symbol, there are four holding balls including the second start port 63b and the right second start port 63b2.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage port of the sorting device 6000 (size that allows one game ball to pass). The right second start opening 63b2 is configured such that only game balls that have passed the right side can enter.

  Here, FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where the sorting member 6300 is stopped in a state where the sorting member 6300 is rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 6300a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage port, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 6300a, and the first start port 63a is guided to the guide unit z1 by rotating the sorting member 6300 counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball. A game ball is guided to.

  After the game balls are distributed to the first entrance by the distribution member 6300, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the distribution member 6300 is stopped at a position where the housing portion 6300c faces upward. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the passage port, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 6300c, and the game ball is distributed to the second start port 63b. Therefore, it can distribute alternately to the 1st starting port 63a and the 2nd starting port 63b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly made by the time the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. The lottery is continued until 100 lotteries are completed. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 102 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 100 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”, the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 100 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot. After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern in which a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means are provided in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 75). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are lit to indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b or 63b2 (start winning prize) is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to a lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the first start port 63 or the second start ports 63b and 63b2 are displayed. The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the spheres that have entered the ball, is indicated by a lighting state.

  When the ball enters the first start port 63a while the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times, The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81, and even when entering the second start ports 63b and 63b2, the number of times of entering the ball is a maximum of four times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first starting port 63a and the second starting ports 63b, 63b2 are configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 63a (start winning prize), the first symbol display device 37 performs a variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) using that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 77 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 77B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 78) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning based on the priority set in the gaming state. The

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set so that only 15 rounds of jackpot are selected, and the second special symbol is selected. Then, it is set so that the jackpot of two rounds is selected with a probability of 40%. As a ratio of jackpots to shift to the high probability gaming state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 80% respectively, and are configured at the same rate.

  Therefore, the first special symbol is set so that the jackpot advantageous to the player is more easily selected than the second special symbol. Here, since the distribution device 6000 wins alternately the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed alternately. .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a bias from being biased to one prize opening, and to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress the problem that the performance becomes extremely high. In addition, by making a winning bias toward one winning opening, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of so-called overflow, in which winning is awarded beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the fact that the ball enters the entrance, but the player does not win, and stops the injection of the ball every time the player reaches the upper limit of the number of held balls. It is possible to prevent the sales at the amusement store side from increasing due to the poor turnover rate.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, the lower side is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the 3rd symbol, and the other upper side is the holding ball. This is a sub display area Ds for displaying numbers and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2 indicate the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. This is the area to be displayed. Specifically, in the small region Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000 are displayed, and in the small region Ds2, the special symbol 2 is reserved. A reserved symbol indicating the number of balls and an effect symbol based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000 are displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, when a ball enters the sorting device 6000, the entering sensor is detected by the incoming sensor 6000a, and an effect symbol is displayed on Ds1 or Ds2 according to the inclination of the sorting member 6300 in the sorting device 6000. Is displayed. Thereafter, when a winning is made at the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is “white circle symbol (see FIG. 78 (a))” so that the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other. The reserved ball of the second special symbol is displayed as “white triangle symbol (see FIG. 78 (a))”, and the effect symbol is displayed as “white square symbol (see FIG. 77 (a))”. The symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed as an integrated symbol in the display area of the number of reserved balls, and the integrated symbol of the integrated symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000. Since the effect design which is a part is displayed, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the reserved design is being displayed based on having entered the sorting device 6000.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and sometimes a notice effect is performed, for example, when a character appears. . In addition, it may be suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual.

  On the other hand, if a ball enters the first start port 63a while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. Further, the holding ball of the second starting port 63b is set in the same manner as the first starting port 63a.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, 63b2 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Electrical Configuration in the 13th Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment, a part different from the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is an audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, only a different part from the pachinko machine 10 in 12th Embodiment is demonstrated here, and the description is abbreviate | omitted about the other same part.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, in addition to the area of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment, the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f and the leading special figure 2 At least a reserved ball number counter 223g, a special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h, and a special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i are provided.

  The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is a counter that is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the passage port when the distribution member 6300 is directed in the direction of distributing the game ball to the first start port 63a.

  The preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g passes through the passage opening when the sorting member 6300 is directed to distribute the game balls to the second entrance with respect to the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223f. Then, it is different in that 1 is added.

  The special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage when the sorting member 6300 faces in the direction to be sorted to the first starting port 63a. This flag makes it possible to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 63a after the game ball has passed through the passage port. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the first starting port 63a even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on, the distribution is not performed without entering the first starting port 63a. It can be determined that the device 6000 has been discharged to the outside.

  The special figure 2 pre-winning flag 223i is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the passage port when the sorting member 6300 faces in the direction to be sorted to the second start port 63b. With this flag, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has entered the second start port 63b after the game ball has passed through the passage port. In the present embodiment, if the ball does not enter the second starting port 63b even after 3 seconds have passed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on, the player does not enter the second starting port 63b and distributes. It can be determined that the device 6000 has been discharged to the outside.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, the display mode of the reserved symbols in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 shows the display timing of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before passing through the passage port (entrance sensor 6000a) of the sorting device 6000 and entering the first start port 63a. It is a timing chart.

  FIG. 79 (a) is a timing chart when the game ball has passed through the passage opening and then enters the first start opening 63a before the entrance determination period (3 seconds) elapses. In the small area Ds1, two effect symbols “white square symbols” indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage are displayed, and two “white circle symbols” that are reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed. (See FIG. 80 (a)). Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, the sorting member 6300 is in a state where it can be distributed to the first start opening 63a in a state where the housing portion 6300a faces upward. In the empty area of the small area Ds1, the “white square symbol” is displayed at the position with the youngest winning order (see FIG. 80B). Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a within 3 seconds, a “white circle symbol” which is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed inside the “white square symbol” (FIG. 81 (a)). reference). When the white circle symbol is displayed, the effect symbol is continuously displayed until the reserved symbol is not displayed.

  As a result, the player recognizes that the fused symbol with the white circle symbol displayed inside the square symbol is the reserved symbol of the first special symbol. Therefore, it can be recognized as the effect that the reserved symbol is displayed until the white circle symbol is displayed after the effect symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the hold of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the effect symbol is displayed, and can reduce a sense of incongruity due to a time difference until the ball actually enters the first starting port 63a.

  FIG. 79 (b) is a diagram showing the display timing of the display mode when a ball enters the passage opening and does not enter the first start opening 63a even after the ball entry determination period has elapsed. When the sorting member 6300 is directed to the first entrance at the timing when it enters the passage, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), an effect design is added to the small area Ds1 and displayed. To do. Thereafter, if the ball does not enter the first starting port 63a even after the ball entering determination period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the effect symbol is set to non-display as shown in FIG. 81 (b). To do.

  Thus, by making the effect symbol non-displayed at the timing when the ball entry determination period has elapsed, it is possible to notify the player that the ball has not entered the first start port 63a. Therefore, the player can play the game while recognizing the exact number of the reserved balls.

  When the game ball passes through the passing port with the sorting member 6300 facing the position for distributing the game ball to the second starting port 63b, the effect symbol “white square symbol” is displayed in the small area Ds2. . In the second special symbol, a white triangle symbol is displayed inside the white square symbol of the effect symbol.

  Note that the position of the sorting member 6300 can be identified by the rotation sensor 990. In the present embodiment, the position of the sorting member 6300 is determined by the rotation sensor 990. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the sorting member 6300 may be determined each time by the entered entrance. . Specifically, the sorting member 6300 is configured to determine that the storage portion 6300c is facing upward based on the ball entering the first starting port 63a. With this configuration, the position of the sorting member 6300 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 6300 rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 6300 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position every time the ball enters the entrance.

  The above-described entrance sensor 6000a and rotation sensor 990 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113.

<Regarding Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device in 13th Embodiment>
Next, a control process of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the control process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, a part different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is a control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, only a different part from the pachinko machine 10 in 12th Embodiment is demonstrated here, and the description is abbreviate | omitted about the other same part.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, in addition to the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, a pre-winning detection process (S1451) and a pre-winning effect effect process (S1452) are executed. Some processes in the command determination process (S1411) are changed. The pre-winning effect process (S1452) is configured to be executed in a short cycle similarly to the command determination process (S1411) and the like, and the setting related to the variable effect is performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. It is configured to be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 83, the advance winning detection process (S1451) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the preceding winning detection process (S1451). This advance winning detection process (S1451) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 82) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, there is a detection of the entrance by the entrance sensor 6000a. Is detected.

  In the advance winning detection process (S1451), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the entrance by the entrance sensor 6000a (S2001). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the entrance (S2002), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has entered the entrance, it is predicted whether the game ball will enter the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. As a method of predicting the winning prize, the direction of the distribution member 6300 is calculated from the inclination by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown) that detects the inclination mounted on the shaft of the distribution member 6300. Note that the detection of the orientation of the sorting member 6300 for predicting the winning prize may not be performed by the rotation sensor 990 that detects the inclination. For example, it may be realized by using a magnet and a hall sensor so that the magnet and the hall sensor are close to each other when they are tilted to be detected. In addition, as described above, since the direction of the sorting member 6300 is alternated between the left and right in the prediction of the winning prize destination, the winning prize may be predicted based on the number of winning prizes. Product cost can be reduced.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the first entrance by the process of S2002 (S2003), and when it is predicted that the ball will not win the first entrance (S2003: No). , The process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the first entrance (S2003: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is acquired (S2004). It is determined whether the value (SN1) of the acquired advance special figure 1 hold number counter is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in the present embodiment) (S2005). If it is not less than the predetermined number (S2005: No), S2006 The process of S2008 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S2005: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S2006). Thereafter, the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2007), a display special figure 1 advance prize effect command is set (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009.

  A winning sound is output in the sound editing / output process (S1409) of the main process (FIG. 82) in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h turned on in the process of S2007. As a result, a winning sound can be output at the timing when the ball enters the sorting device 6000 that can be visually recognized by the player, so that the player cannot visually recognize the winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling compared to the conventional case where a winning sound is output at the timing of winning a prize. In addition, the distribution device 6000 that allows the player to visually recognize the effect (see FIG. 80 (b)) as if the on-hold symbol is turned on by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command set by the processing of S2008. Since the game can be executed at the timing when the ball is entered, the holding symbol is lit at the timing when the player wins at either the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b where the winning is not visible. In comparison, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound output here is continuously output until it enters the first start port 63a. If the ball has not entered the first start port 63a, the ball is stopped based on the flag being turned off after 3 seconds of the ball entry determination period.

  When the process of S2003, S2005 or S2008 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to win the second entrance by the process of S2002 (S2009), and it is predicted that the ball will not win the second entrance. If (S2009: No), the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will win the second entrance (S2009: Yes), the same processing as in the case where it is predicted to win the first entrance (S2003 to S2008) is executed. Specifically, the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is acquired (S2010), and the acquired value of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter (SN2) is less than a predetermined number (less than 4 in this embodiment). ) (S2011), and if it is not less than the predetermined number of times (S2011: No), the processing of S2012 to S2014 is skipped, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is less than the predetermined number (S2011: Yes), the value (SN2) of the preceding special figure 2 holding number counter is incremented by 1 (S2012). The advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2013), a display special figure 2 preceding winning effect command is set (S2014), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). In the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, a reserved ball number command reception process (S1551) is performed instead of the processes of S1508 and S1509 in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment. Executed. Since other processes are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 85, the retained ball number command receiving process (S1551) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1551). In the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1551), first, it is determined whether or not the received held ball number command is a reserved ball number command of the special symbol 1 (S2101). When it is determined that the received held ball number command is the special symbol 1 (S2101: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 held ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2102). Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set (S2103).

  This display-holding ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 63a (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn, so that the start winning is Every time it is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls of the main controller 110 by the processing of S2102. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, Or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. When the process of S2103 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired (S2104), and the variable display holding number N1 in the special symbol 1 is obtained as the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter. It is determined whether or not there are more (S2105). When it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is larger than the acquired value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball counter (S2105: Yes), The value (SN1) is changed to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 is not larger than the value of the acquired preceding special figure 1 hold ball number counter (SN1), the process of S2106 is skipped and the process of S2107 Migrate to

  In the processing of S2107, within the predetermined period (within 3 seconds in the present embodiment) after the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on, the number of variable display hold times N1 in the special symbol 1 and the obtained prior special characteristic are obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the retained ball number counter in FIG. 1 is the same value (S2107). If the determination in S2107 is true, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to OFF (S2108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in S2107 is false, the process of S2108 is skipped and the process ends. Here, based on the detection of the winning by the winning sensor 6000a in the preceding winning detection process (S1451) of the main process (FIG. 83) of the sound lamp control device 113, the special figure 1 preceding winning flag 223h is set to ON, The preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter is incremented by one. Since the main control device adds 1 to the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 by the winning at the first entrance after the ball is detected, and transmits it as a hold ball number command, the change in the special symbol 1 The number N1 of the display suspension is equal to the value (SN1) of the acquired preceding special figure 1 retention ball number counter. Therefore, by receiving the reserved ball number command during a predetermined period after the special figure 1 pre-winning flag is turned on, the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1 and the acquired number of the reserved special figure 1 held balls are obtained. When the counter values (SN1) match, the special figure 1 advance winning flag is set to OFF because there is a winning at the first starting port 63a after the winning detection by the pitching sensor 6000a. If the special figure 1 advance winning flag is not set to OFF within a predetermined period after the detection of the entering, it can be determined that the first starting port 63a has not been won after the entering detection by the entering sensor 6000a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the received reserved ball number command is not the special symbol 1 (S2101: No), the same processing as the processing of S2102 to S2108 is executed for the special symbol 2 (S2109 to S2115). The details of the process are the same as those described in S2102 to S2108 described above, and are therefore omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the advance winning effect process (S1452) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the preceding prize effect processing (S1452). This variation display setting process (S1452) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 82) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the first entry is detected by the entrance sensor 6000a. If no winning is made at the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance, the display special figure 1 advance prize production command or the display special figure 2 advance prize production command is generated in order to change the display of the pseudo hold symbol. And set.

  In the advance prize production process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2201). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is turned on (S2201: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is decremented by 1 (S2202). 1 Pre-winning flag 223h is turned off. Thereafter, the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command is set (S2204), and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is turned on (S2201: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2205). When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2205: Yes), the preceding special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S2206). 2 Turn off the pre-paid flag 223i. Thereafter, the display special figure 2 advance winning effect command is set (S2208), and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is turned on (S2205: No), the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1412). In the variation display setting process of the thirteenth embodiment, when the variation start flag is on (S1601: Yes), the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f or the preceding is determined according to the special symbol for which variation starts. Since the value (SN2) of the special figure reservation ball number counter 223g is different by 1 (S1651) and the other processes are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passed game ball is distributed (in the first start opening 63a, the sound effect “ 2 At the start port 63b, a sound effect “boone” is output. This makes it possible to determine which ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass port.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing of passing through the passage opening is displayed, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entrance determination period, and the first start opening 63a or the first 2 At the timing when the ball enters the start port 63b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the drops, and the drops may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

<About the 14th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the effect symbol is displayed based on the detection of the entrance to the sorting device 6000 by the entrance sensor 6000a. The effect symbol is configured to be an integrated symbol with the reserved symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the reserved symbol is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000. If there is no entry to the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the entry is detected (when the player enters the distribution device but does not win), it is displayed once. The production design is hidden.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, a small region corresponding to a pseudo holding symbol, which is a symbol for artificially suggesting the number of balls to be held, based on the detection of the ball entering the sorting device 6000 by the ball entering sensor 6000a. Displayed on Ds1 and Ds2. The hold symbol displayed based on the ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b is displayed in the small area Ds3 which is the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of holds. Correct identification information is displayed (see FIGS. 90A to 90C). (In this embodiment, “A” is displayed when the number of reserved balls is one, “B” when the number is two, “C” when three, and “D” when four. Then, if there is no ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball detection, the pseudo hold symbol once displayed is displayed in a pseudo manner. By executing the variable display, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when the pseudo-holding symbol is not displayed.

  This is because, for a player who has the impression that it is a reserved symbol with respect to the pseudo reserved symbol that is displayed based on the ball entering the sorting device 6000, the pseudo reserved symbol is not displayed (that is, This is because it is unnatural if the variable display is not executed when one of the holding balls is digested).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment in terms of configuration is included in the main processing (see FIG. 91) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The partial processing is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Other configurations, processing executed by the main control device 110, and other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<About Electrical Configuration in Fourteenth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, the display and variation display of the reserved symbol and the pseudo reserved symbol in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, a period in which the variable display can be stopped and restarted in a pseudo manner during the fluctuation period (a replaceable period) is determined in advance for each fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a case where it is determined that there is no ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball detection in the changeable period during the fluctuation period. . Specifically, when there are two pseudo-holding symbols and two holding symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting device 6000, and the ball entering sensor 6000a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 90 (a)). Thereafter, in the replaceable period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b within the period of the ball entering determination period a, a pseudo stop display is displayed and executed next. A pseudo continuous change notice (pseudo continuous notice) suggesting that a continuous display and a continuous presentation are performed is displayed (see FIG. 90B). Thereafter, the display of the pseudo-pending symbols is changed to two states, and pseudo-variable display is started (FIG. 90 (c)). When the pseudo variation display stops, the pseudo hold symbol and the display of the hold symbol are changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is started.

  Next, FIG. 89 will be described. FIG. 89 shows that a ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b within a predetermined period after the ball is detected in a period (non-replaceable period) that is not the replaceable period described above during the fluctuation period. It is the figure which showed the case where it is judged that there is no. In this case, before the next variable display to be executed, the pseudo variable display is executed, so that the variable display based on the pseudo hold symbol is displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Specifically, when there are two pseudo-holding symbols and two holding symbols for the special symbol 1 and there is a ball entering the sorting device 6000, and the ball entering sensor 6000a detects the ball entering, it is displayed in the small area Ds1. The pseudo-pending symbols to be changed to three (see FIG. 90 (a)). Thereafter, in the non-replaceable period of the variation period, if it is determined that there is no winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b within the period of the ball entering determination period a, the variation display being executed is continued as it is. . After the change display is stopped, the display of the pseudo hold symbol is changed to two states, and the pseudo change display is started. When the pseudo variation display is stopped, one pseudo hold symbol and one hold symbol are subtracted and the display is changed to one state, and the variation display based on the winning information of the special symbol 1 is displayed. Be started. Here, when the pseudo fluctuation display is stopped, a pseudo continuous fluctuation notice (pseudo continuous notice) is displayed, which suggests that the next fluctuation display to be executed and the continuous production are performed. May be.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that both the pseudo hold symbol and the hold symbol which entered the passage could be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By displaying the pseudo-pending symbol as a symbol that is easily understandable to the player and displaying the pending symbol as a symbol that is difficult for the player to identify, the player can recognize the pseudo-pending symbol as if it were a reserved symbol. Therefore, since the pseudo on-hold symbol is added and displayed at the timing when it passes through the passage opening, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference until the ball enters the entrance.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first starting opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the first starting opening 63a or the first opening opening does not pass through the passage opening. 2 When entering the starting port 63b, a difference from the reserved symbol occurs.

  However, if the game ball that has passed through the passage opening does not enter the first start opening 63a or the second start opening 63b, the number of pseudo hold symbols will be larger than the actual hold symbols, but there will be pseudo fluctuations. By executing with a special symbol, the pseudo-reserved symbol is digested one more than the reserved symbol. Thereby, a difference can be eliminated. In addition, when the ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b without passing through the passage port, the difference can be eliminated by lighting the pseudo hold symbol in accordance with the hold symbol.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 91, the main process performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in 14th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  In the main process in the fourteenth embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) is executed instead of the preceding prize effect process (S1413) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 92, the above-described pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation process (S1461). The pseudo continuous variation process (S1461) is performed when the entrance sensor 6000a does not enter the first start port 63a or the second entrance 65b despite the entrance detection by the entrance sensor 6000a. This is a process for executing a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a variation effect is performed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the detection of the incoming ball.

  In the quasi-continuous variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (S3001). If it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the special figure 1 pre-winning flag or the special figure 2 pre-winning flag is turned on (S3001: Yes), the ball entering sensor 6000a has detected a ball entering. In spite of this, since it is a case where it did not enter the 1st starting port 63a or the 2nd entrance 65b, a pseudo | simulation continuous variation start process is performed (S3002), and this process is complete | finished.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93, the pseudo continuous variation start process (S3002) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous variation start process (S3002). This pseudo continuous fluctuation start process (S3002) is performed when the entrance sensor 6000a detects the entrance but does not enter the first start port 63a or the second entrance 65b. This is a process for starting a pseudo continuous variation effect in which a pseudo effect is produced by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a ball entry detection by the ball sensor 6000a.

  In the quasi-continuous variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is on (S3101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 advance winning flag 223h is not on (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3109. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is on (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 advance prize flag 223h is set to off (S3102). Thereafter, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are obtained (S3104), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is determined whether or not the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger (S3104). If it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is not larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3104: No), the process proceeds to S3109.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (SN1) of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f is larger than the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3104: Yes), the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball The value (SN1) of the number counter 223f is changed to be the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (S3105), and it is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol replacement period (S3106).

  If it is determined that the period of stop symbol replacement is possible (S3106: Yes), a display pseudo-stop type command, a display pseudo-variation pattern command, and a display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S3107). ). The fluctuating display is pseudo-stopped by the display pseudo-stop type command set here (see FIG. 90B), and the pseudo continuous variation effect is started by the display pseudo-variation pattern command (FIG. 90 ( c)), the display of the pseudo hold symbol is updated by the display special figure 1 advance winning effect command (see FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball count counter (for example, when the ball was not entered into the first starting port 63a or the second ball inlet 65b in spite of the ball detected by the ball sensor 6000a) When the value of N1) does not match the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be updated. From the player's point of view, it can be shown that the pseudo-holding symbols based on the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f are consumed and a pseudo continuous variation effect is performed, and the special symbol 1 number of held balls When correcting the discrepancy between the value of the counter (N1) and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort felt by the player.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the stop symbol replacement period (S3106: No), the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command and the display special figure 1 pre-winning effect command are sequentially set (S3108). The pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming the pseudo hold symbol as the next variation effect is set by the display pseudo continuous variation pattern command set here, and the pseudo hold symbol is displayed by the display special figure 1 preceding winning effect command. The display is updated. As a result, even if the stop symbol cannot be replaced, a pseudo continuous variation effect that is executed by consuming a pseudo-pending symbol is set as the next variation effect. A mismatch between the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the value of the preceding special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223f can be corrected.

  In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3101, S3104, S3107 or S3108, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 advance winning flag 223i is on (S3109). If it is determined that the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is on (S3109: Yes), the same process as that of the special figure 1 described above with respect to the special figure 2 is performed (S3110 to S3116), and the special figure 2 advance prize flag 223i is performed. If it is determined that is not on (S3109: No), the processing of S3110 to S3116 is skipped, and this processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the special figure 1 advance prize flag or the special figure 2 advance prize flag is turned on (S3001: No), the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is determined whether or not (S3003). If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the pseudo continuous variation (S3003: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of pseudo continuous variation (S3003: Yes), pseudo continuous variation stop processing for determining the stop mode of pseudo continuous variation is executed (S3004). .

  Now, with reference to FIG. 94, the pseudo continuous variation stop process (S3004) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this pseudo continuous fluctuation stop process (S3004). The pseudo continuous variation stop process (S3004) is a process for determining a stop mode of the pseudo continuous variation effect.

  In the pseudo continuous variation stop process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a suspension of continuous variation (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3202 that there is a suspension of continuous variation (S3201: Yes), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of pseudo continuous variation display (S3202). Thereby, a continuous variation effect can be executed by the pseudo continuous variation effect in which the variation effect is started and the variation effect executed in the next hold.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no continuous variation hold (S3201: No), a display stop type command is set with a stop symbol of normal variation display (S3203). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the continuous variation display is not started even though the continuous variation display stop symbol is displayed.

  Note that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is the same as that in the thirteenth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is possible to identify that the passed game ball is distributed (in the first start opening 63a, the sound effect “ 2 At the start port 63b, a sound effect “boone” is output. This makes it possible to determine which ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b at the timing when the game ball passes through the pass port.

  Furthermore, even when the game ball passes through the passage opening as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the passage opening and the timing at which the ball enters the entrance opening, even if the production symbol is not displayed. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the time difference.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage opening, it is determined to which entry the game ball is distributed, and the effect design is displayed at the corresponding position, and then the effect design is displayed. Since the holding symbol is displayed and varied, the player can feel as if the holding ball is increasing at the timing when it passes through the passage opening. Therefore, a player's discomfort can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbols are the same for the hold of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but may be configured to be displayed in different symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in a merged manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect symbol and the reserved symbol may be displayed by continuous animation. Specifically, an animation corresponding to a production pattern in which a drop falls at the timing of passing through the passage opening is displayed, and then an image in which the drop scatters is displayed during the entrance determination period, and the first start opening 63a or the first 2 At the timing when the ball enters the start port 63b, a character imitating a water fairy may be displayed as a reserved symbol from among the drops, and the drops may be hidden. If the ball is not entered into the entrance, the character is not displayed and the drop display mode is not displayed. Thereby, when the animation of the drop is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation of whether the fairy is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of pseudo-pending symbols is larger than the number of reserved symbols, it is determined whether pseudo-variation is possible within the changing variation pattern. In this determination, it is determined whether or not it is within a switchable period set in advance in the variation pattern. Therefore, when a difference is found, it can be quickly resolved if pseudo-variation is possible. In addition, when it is outside the switchable period, the pseudo-variation is executed in the subsequent and subsequent fluctuations, so that the problem that the difference continues for a long time can be suppressed.

  Further, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, by setting the continuous notice in the variation mode of the pseudo variation with the variation pattern of winning, the player increases the expectation for the jackpot when the pseudo variation is executed. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is displayed in alphabet so that it is difficult to determine the number of reserved symbols, but may be displayed in other display modes. For example, a straight bar-like display may be displayed, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the difference in length. Further, the display of the reserved symbols may not be performed at all on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo hold symbol is the actual number of hold. In this case, the reserved symbol is notified by a frame lamp or the like (for example, a cherry petal character is placed and the number of the petals are lit). The number can be notified.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  For example, by arranging the entrance sensor in the entrance 63 in the twelfth embodiment as described above, an entrance sound can be generated when entering the entrance 63, Also in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of holding balls is increasing at the timing when the passage has passed.

  Furthermore, by providing a sensor for detecting which of the support plate member 4300 is tilted, it is possible to discriminate which game ball that has passed through the entrance 63 is assigned (in the first start port 63a). , The sound effect “Puuy” and the sound effect “Boone” can be output at the second start port 63b, and a pseudo-holding symbol can be displayed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Examples of deformation improvements are illustrated below. In the first embodiment, the game ball can flow down the front surface of the sorting apparatus 1000, and the ordinary electric accessory 64 is disposed in front of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b instead of the ordinary electric accessory 64. May be. This ordinary electric accessory is not movable left and right, but is movable forward and backward so that a game ball flowing down the front surface of the sorting apparatus 1000 can enter. In addition, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are arranged near the outer peripheral portion of the sorting apparatus 1000, and the ordinary electric accessory 64 is arranged along with the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. You may set up. The ordinary electric accessory 64 is movable left and right, and allows a game ball flowing down the left and right of the sorting apparatus 1000 to enter. Thereby, also in the sorting apparatus 1000, it is possible to vary the ease of entering the game ball with respect to any one of the starting ports.

  Moreover, it replaced with the support plate member comprised so that the stable distribution could be implement | achieved using the magnetic force in 12th Embodiment to 14th Embodiment, and it stabilized using the weight member in 3rd Embodiment to 11th Embodiment. You may make it use the support plate member comprised so that distribution might be implement | achieved. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the design cost by eliminating the need to consider the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball, and to reduce the product cost by reducing the number of parts.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine having a game area, in which a game ball flows down the game area, receives the game ball flowing down and operates with the weight of the received game ball to move the game ball to a first position and a second position. A gaming machine 1 including a sorting member that alternately distributes to a position.

  According to the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 includes a sorting member that receives a game ball flowing down the game area and alternately distributes the received game ball to the first position and the second position. By setting the position to the target position, it is possible to guide the game balls equally to different target positions in the game area.

  In addition, since the distribution member operates with the weight of the received game ball, the operation of alternately distributing the game ball to the first position and the second position can be executed by a mechanical configuration, and the power for such operation is And control is unnecessary. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 1, the first start port and the second start port, each of which determines whether or not the game is successful by entering the ball, and the game balls distributed to the first position by the sorting member are guided to the first start port A gaming machine (2), comprising: a first guiding unit that performs the second guiding unit that guides the game balls distributed to the second position by the sorting member to the second starting port.

  According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 1, the first ball that guides the gaming balls alternately distributed to the first position and the second position by the sorting member to the first start port and the second start port, respectively. Since the guide portion and the second guide portion are provided, the game balls can be guided equally to the first start port and the second start port (different target positions).

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the first special symbol corresponding to the first start port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified and 2. When a game ball enters the starting port, whether or not the game is successful is selected by lottery. After the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting port is dynamically displayed, the lottery result is notified.

  In this case, if a game ball enters the first start opening during the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the right to dynamically display the first special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is over the upper limit (for example, It is stored as a holding ball until 4). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start port during dynamic display of the second special symbol, the right to dynamically display the second special symbol after the dynamic display being executed is limited to the upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as a holding ball.

  However, it is difficult to uniformly enter the game balls at the first start port and the second start port, and the balls are likely to be biased only at one of the start ports. ) Is difficult to use. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit (the number of stored balls is stored up to the upper limit at both the first start port and the second start port), more than the upper limit number of game balls enter at one start port. Overflow is likely to occur. When an overflow occurs, the winning lottery and dynamic display for the overflowed entry are not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 2, the game balls flowing down the game area can be evenly entered into the first start port and the second start port by the sorting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the upper limit numbers of the holding balls set at the first start port and the second start port, respectively. In other words, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed and the player's disadvantage can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a disk-shaped disk member that is pivotally supported, and a facing wall member that is disposed to face the disk member. The facing wall member is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a position where the phase is different in the circumferential direction from the entrance, and the game at the first position. A first ball outlet for discharging a ball; and a second ball outlet for discharging the game ball at the second position while being disposed at a position that is different in phase in the circumferential direction from the ball inlet, The disc member receives a game ball that has entered the entrance port of the facing wall member, and the disc member is rotated by the weight of the received game ball, whereby the received game A first receiving part for discharging a ball to the first position via the first ball outlet and a game ball that has entered the ball inlet of the facing wall member A second receiving portion that receives and discharges the received game ball to the second position through the second discharge port by rotating the disk member with the weight of the received game ball. A gaming machine 3 characterized in that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance of the facing wall member.

  According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming balls can be alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  That is, when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the entrance of the facing wall member and the received game ball is received by the first receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member has a weight of the game ball. When the first receiving portion reaches the first ball outlet of the facing wall member, the game ball is discharged to the first position through the first ball outlet. In this case, since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion alternately receive the game balls that have entered the entrance wall of the facing wall member, the balls are then entered into the entrance wall of the facing wall member. The received ball is received by the second receiving portion of the disc member, the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball, and the second receiving portion reaches the second outlet of the facing wall member. Thus, the game ball is discharged to the second position through the second discharge port. As a result, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first position and the second position, and the distribution operation is executed using the weight of the game balls.

  In addition, since the distribution member is formed in a disk shape and can be arranged in a plane, even in a game area where the depth dimension (the interval between the game board and the plate glass) is relatively small, It is easy to secure a space for arranging the sorting members.

  In the gaming machine 3, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a receiving surface that receives a game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member is inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 3, the first receiving part and the second receiving part have a receiving surface that receives the game ball that has entered the entrance of the facing wall member, Since it is inclined downward along the circumferential direction, when a game ball entering from the entrance is received by the receiving surface of the first receiving portion or the receiving surface of the second receiving portion, the game is played along the downward inclination of the receiving surface. The ball can roll along the circumferential direction of the disk member, and the position where the weight of the game ball acts on the disk member can be moved. Thereby, since the change of the gravity center position of the disc member due to the weight of the game ball can be increased, the disc member can be reliably rotated and the rotation operation can be performed quickly. .

  In the gaming machine 4, a game is characterized in that the receiving surfaces of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same direction so as to be inclined downward along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Machine 5.

  According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 4, the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined in the same downward direction along the circumferential direction of the disk member. Therefore, the disc member is rotated by the rotating direction when the disc member is rotated by the weight of the game ball received by the first receiving portion and the weight of the game ball received by the second receiving portion. The rotation direction when rotating is the same direction. That is, the rotating direction of the disk member can be unified in one direction. Therefore, compared with the case where a disc member rotates to one direction and another direction, the operation | movement which distributes a game ball to a 1st position and a 2nd position can be performed stably. In addition, when a mechanism for reducing or stopping the rotation speed of the disk member is provided, the number of the mechanisms disposed can be reduced and the structure can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via a one-way clutch, and is allowed to rotate in a direction in which the receiving surface of the first receiving portion and the receiving surface of the second receiving portion are inclined downward. A gaming machine 6 characterized in that the rotation in the opposite direction is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 5, the disk member is pivotally supported via the one-way clutch, and the receiving surface of the first receiving part and the receiving surface of the second receiving part are inclined downward. Rotation (that is, rotation in the direction to be rotated by the weight of the game ball) is allowed and rotation in the opposite direction is restricted, so that it is affected by disturbances such as vibration However, it is possible to avoid the disk member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which it should rotate, and as a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the operation of distributing the game balls to the first position and the second position.

  The one-way clutch is not limited as long as it only allows rotation in one direction and restricts rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch system include a sprag type and a cam type.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet in the facing wall member are inclined and extended toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. A gaming machine 7 to play.

  According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 6, the first and second outlets of the facing wall member are inclined toward the traveling direction of the disc member in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disk member into the first discharge port or the second discharge port of the facing wall member.

  That is, since the distribution member has a structure in which the disc member is rotated, when the game ball moves from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first outlet or the second outlet, There is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the receiving part or the second receiving part and the first outlet or the second outlet. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet are inclined toward the advancing direction of the disk member (that is, the game ball is the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). Therefore, the game balls pushed out from the first receiving part or the second receiving part can be smoothly received into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first outlet and the second outlet are different in phase by 180 degrees with respect to the entrance. The gaming machine 8, wherein the plate member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with the first receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is a position where the first and second outlets are 180 degrees out of phase with the entrance. And the disc member is disposed at a position where the second receiving portion is 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the first receiving portion. The timing received by one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion can be matched with the timing at which the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion discharges the game ball to the first outlet or the second outlet. .

  That is, when one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet port or the second outlet port, the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is positioned in the same phase as the inlet port. Therefore, when the game ball received in one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet, or after discharging, the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part Thus, the next game ball can be received and the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is being transported toward the first outlet or the second outlet (that is, a circle) It is not necessary to receive the next game ball (with the plate member being rotated). Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first and second outlets are disposed. A gaming machine 9 which is arranged at the lowermost position.

  According to the gaming machine 9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 8, the facing wall member is provided with the first and second outlets facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the first outlet Since the mouth and the second ball outlet are disposed at the lowermost position, the game ball can be discharged downward from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. That is, when the ball is discharged, the game ball's own weight acts in a direction to enter the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, so that the game ball is hardly bitten and can be discharged reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 7, the facing wall member is disposed at a position where the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet have the same phase, and the first ball outlet with respect to the ball inlet And the second drainage port is disposed at a position where the phase is different by 90 degrees, and the disk member is configured such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are arranged around the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees. A gaming machine 10 that is alternately arranged in four directions.

  According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines 3 to 7, the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet arranged at the same phase are 90 degrees out of phase with the ball entrance. Since the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are alternately disposed at four positions in the circumferential direction of the disk member while being different in phase by 90 degrees, the first entrance portion and the second reception portion are placed at the entrance. The timing at which one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the played game ball and the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to one of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The timing at which the game ball is discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port can be matched.

  That is, when one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is positioned in the same phase as the first outlet or the second outlet, the first receiver is disposed at a position that is 90 degrees out of phase with respect to the first outlet. Since the other of the part and the second receiving part is in the same phase as the entrance, the game ball received by one of the first receiving part or the second receiving part is discharged to the first exiting port or the second exiting port. The next receiving ball can be received by the other of the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion disposed at a position different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to one of the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Alternatively, while the game ball received on one side of the second receiving part is being carried toward the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet (that is, in a state where the disk member is rotated), the next game ball There is no need to receive. Therefore, the next game ball can be reliably received by the other of the first receiving part or the second receiving part.

  In addition, since the first outlet and the second outlet are disposed at positions that are different in phase by 90 degrees with respect to the entrance, for example, the first receiver is compared with a configuration in which the phase is changed by 180 degrees. The rotation angle of the disk member required for discharging the game ball received at the head or the second receiving part to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be reduced, and as a result, the disk It is possible to reduce the influence of the inertial force accompanying the rotation of the member. Therefore, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion, and discharge the ball into the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the facing wall member is recessed in a surface facing the disc member, and the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion when the disc member rotates. And a first groove and a second groove that extend along the movement trajectory and communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and are stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion. The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the disk member is rotated in a state where a part of a ball is received in the first groove or the second groove.

  According to the gaming machine 11, in any of the gaming machines 3 to 10, the first groove and the second groove are recessed in the surface of the facing wall member facing the disk member, and the first groove and the second groove are The disk member extends along the movement trajectory of the first receiving part and the second receiving part when the disk member rotates, so that when the disk member rotates, the first receiving part or the second receiving part 2. A state in which a part of the game ball stored in the receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove can be formed. Therefore, when the disc member rotates, it is possible to form a state in which the disc member is connected to the facing wall member via the game ball, so that the game ball rolls in the first groove or the second groove. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the inertial force from becoming excessive by applying a rotational resistance to the disk member by utilizing the resistance when sliding. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In addition, since the first groove and the second groove communicate with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is transferred to the first groove or the second groove. If the state received in the second groove (that is, the state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part) can be formed, the game ball is moved to the first outlet or the second outlet for the receiving (protrusion). Since the close-up state and the state where it is easy to enter the first or second exit port, the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first or second exit port.

  Further, the first groove and the second groove are communicated with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, and a part of the game ball stored in the first receiver or the second receiver is the first groove or the second groove. The first receiving part or the second receiving part has reached the first outlet or the second outlet by being in an accepted state (that is, a state protruding from the first receiving part or the second receiving part). In this case, the game ball can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the edge located on the extension line of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In addition, although the terminal end of the first groove and the second groove communicates with the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet, the first groove and the second groove do not communicate with the ball inlet, and the start ends of the first groove and the second groove It is preferable that it is separated from the mouth by a predetermined rotation angle. According to this configuration, the initial stage in which the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, where there is no momentum in the rotation, It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotation of the disk member without generating resistance due to rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove. On the other hand, at the stage where the rotating operation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, so that rolling or sliding between the game ball and the first groove or the second groove occurs. By utilizing the resistance caused by the movement, it is possible to suppress the inertial force of the disk member and to optimize the rotation operation.

  In the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 11, the first groove and the second groove have a recessed depth that increases toward the first ball outlet and the second ball outlet. The resistance caused by rolling or sliding between the first groove and the second groove can be increased as the first receiving part or the second receiving part approaches the first ball discharging port or the second ball discharging port. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized.

  Also, an amount that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is received in the first groove or the second groove (that is, an amount protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion). The game ball can be moved in the direction in which it is accepted (protruded) by gradually increasing the game ball, so that the game ball has an inertial force in the direction of entering the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Can do. As a result, the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet can be easily entered, and the game ball can be reliably discharged into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet.

  In the gaming machine 12, the first groove and the second groove have a maximum recessed depth greater than ½ of the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 12, the maximum recess depth of the first groove and the second groove is set to be larger than ½ of the diameter of the game ball. Since the portion received in the second groove (that is, the portion protruding from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion) is made larger, the game ball can be brought closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, so that the game A state in which the ball can easily enter the first outlet or the second outlet can be formed, and the gaming ball can be more reliably discharged to the first outlet or the second outlet.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at positions of opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. The gaming machine 14 is arranged closer to the disk member than the bottom surface of the two grooves.

  According to the gaming machine 14, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 13, the first outlet and the second outlet are located at the positions of the opening edges on the side facing the terminal ends of the first groove and the second groove. Since the first groove and the second groove are disposed closer to the disc member than the bottom surfaces of the first groove and the second groove, a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part is the first groove or the second groove. When the first receiving part or the second receiving part reaches the first outlet or the second outlet, the game ball is received by the player (that is, protruding from the first receiver or the second receiver). Can be brought into contact with the opening edge (the side facing the terminal end of the first groove or the second groove) of the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. Thereby, it is possible not only to reliably discharge the game ball to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, but also to reduce or stop the rotation speed of the disk member. As a result, it is possible to stably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are configured such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first groove or the second groove. When the disc member is pivoted in a state of being received, the push portion is provided so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotational direction of the disc member. A gaming machine 15 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine 15, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines 11 to 14, the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion are such that a part of the game ball stored in the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion is the first. When the disk member is rotated in a state of being received in the first groove or the second groove, the pushing portion is positioned so as to be able to contact the game ball behind the game ball in the rotation direction of the disk member. Since the pushing portion abuts the game ball that rolls or slides in the first groove or the second groove from the rear in the rotational direction of the disk member, the rolling resistance or sliding resistance of the game ball is reduced. As a result, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed. Further, when the game ball is discharged to the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port, the pushing portion comes into contact with the game ball from the rear in the rotation direction of the disk member, so that the game ball is moved to the first ball discharge port or It can be pushed into the second outlet. Thereby, it is possible to reliably perform the reception of the game ball that has entered the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and the exit to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member is a disk-side magnet disposed as the magnet disposed on the disk member, and the facing wall member in a direction of a magnetic pole attracting the disk-side magnet. The disk-side magnet and the facing-side magnet are arranged such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disk member are formed of the facing wall member. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position that attracts each other at a rotational position of the disk member that is closer to the first and second outlet holes of the facing wall member than the inlet hole. 16.

  According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles attracting the disc member and the facing wall member, respectively. When the disk member rotates, the rotation resistance can be applied to the disk member by using the magnetic force (attracting force) of the disk side magnet and the facing magnet. It can suppress that inertia force becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the disc-side magnet and the facing magnet are such that the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion of the disc member have a first outlet port and a second outlet port of the facing wall member rather than the entrance port of the facing wall member. Since the disk members on the side closer to the position of the disk member are disposed at positions where they are attracted to each other, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force can be appropriately applied to the disk member. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. The rotation of the disk member can be smoothly and promptly advanced without generating. On the other hand, when the rotation of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases. However, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed using magnetic force. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In any one of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the distribution member includes a facing magnet disposed on the facing wall member and configured as a magnet, and the facing magnet is a first receiving portion of the disk member. Or the position corresponding to the movement locus | trajectory which the game ball accommodated in the 2nd receiving part moves with rotation operation | movement of the said disk member, Comprising: The 1st ball outlet and the 1st ball outlet than the ball entrance of the said facing wall member 2. A gaming machine 17 which is disposed on the side close to the ball outlet.

  According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 3 to 15, the facing side magnet is a game ball stored in the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the disk member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the movement trajectory that moves with the rotation operation, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of the facing magnet (the force that attracts the game ball) is used to A rotation resistance can be made to act on a plate member, and it can control that inertia force of a disk member becomes excessive. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In addition, since the facing magnet is disposed closer to the first outlet and the second outlet than the entrance of the facing wall member, the rotation resistance due to the magnetic force is appropriately applied to the disk member. Can do. That is, the initial stage in which the first receiving part or the second receiving part receives the game ball that has entered the entrance and the disk member starts to rotate, there is no momentum in the rotation. It is possible to smoothly and quickly advance the rotating operation of the disk member without generating (a force to attract the game ball). On the other hand, at the stage where the rotational movement of the disk member proceeds, the inertial force of the disk member gradually increases and the momentum increases, and the inertia of the disk member is utilized by utilizing the magnetic force (the force that attracts the game ball). Force can be suppressed. As a result, the disk member can be decelerated or stopped.

  In this way, in the gaming machine 17, the game ball can be used as a target on which the magnetic force by the facing magnet is applied, so there is no need to dispose a magnet on the disk member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the assembly cost and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 16 or 17, the facing magnet is disposed at a position spaced apart from the disk side magnet or the game ball by a predetermined distance in the radial direction of the disk member, and around the disk member. A gaming machine 18, wherein a plurality of gaming machines 18 are arranged along the direction.

  According to the gaming machine 18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 16 or 17, when the disk member rotates, the magnetic force of a plurality of facing magnets arranged along the circumferential direction is utilized. Rotational resistance can be continuously applied to the disk member. That is, when a rotational resistance is suddenly applied to the disk member, the brake member is suddenly braked and the rotational operation of the disk member becomes unstable. Therefore, the first receiving portion of the game ball that has entered the entrance port or The reception by the second receiving part and the discharge of the game ball to the first discharge port or the second discharge port are inhibited. In contrast, according to the gaming machine 18, the same amount of magnetic energy can be gradually applied to the disk member as a rotational resistance. Therefore, the disk member can be smoothly decelerated or stopped, and the rotating operation of the disk member can be stabilized. As a result, it is possible to reliably receive the game ball that has entered the entrance into the entrance by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and to discharge to the first exit port or the second exit port.

  In the gaming machine 18, the closer the plurality of facing magnets to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer to the disc member radial direction from the disk side magnet or the game ball. The gaming machine 19 is characterized in that the amount of separation is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine 19, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 18, the closer to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet of the facing wall member, the closer the plurality of facing magnets are from the disc side magnet or game ball to the circle. Since the amount of separation of the plate member in the radial direction is reduced, the effect of the magnetic force by the facing magnet is increased as the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion approaches the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Can do. Therefore, the inertial force of the disk member can be suppressed, and the rotation operation can be effectively optimized. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  In any of the gaming machines 3 to 19, the sorting member includes a shaft portion that is pivotally supported by the facing wall member, and extends from the shaft portion and protrudes into the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet. And a braking member having a projecting piece and a facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the projecting piece and arranged to face the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, It is pushed up as the projecting piece of the braking member is pushed down by the game ball which is drained from the first receiving part or the second receiving part of the member and passes through the first or second outlet of the facing wall member. The gaming machine 20 is characterized in that the facing piece of the braking member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 20, the braking member has a protruding piece extending from the shaft portion pivotally supported by the facing wall member protruding into the first outlet or the second outlet, and the protruding piece. A game ball that is disposed facing the outer peripheral surface of the disc member and facing away from the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion of the disc member, the facing piece extending from the shaft portion toward the opposite side of the disc member When the ball passes through the first ball discharge port or the second ball discharge port of the facing wall member, the game ball pushes down the protruding piece of the brake member, and the brake member is rotated about the shaft portion, whereby the brake member Since the facing piece is pushed up, the pushed-up facing piece of the braking member can be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. As a result, the disc member can be decelerated or stopped, so that the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion or the second receiving portion and discharged to the first exit port or the second exit port. Can be performed reliably.

  Further, the braking member is operated using a game ball passing through the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet, and the operation of bringing the facing piece of the brake member into contact with the disk member can be executed by a mechanical configuration. Therefore, power and control for such operations can be eliminated. Also, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball can be eliminated. As a result, the number of parts and the control cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine 20, the facing wall member includes a storage portion that is a recessed space recessed in a surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, and the braking member is operable in the recessed space of the storage portion. A gaming machine 21 that is stored.

  According to the gaming machine 21, the storage portion that operably stores the braking member is recessed in the surface facing the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. It can be blocked by the outer peripheral surface. That is, the braking member stored in the storage unit can be operatively held between the recessed space of the storage unit and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, a member that holds the braking member (a member that prevents dropping) can also be used as a disk member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a member for holding the brake member. You can plan.

  In the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. 22.

  According to the gaming machine 22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 20 or 21, the facing member of the braking member is provided with an elastic member made of a rubber-like elastic body at a portion that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, the frictional force between the disk member and the outer peripheral surface of the disk member can be secured, and the effect of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be easily exhibited. In addition, since the elastic member is composed of a rubber-like elastic body, when the elastic member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances of the disk member, the braking member, and the like are reduced. Since it can absorb by elastic deformation, the effect | action which decelerates or stops a disk member can be exhibited stably. Furthermore, for example, a concave-convex shape is formed as compared with a structure in which the disc member is stopped by fitting the convex portion protruding from the facing piece to the concave portion provided in the outer peripheral surface of the disc member. Since it is not necessary, the shape of the part can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member is characterized in that the facing piece is heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion.

  According to the gaming machine 23, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 22, the braking member has a facing piece heavier than the protruding piece, and the center of gravity position is disposed on the facing one side with respect to the shaft portion. When the protruding piece is pushed down and the facing piece is pushed up by the passing of the game ball (when rotated in one direction around the shaft), the weight of the braking member (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the shaft) Using this, the brake member can be rotated in the other direction and returned to the initial position. Therefore, there is no need to provide an urging member for applying an urging force for returning to the initial position, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming machine 24 according to any one of the gaming machines 20 to 23, wherein the facing piece of the braking member is formed to be elastically deformable in a direction approaching or separating from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member.

  According to the gaming machine 24, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines 20 to 23, the facing piece of the braking member is formed so as to be elastically deformable in a direction close to or away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member. Therefore, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disc member, assembly errors and dimensional tolerances such as the disc member and the braking member can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece. The action of decelerating or stopping the disk member can be stably exhibited. Similarly, the variation of the position where the passing game ball pushes down the protruding piece and the passing direction can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the facing piece, so that the game ball is prevented from being bounced back and reliably. Can be passed. Further, when the facing piece is pushed up and brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the disk member, the contact force between them (that is, the braking force for decelerating or stopping the disk member) is elastically deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the rotating operation of the disk member.

  In any one of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. .

  According to the gaming machine 25, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 20 to 24, the protruding piece of the braking member is formed to be curved in an arc shape in a direction away from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member toward the distal end side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the passage of the game ball discharged to the first ball outlet or the second ball outlet from being inhibited by the protruding piece, and to smoothly push down the protruding piece to the passing game ball. .

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receptacle that receive the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. And a main body that is pivotally supported between the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, a guide portion disposed on the main body portion, and guided by the guide portion to move. And when the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body, the first receiving portion is more than the second receiving portion due to the weight of the game ball. When the main body rotates to the first angular position that is below, the game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the game ball received from the entrance is received. The second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game can be performed, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion. When the player receives the game ball, the game received by the second receiving portion is caused by the weight of the game ball and the main body portion rotating to a second angular position where the second receiving portion is below the first receiving portion. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the ball can be discharged to the second position and the game ball entered from the entrance can be received. At the first angular position, the guide portion is the first The moving body is moved downward to the receiving portion side and moved to the first receiving portion side, and at the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward to the second receiving portion side and the moving body is moved. Is moved to the second receiving portion side.

  According to the gaming machine 26, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 26 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the part, for example, after being rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body part to be maintained at the second angular position may return to the first angular position. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 26, a guide unit disposed in the main body unit and a moving body that moves while being guided by the guide unit, the guide unit is the first receiving unit at the first angular position. The moving body is moved downward toward the first receiving portion and moved toward the first receiving portion. At the second angular position, the guide portion is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion and the moving body is moved toward the second receiving portion. Since it is moved, it is possible to maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing the change in the center of gravity position accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first In the case where the two receiving portions are positioned below), the guide body is inclined downward toward the second receiving portion, so that the moving body is moved to the second receiving portion side. As a result, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main body portion is rotated to the first angular position, the moving body moves toward the first receiving portion side. The main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is formed in an annular shape through which the guide portion is inserted. A gaming machine 27 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a rod shape extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a guide portion. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the moving body according to the rotation direction of the main body can be achieved with a simple structure. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost, to enable stable operation, and to improve the reliability.

  In the gaming machine 27, the moving body is a ringed end material made of an elastic material.

  According to the gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 27, the moving body is formed by forming a ringed end material made of an elastic material, so that the work of mounting the moving body on the guide portion is facilitated. As a result, the number of assembly steps can be reduced. That is, when the moving body is mounted on the guide portion, a part of the moving body can be opened by elastic deformation, and the rod-shaped guide portion can be inserted into the annular moving body through the opening.

  The annular shape does not need to be circular, and may be a polygonal shape or an elliptical shape as long as a rod-like moving body can be inserted into the inner periphery thereof. Further, the moving body may be a material wound around, a material cut out from the material, or a material punched from the material.

  The gaming machine 29 according to the gaming machine 29, wherein the moving body is wound around the end material and the ends are overlapped with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 29, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 28, the end portions of the moving body are overlapped with each other, and accordingly, the amount of elastic deformation necessary to open a part of the moving body is large. Become. Therefore, it can suppress that the mobile body with which the guide part was mounted | worn falls off. In addition, since the moving body is formed by winding a material, the manufacturing can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section.

  According to the gaming machine 30, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 29, at least one of the guide part or the moving body is formed in a circular cross section, so that the contact area between the two is reduced and the sliding resistance is reduced. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the guide portion is tilted downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body can be reliably moved along the downward tilt without stopping in the middle, and the movement of the mobile body (Changing the center of gravity position) can be performed quickly. As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in a passage shape extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the moving body is a spherical shape that rolls on the guide portion or A gaming machine 31 that is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  According to the gaming machine 31, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 26, the guide portion is formed in the shape of a passage extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, and the guide portion is rotated. Since the moving body is formed in a moving spherical or cylindrical shape, when the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body, the moving body is reliably and quickly moved along the downward inclination of the guide portion. Can be moved to.

  For example, in a structure where the moving body slides on the guide part, the sliding resistance is large, so the moving body that moves along the descending slope of the guide part may stop halfway, and the moving speed is slow, The movement of the body (change in the position of the center of gravity) may not be in time. On the other hand, if the moving body is formed in a spherical or cylindrical shape and rolls on the guide portion as in the gaming machine 31, the moving body can be reliably moved to the descending inclined end and moved. It is possible to quickly move the body (change in the position of the center of gravity). As a result, it is possible to reliably maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position) by utilizing a change in the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body.

  In the gaming machine 27, the guide portion includes a box body that is open on one surface side, and a lid body that is attached to the one surface side of the box body, and an internal space formed between the box body and the lid body. A game machine 32, wherein the moving body is accommodated in the game machine 32.

  According to the gaming machine 32, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine 27, the guide unit includes a box body that is open on one side and a lid that is attached to the one side of the box body. Since the moving body is housed in the internal space formed between the lids, it is possible to facilitate the work of holding the moving body in the guide portion so that it can be guided, and to reduce the assembly man-hours.

  In the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material, and the fastening screw is fastened. A gaming machine 33, wherein a portion to be fastened is formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine 33, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 32, the box and the lid are made of a resin material, and the lid is fastened and fixed to the box by a fastening screw made of a metal material. The fastened portions to which the fastening screws are fastened are formed on one end side and the other end side of the internal space extending along the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion, respectively. The fastening screw and the part to be fastened can be positioned at a part that becomes a downwardly inclined end when the guide part is downwardly inclined with the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to reinforce the portion that becomes the descending inclined end and to suppress the damage due to the collision of the moving body. Moreover, since the structure for fastening and fixing the box and the lid can also be used as a structure for reinforcing the portion where the moving body collides (the portion that becomes the descending inclined end), a member for reinforcement is provided separately. The product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion includes a recess portion formed by recessing one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion downward. Characteristic gaming machine 34.

  According to the gaming machine 34, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 33, the guide portion has a lower end on one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Since the hollow portion is formed, the guide portion is inclined downward along with the rotation of the main body portion, and when the moving body moves to one end side or the other end side along the downward inclination, the moving body Can be prevented from bouncing back to the rising slope side.

  In any one of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion is curved in an arc shape so that a central portion is below the one end side and the other end side in a direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. A gaming machine 35 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine 35, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 27 to 30, the guide portion has a lower central portion than one end side and the other end side in the direction connecting the first receiving portion and the second receiving portion. Therefore, in the state where the guide portion is inclined downward in accordance with the rotation operation of the main body portion, the gradient on the upward inclination side can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reliably and promptly move the moving body that has been positioned on the ascending slope side of the guide portion as the main body portion rotates. In particular, in the configuration in which the annular moving body slides on the rod-shaped guide portion, the frictional resistance is large, so there is a possibility that the movement of the moving body positioned on the rising slope side may not be started. On the other hand, the gaming machine 35 is particularly effective.

  The gaming machine 36 according to any one of the gaming machines 26 to 35, wherein the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material, and the moving body is made of a metal material.

  According to the gaming machine 36, in any of the gaming machines 26 to 35, since the main body portion and the guide portion are made of a resin material and the moving body is made of a metal material, the position of the center of gravity accompanying the movement of the moving body Change can be made remarkable. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 1 or 2, the distribution member includes a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters, a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion, and a first receiving portion and a second receiving portion. A game that has a main body that is pivotally supported around the center and a center of gravity position moving means that moves the position of the center of gravity as the main body rotates. When the ball is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the main body portion rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving portion is lower than the second receiving portion by the weight of the game ball. The game ball received by the first receiving portion is discharged to the first position, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball received from the entrance can be received. When the game ball that has entered the mouth is received by the second receiving portion of the main body, the second receiving portion is weighted by the game ball. When the main body rotates to a second angular position below the first receiving part, the game ball received by the second receiving part is discharged to the second position, and the ball enters from the entrance. The first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received, and the center-of-gravity position moving means is pivotably suspended on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, respectively. A pair of hanging bodies, proximity means for bringing the hanging body located on the upper side close to the body section when the body is rotated to the first angular position or the second angular position, and a position on the upper side A game machine 37, comprising: release means for releasing the approach to the main body by the approach means to the suspended body and hanging the body.

  According to the gaming machine 37, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine 1 or 2, the gaming machine 37 has a entrance for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area, a first receiving part, a second receiving part, and a first receiving part. And a main body that is pivotally supported about the space between the second receiving portions. When a game ball that has entered the entrance is received by the first receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is reduced. Now, when the main body rotates to the first angular position where the first receiving part is below the second receiving part, the game ball received by the first receiving part is discharged to the first position and entered. The second receiving portion is arranged at a position where the game ball entered from the ball opening can be received. When the game ball entered into the ball opening is received by the second receiving portion of the main body portion, the weight of the game ball is increased. Now, the game received by the second receiving part by the main body part turning to the second angular position where the second receiving part is below the first receiving part. Since the first receiving portion is disposed at a position where the game ball can be received from the entrance and the game ball can be received from the entrance, the game ball is alternately distributed to the first position and the second position. be able to. Further, since the distributing operation can be executed by a mechanical configuration using the weight of the game ball, power for the operation can be made unnecessary.

  Thus, for example, when the main body is at the first angular position, the game ball is received by the second receiving portion, and the weight of the game ball is used to move the main body from the first angular position to the second angular position. Is rotated, the game ball is discharged to the second position, and the posture (second angular position) is set such that the next game ball is received by the first receiving portion.

  However, the position where the game ball is received, the direction in which the game ball is dropped, or the direction in which the game ball is discharged from the first receiving portion varies each time. Depending on the timing received by the unit, when the game unit is rotated from the first angular position to the second angular position, the main body unit to be maintained at the second angular position is flipped up by the repulsive force during the ball discharging operation of the game ball. In some cases, the first angular position may be reversed. In this case, the next game ball is received by the second receiving portion in the same manner as the previous game ball, and is continuously discharged to the second position. Therefore, the game balls cannot be distributed alternately to the first position and the second position.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 37, a pair of suspended bodies that are pivotably suspended respectively on the first receiving portion side and the second receiving portion side of the main body portion, and the first angular position or the second angular position. When the main body is rotated, the proximity means for bringing the suspended body located on the upper side closer to the main body and the proximity means for the hanging body located on the upper side are released from the proximity to the main body and suspended. The center-of-gravity position moving means having the releasing means to be moved is provided, so that the center-of-gravity position can be moved in accordance with the rotation of the main body, and thereby the main body is supposed to be in a posture (first angular position or second angular position) ) Can be maintained.

  For example, the main body at the first angular position receives the game ball at the second receiving portion, and rotates from the first angular position to the second angular position using the weight of the game ball (first 2 position is located below), the suspended body located on the upper side (first receiving part side) is brought close to the main body part, and the suspended body located on the lower side (second receiving part side). Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be changed to the second receiving portion side (that is, the second receiving portion side positioned below is made heavier). As a result, the main body can be prevented from being pulled back and returned to the first angular position, and maintained at the second angular position. The same applies to the case where the main body portion at the second angular position receives the game ball at the first receiving portion. When the main ball portion is rotated to the first angular position, the drooping located on the upper side (first receiving portion side). While the body is brought close to the main body, and the hanging body located on the lower side (second receiving portion side) is suspended, the main body can be maintained at the first angular position.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member is disposed on the hanging body in the direction of the magnetic pole attracting the main body side magnet disposed as the magnet and disposed on the main body portion between the pair of hanging bodies. A suspension-side magnet that is disposed and configured as a magnet, and the proximity means magnetizes the suspension-side magnet to the body-side magnet so that the suspension body positioned on the upper side is attached to the body A gaming machine 38 characterized in that the game machine 38 is maintained in a state of being close to the portion.

  According to the gaming machine 38, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet to maintain the drooping body located on the upper side close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained in a close state, and the reliability of the proximity and the releasing operation thereof can be improved. Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine 37, the distribution member includes a main body side magnet arranged as a magnet between the pair of hanging bodies and configured as a magnet, and the pair of hanging bodies are made of a magnetic material, The gaming machine 39, wherein the proximity means maintains the suspended body positioned on the upper side close to the body portion by magnetizing the suspended body to the body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 39, in the gaming machine 37, the proximity means uses the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the hanging body to maintain the hanging body located on the upper side in a state close to the main body portion. For example, the structure can be simplified and the reliability of the proximity and its release operation can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the two members are mechanically engaged and maintained close to each other. Can be achieved.

  Moreover, what is necessary is just to arrange | position a magnet only to a main-body part because a pair of drooping body is comprised from a magnetic material. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which magnets are provided on each of the main body and the hanging body, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by the amount that the magnet disposed on the hanging body can be eliminated. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the hanging body is made of a magnetic material, its weight can be increased, and accordingly, to the lower side of the center of gravity position due to the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)). The amount of movement can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the main body portion in a proper posture (first angular position or second angular position).

  In the gaming machine 38 or 39, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body portion, and a proximity protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body portion. The drooping body includes an extending piece that extends from the drooping body and that can be locked to the proximity protrusion when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. The means is that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the body portion is locked to the proximity protrusion, so that the hanging body is brought close to the body portion, A gaming machine 40, wherein a drooping body composed of the drooping side magnet or the magnetic material is magnetically attached to a main body side magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 40, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 38 or 39, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and a proximity that protrudes from the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the proximity projection when positioned on the upper side as the main body rotates. Since the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the lower side to the upper side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the protrusion for proximity, the hanging body is brought close to the main body portion, and the main body side magnet A drooping body composed of a drooping magnet or a magnetic material can be magnetized. Thereby, the drooping body located on the upper side can be reliably brought close to the main body. In addition, the hanging body can be brought close to the main body by locking the extending piece to the proximity protrusion, that is, assisting the magnetic attachment of the hanging magnet or the hanging body to the main body side magnet. Since the magnetic force of the main body side magnet and the drooping side magnet can be weakened, the cost of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and when the drooping body is located on the lower side, the proximity state can be released. It can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the distribution member includes a substrate member that pivotally supports the main body, a release protrusion that protrudes from the substrate member toward the main body, And the hanging body includes an extending piece that extends from the hanging body and that can be locked to the release protrusion when positioned on the lower side as the main body rotates. The proximity means is configured such that the extending piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side as the body portion is rotated is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the body portion. The gaming machine 41 is characterized in that the proximity of the drooping body to the main body by the magnetic attachment of the main body side magnet and the drooping body or a drooping body made of a magnetic material is released.

  According to the gaming machine 41, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines 38 to 40, the sorting member includes a board member that pivotally supports the main body part, and the board member toward the main body part. And a hanging body that extends from the hanging body and can be locked to the releasing projection when positioned downward as the main body rotates. Since the extension piece is provided, the extension piece of the hanging body that moves from the upper side to the lower side with the rotation of the main body portion is locked to the release protrusion, so that the hanging body is separated from the main body portion, and the main body The magnetic attachment of the side magnet and the drooping side magnet (proximity of the drooping body to the main body) can be released. Thereby, the hanging body located on the lower side can be suspended and the center of gravity as a whole can be moved reliably.

  One extended piece serves as both the extended piece in the gaming machine 40 and the extended piece in the gaming machine 41 (that is, it can be locked to both the proximity protrusion and the release protrusion). It is preferable to configure as described above. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the extending piece for locking to the protruding portion for proximity and the extending piece for locking to the hanging portion for releasing the protrusion on the hanging body. Can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a rotation shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to a tip end thereof, so that the length of the main body portion is from the rotation shaft. The at least one main body side magnet that is larger than the length to the center and is disposed in the main body portion maintains one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies close to the main body portion. A gaming machine 42 that can be used as a magnet.

  According to the gaming machine 42, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines 38 to 41, the pair of hanging bodies has a length dimension from a pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip end, Since it is made larger than the length dimension from the rotation axis to the center of the main body, at least one main body side magnet disposed in the main body is in a state where one and the other of the pair of hanging bodies are close to the main body. It can also be used as a magnet for maintaining the above. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce the product cost. In addition, in this way, by making the length of the hanging body larger than the length from the pivot shaft to the center of the main body, the displacement of the hanging body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) ), The amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position can be increased, and as a result, the main body can be easily maintained in a proper posture (first angle position or second angle position).

  In any one of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are arranged such that the center of gravity is located on the tip side from the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft that is pivotally supported by the main body portion to the tip. A gaming machine 43 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine 43, in any of the gaming machines 37 to 42, the pair of hanging bodies are more on the distal side than the center in the length direction from the pivot shaft supported pivotally to the main body portion to the distal end. Since the center of gravity position is arranged, the amount of downward movement of the center of gravity position associated with the displacement of the drooping body (proximity to the main body and release (hanging)) can be increased. The first angle position or the second angle position) can be easily maintained.

<Characteristic A group> (sounds when winning 8 chances)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, The storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information, respectively, and the storage number based on the storage of the first information or the second information. An identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol on the display means; and In a gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the selection means is a specific lottery result is displayed A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and a distribution means capable of alternately distributing the game ball passing through the passage opening into the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance And a notifying means for notifying a notifying mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage opening.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Based on the storage means that can store the first information and the second information until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the storage means stores the first information or the second information. , Identification to display on the display means an identification pattern indicating the number of each stored Based on the fact that the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed, a privilege game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player, And a passing port having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passing port can be alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. A distribution unit; and a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that a game ball has passed through the passage. Thereby, since the notification mode is notified by having passed through the passage opening, the discomfort due to the time difference between passing through the passage opening and entering the first and second entrances is determined by the notification mode. Can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A1, when a game ball passes through the passage, it is determined whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance by the distribution means. A gaming machine A2 having a determination unit, wherein the notification unit reports a notification mode in which a determination result by the determination unit can be determined.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a game ball passes through the passage opening, a determination unit that determines whether the passed game ball is distributed to the first entrance opening or the second entrance by the distribution unit. And the notification means notifies a notification mode in which the determination result by the determination means can be determined. Thereby, the player can know in advance whether the game ball can be distributed to the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily predict future game development.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the fact that a gaming ball has passed through the passage, and the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the notifying means outputs a specific sound based on the passing of the game ball to the passage, so that the player can easily There is an effect that it is possible to determine that it has passed through the passage opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means notifies a predetermined notification mode when a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, and informs the passage The notification mode to be notified when the game ball has passed is equal to or longer than the time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball has passed through the passage. A gaming machine A4, which is informed of the length of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the notification means is predetermined when a gaming ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. The notification mode that is notified when the game ball passes through the passage opening is notified to the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. Since the game ball is notified for a time longer than the time required for the game ball to enter, the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance at the timing when it passes through the entrance. Can make a player think. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic B group> (Provisional hold symbol is displayed at winning timing)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. A discriminating unit for discriminating between which the game ball is distributed, a first informing unit for informing a first informing mode based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and a game ball at the first entrance or the second entrance A gaming machine B1 comprising: second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. A determination means for determining which of the mouths is distributed; a first notification means for notifying a first notification mode based on a determination result by the determination means; and the first entrance or the second entrance And a second notification means for changing the first notification mode based on the game ball entering. As a result, in the first notification mode notified by passing through the passage port and the variable second notification mode, the game enters the first entrance port or the second entrance port. You can make the player think as if he entered the ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the time difference between the timing when the player enters the passage and the timing when the player enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first notification mode is notified of the first notification mode, the first notification mode is not changed to the second notification mode by the second notification unit even if the first notification mode elapses for a predetermined time or more. In the case, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the first notification mode is set to a non-notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the first notification means notifies the first notification mode, even if the first notification mode has exceeded a predetermined time, the second notification unit When the notification means does not change to the second notification mode, the first notification mode is set to the non-notification mode, so that the game ball that has passed through the passage opening enters the first or second entry port. This has the effect of allowing the player to recognize that he did not.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo hold symbol and book hold symbol are displayed respectively)
First information is based on a first entrance where a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a game ball entering the first entrance. The acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on the acquisition and entering the second entrance, the first information acquired by the acquisition means when the lottery condition is satisfied, and the second information Lottery means for executing lottery based on each of the information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, and until the lottery condition is satisfied, Based on the display of the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, A privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to a player; A game machine having an opening that allows a game ball to enter, and alternately passing the game ball passing through the passage to the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the distribution means that can be used and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening are separated by the distribution means between the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Determining means for determining which order is allocated, and decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display means, Based on the establishment of the start condition, the decorative symbol displayed first is not displayed among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit displays the start symbol. Based on the establishment of the condition, Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it is intended to initiate a dynamic display of different information.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the game ball entered the first entrance The first information is acquired based on the acquisition, the acquisition means for acquiring the second information based on having entered the second entrance, and the acquisition means is triggered by the establishment of the lottery condition Lottery means for performing lottery based on each of the first information and the second information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means for a predetermined time on the display means, Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information respectively, and the identification information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result is displayed. Based on what has been done, a reward game that is advantageous to the player is granted. A bonus game granting means, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the game ball passing through the passage opening alternately into the first entrance and the second entrance Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing port, the game ball that has passed through the passing port is transferred to the first entrance port and the second entrance ball by the sorting unit. Determining means for determining which order is assigned to the mouth; and a decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determining means on the display means, the decorative symbol display The means is configured to hide, from among the decorative symbols displayed on the display unit, the decorative symbol displayed first, based on the establishment of the start condition, and the dynamic display unit Based on the establishment of the start condition, It is intended to start a dynamic display of the serial identification information.

  Thereby, it can alert | report that it entered into the 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance by the decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the timing of passing through the passage opening and the timing of entering the first or second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the start condition is satisfied at least when the lottery condition is satisfied, so that the player can easily recognize that the start condition is satisfied. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. The gaming machine C3 is characterized by comprising a difference determining means for determining a difference from the number of the first information or the second information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first entrance and the number of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second entrance displayed on the display means and the storage means are stored. Since there is a difference discriminating means for discriminating a difference from the number of the first information or the second information, it is discriminated whether there is a difference between the number of the first information or the second information and the number of the decorative symbols. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine C3, the difference determination means is equal to or longer than a time required for the game ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance after the game ball passes through the passage. A gaming machine C4, wherein the difference is discriminated based on a lapse of a reference time.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3, the difference determining means is configured such that after the gaming ball passes through the passage, the gaming ball is the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is determined based on the fact that a reference time longer than the time required to enter the mouth has elapsed, the game ball that has passed through the passage opening is the first entry hole or the second entry opening. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the ball has been entered.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference discriminating means discriminates the difference based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. A gaming machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the difference determining means is based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance. Since the difference is discriminated, there is an effect that it is possible to discriminate whether the ball has entered the first or second entrance without passing through the passage.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the difference determining unit determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit. If there is a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information that is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information. When the start condition is set by the condition setting means, the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, and then the dynamic display is started again. .

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the difference determining means determines that the number of the displayed decorative symbols is larger than the number of the first information or the second information stored in the storage means, And a condition setting means for setting the start condition within the dynamic display time of the identification information, and the dynamic display means is configured by the condition setting means when the identification information is dynamically displayed. When the start condition is set, after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed with specific identification information, the dynamic display is started again. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of decorative symbols and the number of first information and second information can be matched.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the decorative symbol display means includes the number of the decorative symbols displayed by the difference determination means in the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When it is determined that the number is smaller than the number, the decoration symbol corresponding to the small number of the first information or the second information is added and displayed by the number of differences, and the gaming machine C7 .

<Feature D group>
A game ball has entered the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A game having lottery means for performing a lottery, and a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result In the machine, a passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass, a first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening, and a second flow through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down. A distribution means capable of alternately distributing a path, a game ball flowing down the first flow path to the first entrance and the second entrance, and a game flowing down the second flow path A first position that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the first entrance or the second entrance, and a place where the ball enters more than the first position. And a variable control means for changing the variable member from the first position to the second position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass and a second flow path through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down are formed. The game balls flowing down the first flow path are distributed alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance by the assigning means. The game ball flowing down the second flow path is variable between a first position where it is difficult to enter the first entrance or the second entrance and a second position where entry is easier than the first position. It is variable depending on the member. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means. As a result, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening can easily enter the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game balls that have not passed through the passage also have a predetermined opportunity. Thus, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, regular entry and sudden entry can be provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

  The game machine D1 includes a determining unit that determines whether the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control unit based on establishment of a determination condition. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, it is determined by the determining means whether to change the variable member from the first position to the second position by the variable control means, There is an effect that the player can be expected to satisfy the determination condition.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is attached to the first entrance, A gaming machine having a guide portion that guides a game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first entrance by being changed to the second position by the variable control means. D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is the first entrance. Since the game ball flowing down the second flow path is guided to the first entrance by the guide portion by being arranged in association with the second position by the variable control means, the first entrance There is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter one entrance, while efficiently arranging the second entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine D3, the variable member is arranged on both sides of the first entrance, and at the first position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the first entrance. The game machine D4 is characterized in that, in the second position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path is received and guided to the first entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the variable members are arranged on both sides of the first entrance. At the first position, the variable member restricts the game ball flowing down the second flow path from entering the first ball slot, and at the second position, the game ball receiving the game ball flowing down the second flow path is Since it is guided to the 1 entrance by the variable member, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player by changing the winning rate to the 1st entrance by the variable member.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first entrance and the second entrance are arranged on the same plane, and the variable member is a first variable member associated with the first entrance. And a second variable member associated with the second entrance, and a gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first entrance and the second entrance are arranged on the same plane, and the variable member includes the first entrance Since the first variable member associated with the mouth and the second variable member associated with the second entrance are provided, it is possible to vary the winning rate to the first entrance and the second entrance. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine D5, the variable control means includes synchronization means for synchronizing the first variable member and the second variable member so as to vary the first position to the second position. A gaming machine D6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, the variable control means synchronizes the first variable member and the second variable member and varies the first position to the second position by the synchronizing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the winning rate to the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied in synchronization.

  In the gaming machine D6, the synchronizing means includes a connecting variable means that is variable by connecting the first variable member and the second variable member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the synchronizing means connects the first variable member and the second variable member and can be varied by the coupling variable means. There is an effect that the variable member and the second variable member can be varied in synchronization.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition The game machine D8 is characterized by comprising a variable display shortening means for setting the dynamic display time according to to be shortened based on a predetermined opportunity.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit based on the lottery result of the lottery unit. The variable display shortening means sets the dynamic display time by the dynamic display means to be shortened based on the predetermined trigger when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed by shortening the dynamic display time in accordance with the increase in the winning rate to the first entrance or the second entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, and the acquisition means Storage means for storing a predetermined number of the information for the first entrance and the second entrance, respectively, and the lottery means triggered by the fact that the lottery condition is satisfied, A gaming machine D9, wherein the lottery is executed in a predetermined order based on the information stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are produced. That is, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number for each of the first entrance and the second entrance. The lottery means is executed by the lottery means in a predetermined order based on the information stored in the storage means when the lottery condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to enter more game balls into the first entrance and the second entrance. Therefore, there is an effect that a player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the sorting member has a first receiving portion that can receive the game ball that has passed through the passage port, and a second receiving portion that is different from the first receiving portion. When the first receiving portion receives the game ball, the first receiving portion moves in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first entrance, and the second receiving portion receives the game ball in the second direction. The game machine D10 is characterized in that it moves to the second entrance and guides the game ball to the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the first receiving portion of the sorting member receives the gaming ball and moves in the first direction to play the first entrance. Since the ball is guided and the second receiving portion receives the game ball and moves in the second direction, the game ball is guided to the second entrance, so that the first game ball is not provided with a driving means or the like. There is an effect that game balls can be distributed to the entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine D10, the sorting member includes a pivotable shaft portion, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position facing the passage port by rotating in the first direction, The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the first receiving portion is arranged at a position facing the passage port by rotating in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D10, by moving the sorting member, the position is moved so that the gaming balls alternately enter the first receiving part and the second receiving part. Therefore, there is an effect that the sorting member can be configured with a compact configuration.

  In the gaming machine D10 or D11, the sorting member restricts movement in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part is not receiving a game ball. A gaming machine D12 having a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D10 or D11, the sorting member is moved in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part does not receive the game ball. Since the movement is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the sorting member rotates in a state where the sorting ball is not received by the sorting member, and it is possible to suppress irregular gaming ball sorting. effective.
<Feature E group>
A game ball has entered the first entrance where a game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance or the second entrance. A lottery means for performing a lottery, a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific lottery result, and a game ball Launching means capable of launching based on a user's operation, a first flow path through which game balls launched by the launching means flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first flow path Alternatively, a passing port having an opening through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can be passed, and a game ball that has passed through the passing port are alternately distributed to the first entrance port and the second entrance port. Distribution means that can flow, and the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path and have not passed through the passage opening are A first variable member that is variable to a first position that makes it easier to guide to the ball opening, and a second position that makes it difficult to guide to the first position, and the second flow path to flow down to the passage opening. Having a third position that makes it easier to guide the game ball that has not passed to the first entrance and a fourth position that makes it easier to guide the game ball than the third position; A gaming machine E1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine E1, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A game ball is fired by the launching means based on the player's operation. A game ball that has passed through a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball that has passed through a first flow path through which a game ball launched by the launching unit flows down or a second flow path different from the first flow path can be passed. The first entrance and the second entrance are alternately distributed by the distribution means. A first position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and has not passed through the passage opening is easily guided to the first entry opening, and a second position that is less likely to be guided than the first position. The first variable member is variable. A third position that makes it easier to guide the game ball that has not passed through the passage through the second flow path to the first entrance, and a fourth position that makes it difficult to guide the game ball from the third position. The second variable member is varied. As a result, even if the game ball does not pass through the passage opening, it is possible to enjoy which of the first flow path and the second flow path the game ball can flow into the first entry opening. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest for the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the first variable member is changed to the first position or the second variable member is changed to the third position, the first entrance is more than the passage through the passage. A gaming machine E2, which is set to be easy to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the first variable member is changed to the first position or the second variable member to the third position, rather than passing through the passage port, Since it is set to be easy to enter the first entrance, it is possible not only to pass the passage, but also to enjoy the game ball by aiming at the first variable member or the second variable member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first variable member and the second variable member have synchronization variable means for changing in synchronization.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the first variable member and the second variable member are synchronously changed by the synchronous variable means, so that the entrance to the first entrance is made. There is an effect that the ball rate can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine E4 is characterized by having independent variable means for independently varying the first variable member and the second variable member.

  According to the gaming machine E4, since the first variable member and the second variable member are independently changed by the independent variable means, the case where the first variable member is changed by the player and the second variable member are changed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide different interests in different cases.

  One of the gaming machines E1 to E4 has a determining means for determining whether or not the first variable member or the second variable member is variable based on the establishment of the determination condition. Machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, whether or not to change the first variable member or the second variable member is determined based on the establishment of the determination condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved by making the player expect the determination condition that is an opportunity to change the first variable member or the second variable member to be satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the first variable member and the second variable member are It has a guide part for guiding the game ball to the first entrance by being arranged along with the first entrance and being changed to the first position or the third position. Characteristic gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the first variable member and the first entrance The 2 variable member is arranged along with the first entrance, and is changed to the first position or the third position, so that the game ball is guided to the first entrance by the guide, There is an effect that the first entrance and the second entrance can be arranged in the game area in a space-saving manner.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, a state setting for setting a special state in which the first variable member or the second variable member is easily changed to the first position or the third position based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and dynamic display by the dynamic display means based on the setting of the special state A gaming machine E7, comprising: a variable display shortening means for setting the time to be shorter.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 to E6, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit by the dynamic display unit based on the lottery result of the lottery unit. The variable display shortening means sets the dynamic display time by the dynamic display means to be shortened based on the predetermined trigger when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed by shortening the dynamic display time in accordance with the increase in the winning rate to the first entrance or the second entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the sorting member has a first receiving part that can receive the game ball that has passed through the passage port, and a second receiving part that is different from the first receiving part. When the first receiving portion receives the game ball, the first receiving portion moves in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first entrance, and the second receiving portion receives the game ball in the second direction. The game machine E8 is characterized in that it moves to the second entrance and guides the game ball to the second entrance.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the first receiving portion of the sorting member receives the gaming ball and moves in the first direction to play the first entrance. Since the ball is guided and the second receiving portion receives the game ball and moves in the second direction, the game ball is guided to the second entrance, so that the first game ball is not provided with a driving means or the like. There is an effect that game balls can be distributed to the entrance and the second entrance.

  In the gaming machine E8, the sorting member has a rotatable shaft portion, and the second receiving portion is disposed at a position facing the passage port by rotating in the first direction, The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the first receiving portion is arranged at a position facing the passage port by rotating in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E8, the position is moved so that the gaming balls alternately enter the first receiving part and the second receiving part by rotating the sorting member. Therefore, there is an effect that the sorting member can be configured with a compact configuration.

  In the gaming machine E8 or E9, the sorting member restricts movement in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part is not receiving a game ball. A gaming machine E10 having a regulating means.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8 or E9, the sorting member is moved in the first direction or the second direction in a state where the first receiving part or the second receiving part does not receive a game ball. Since the movement is restricted by the restricting means, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the sorting member rotates in a state where the sorting ball is not received by the sorting member, and it is possible to suppress irregular gaming ball sorting. effective.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether or not the game is won is determined based on the winning of the game medium at the entrance, and when the determination result is a big hit, a game value advantageous to the player is given. For the purpose of distributing the flow of the game medium to the entrance, there is one in which an introduction channel for introducing the game medium to the entrance is provided.
For example, in a gaming machine equipped with two types of entrances, it is possible to alternate the winning of game media to the two types of entrances by sorting in the introduction channel. There has been proposed a gaming machine that can prevent a ball from being biased toward one of the mouths (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231902).
However, in the above gaming machines, there is a problem that the game is monotonous because the game balls that have entered the introduction path are regularly and alternately distributed in the two types of entrances. It was. As a result, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a first entrance through which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance or the second entrance, the lottery means for performing the lottery and the lottery result of the lottery means are advantageous to the player. A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game, and a passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can pass, a first flow path through which a game ball that has passed through the passage opening, and the passage It is possible to alternately distribute the second flow path through which the game balls that have not passed through the mouth flow down and the game balls that flow down through the first flow path to the first entrance opening and the second entrance opening. Making it difficult for the game balls flowing down the second flow path to enter the first entrance or the second entrance. A variable member that is variable to one position and a second position that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first position, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is moved from the first position to the second position. And variable control means for making it variable.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance, and the variable member is Guidance for guiding a game ball that flows along the second flow path to the first entrance by being arranged in association with the first entrance and being changed to the second position by the variable control means. It has a part.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the variable member is disposed on both sides of the first entrance, and flows down the second flow path at the first position. The game ball is restricted from entering the first entrance, and at the second position, the game ball that flows down the second flow path is received and guided to the first entrance. is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is given by the special game granting means. A first flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage opening having an opening through which the game ball can pass and a second flow path through which the game ball that has not passed through the passage opening flow down are formed. The game balls flowing down the first flow path are distributed alternately to the first entrance and the second entrance by the assigning means. The game ball flowing down the second flow path is variable between a first position where it is difficult to enter the first entrance or the second entrance and a second position where entry is easier than the first position. It is variable depending on the member. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means.
As a result, the game balls that have passed through the passage opening can easily enter the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game balls that have not passed through the passage also have a predetermined opportunity. Thus, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the first entrance or the second entrance. Therefore, regular entry and sudden entry can be provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance and is variable. The member is disposed along with the first entrance and is changed to the second position by the variable control means, so that the game ball flowing down the second flow path is guided to the first entrance by the guide unit. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be made to enter the first entrance, while efficiently arranging the first entrance and the second entrance.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the variable members are arranged on both sides of the first entrance. At the first position, the variable member restricts the game ball flowing down the second flow path from entering the first ball slot, and at the second position, the game ball receiving the game ball flowing down the second flow path is Since it is guided to the 1 entrance by the variable member, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player by changing the winning rate to the 1st entrance by the variable member.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a First start port (first entry means )
63b 2nd starting port (2nd entrance means )
64 variable members (variable means)
4000 sorting device (sorting means)
S106 variable control means
Part of S406 determination means
Part of S506 determination means

Claims (3)

A first entrance where a game ball can enter and a second entrance different from the first entrance;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a game ball entering the first entrance or the second entrance;
In a gaming machine having bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is a specific lottery result,
A passage opening having an opening through which a game ball can pass;
A first flow path through which game balls that have passed through the passage opening flow down; a second flow path through which game balls that have not passed through the passage opening;
Sorting means capable of alternately sorting the game balls flowing down the first flow path into the first entrance and the second entrance;
A first position that makes it difficult for a game ball flowing down the second flow path to enter the first entrance or the second entrance, and a second position that makes it easier to enter the game than the first position. A variable member that can be changed to
A gaming machine comprising: variable control means for changing the variable member from the first position to the second position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The second entrance is arranged in parallel on the back side of the first entrance,
The variable member is disposed in association with the first entrance, and is changed to the second position by the variable control means, thereby allowing the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the first entrance. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a guide portion that guides the mouth. The variable member is disposed on both sides of the first entrance, and at the first position, the game ball flowing down the second flow path is restricted from entering the first entrance, 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at the second position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path is received and guided to the first entrance. 4.

Images